《善觉庄严复注》显示巴利原文
Subodhālaṅkāraṭīkā
著作开篇语显示巴利原文
Ganthārambhakathā
足莲无上甘露所悦者
于三世间无动摇、无迷乱、无纷扰者
宣说自身无可比量之德者,
我礼敬那应受礼敬的牟尼王,
于菩提树下,降伏魔敌,获得胜利,
仰仗彼之摄受,得获正法王位者,
具足广大清净妙善功德者,
礼敬彼正法精要之宝者!
他成就了承载善德之器的品质,
对于那无比珍贵的法宝,
由那些顶戴受持、心怀谦敬者所修习,
我以头顶礼最上的僧团。
那些以搅动无尽宝藏之海,
由如搅动之山涌现的最胜智慧所证得;
他们被视为精髓,自身安乐,亦令他人安乐。
显示巴利原文 Yo pādanīrajavarodararādhitena , Lokattayena’vikalena nirākulena; Viññāpayī nirupameyyatamattano taṃ, Vande munindamabhivandiya vandanīyaṃ. Patto sapattavijayo jayabodhimūle, Saddhammarājapadaviṃ yadanuggahena; Sattāpasatta vipulāmalasagguṇassa, Saddhammasāraratanassa namatthu tassa. Yo bhājanattamabhisambhuṇi sagguṇassa, Tassāpi dhammaratanassa mahārahassa; Sambhāvitaṃ sasirasāhitasannatehi, Sambhāvayāmi sirasā gaṇamuttamaṃ taṃ. Ye’nantatantaratanākaramanthanena, Manthā’calollasitañāṇavarena laddhā; Sārā matāti sukhitā sukhayanti caññe, Te me jayanti guravo guravo guṇehi.
1. 过失觉知 第一章显示巴利原文
1. Dosāvabodha paṭhamapariccheda
三宝礼敬之解释显示巴利原文
Ratanattayappaṇāmavaṇṇanā
Munindavadanambhoja-gabbhasambhavasundarī; Saraṇaṃ pāṇinaṃ vāṇī, mayhaṃ pīṇayataṃ manaṃ.
1 于此,本书作者在着手著作时,观察到这样一类行者:他们本具宿世修行相续而来的天性、成就的诗人功德,却因缺乏其他方便而中断,由别处事务的勤勉招致种种不幸。作者心生悲悯,深怀柔软之情,欲造作能成为他们方便之论典特征,为成办所愿,先作已证得之正法天神的随念,故说“牟尼主”等语。若问:既言“欲造作论典特征”,此处未见特征者亦能造论,又何须造作特征?答:的确如此。然而,那些人所作或如虫迹般显现,或只是追随了知者的用法,或为先前已熟习论典者,当如此了知。言语令我心喜悦,这是其中的关联。所谓言语,世间之人说其为名为妙音天女的天神,说其纯白无瑕,住于能成办所欲之白莲胎中。然此处的“言语”,实指无有违逆、能成就所欲之唯一依怙——正自觉者所说之正法,由依此正法,此天神方得显现。这其中,妙音天女于众生出生时令心喜悦,是世间的说法;而正法天神之令心喜悦,则因其远离一切过失、极为清净、无间断地成为义利之唯一依怙而转起,故而令心喜悦。由此生起轻安,由轻安生起乐,由乐生起定,由定生起故,如实现观得以生起,种种不同的字义差别无碍显现,由此达成所欲之成就。因此,以这曲折之语,祈请其加持。显示巴利原文
1. Athāyaṃ ganthakāro ganthārambhe pubbapayogānubandhasabhāvasiddhikaviguṇopetānaṃ yatipotānaṃ tadupāyantaraviratā kamantarāpetaparakkamasambhavenādhigatabyasanasatamupalabbha dayāsañjātarasarasahadayatāya tadupāyabhūtaṃ bandhalakkhaṇaṃ viracayitukāmobhimatasiddhinimittamattanodhigatasaddhammadevatānussaraṇaṃ tāva dassetumāha ‘‘muninde’’ccādi. Nanu ‘‘bandhalakkhaṇaṃ viracayitukāmo’’ti vuttaṃ, kimettha lakkhaṇakaraṇena adiṭṭhalakkhaṇāpi dissanti bandhantāti? Saccaṃ, tathāpi te ghuṇakkharappakāsā tabbidūnaṃ payogānusārino vā siyuṃ, pubbe katasatthaparicayā vā siyunti viññeyyaṃ. Vāṇī mayhaṃ manaṃ pīṇayatanti sambandho. Vāṇīti vā sarassatyaparanāmadheyyā kāci devatā, sā sabbāvadātā yathicchitatthasādhanapuṇḍarīkagabbhe nisīdatīti lokavādo. Vāṇīti pana paccuhavirahenābhimatasiddhinibandhanekatāṇo sammāsambuddhabhāsito saddhammo, tatoyevāyaṃ devatā ruppate. Tattha sarassatiyā yathā’sattā jātāya manosampīṇananti loko, saddhammadevatāya tu manopīṇanaṃ, tassā sabbavajjarahitāyaccantanimmalāya nirantaratthanekatāṇappavattiyā manaso sampīṇanaṃ. Tena ca passaddhi, tāya pana sukhaṃ, tenāpi samādhi, samādhisambhavena yathābhūtāvabodhasambhavato vicittānekasaddatthavisesā paṭibhantyanāyāsena, tato ca yathicchitasiddhinipphattīti vaṅkavuttiyā tappasādamāsīsati.
为何说“殊胜的牟尼主”等语?于二世间,牟尼(muni)即了知者,故为牟尼;因陀罗(inda)即于一切处行使最上主权者,故为因陀罗。其既是牟尼,又是因陀罗;或为牟尼中之因陀罗,故称牟尼主(munindo),即正自觉者。此处此词是其象征性之称谓。虽有其他同义词可用,但诗人所欲表达之义,唯此词能确切表达,故说“牟尼主”一词能滋养其适宜性。同样,因彼以了知二世间之故,于诸牟尼乃至最上主权者中亦行使最上主权;因彼以成为因的方式令他人喜悦,故此处用词实为恰当,同时也滋养了其他词语的适宜性。再者,因此语生于如此之人之口所生莲华之腹,故为美妙;正因如此,它成为皈依处;且因此,它令心喜悦。彼之口,即如牟尼主之口,是莲华。或者说,正因具有与吉祥相合等相同性质,彼口即是莲华,即是莲花。其腹,即于彼处。显示巴利原文
Kiṃvisiṭṭhoccāha ‘‘muninde’’ccādi. Ubho loke munāti jānātīti muni, indati paramissariyaṃ pavatteti sabbatthāti indo, muni ca so indo ca, munīnaṃ indoti vā munindo, sammāsambuddho. Tatoyaṃ tassa nimittakasaññā. Vijjamānesupi pariyāyasaddesvaññesu kavikāmitassatthassekantavācakatteno’ cityasamposakoyaṃ munindasaddo, tathā hi yo ubhayalokajānanena munīnaṃ paramissariyapuggalānampi paramissariyaṃ vatteti, so paraṃ pīṇeti hetubhāvena’tre’tyu’citameva, tathā padantarānampi ocityaṃ poseti. Tathā hi tādisassa vadanāravindodare sambhavā sundarī, tatoyeva paṭisaraṇaṃ, tasmā ca mano pīṇetīti. Tassa vadanaṃ, tamiva munindavadanaṃ, ambhojaṃ. Tameva vā lakkhisaṃyogitādisadhammena’mbhojaṃ, padumaṃ. Tassa gabbho. Tattha sambhavena pavattiyā, uppattiyā vā sundarī niravajjā devatā. Vācā pana dosalesenāpa’samphuṭṭhāva niravajjā, tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘guṇālaṅkārasaṃyuttā’’ iccādi. Tatovāyaṃ saraṇaṃ pāṇinaṃ sattānaṃ paṭibhānādiguṇavisesāvahattamattena paṭisaraṇabhūtā devatā. Vācā pana sabbupaddavanivāraṇena sabbahitasukhasampadāsampādanenaccantapaṭisaraṇabhūtā. Sabhāvanapuṃsakattā cettha na liṅgaparivattanaṃ. Mayhanti ekavacanenattano nirabhimānata’māneti sajjanamācāraṃ. Abhinnapadasileso cāyaṃ, sabbatthevāvīkatasaddappayogato. Sileso cāyaṃ vaṅkavuttiyā sabbattha siriṃ poseti. Tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘vaṅkavuttīsu poseti, sileso tu siriṃ para’’nti . Ayamettha saṅkhepena nayena atthavaṇṇanā. Vitthāranayena pana nānappakārenattho saṃvaṇṇetuṃ sakkā. Tathā sati ganthagāravopi siyāti pakāroyamevabbhupagato.
1 这位论师——僧伽罗耆多摩诃萨弥尊者,智慧行境极清净,是最精微的著述者。他通达三藏一切教典,生起无量喜乐而安住。由于行持与通达这二种教法皆以教理为根本,故以某种方式,通过明了教理之义,怀着“或许能令善士欢喜”之心,为显示达成此目的之方便而着手造论。在著作开端,为守护善士之行仪,尤其为忆念所敬之尊,将此作为所敬之论无障碍圆满成就之因;并为了揭示遮止对著作开端的反对者,以及能诠、所诠、造作方式、目的等,而说出“牟尼主口生莲华……乃至……辛劳”等三颂。其中,第一颂显示了对名为所敬之尊的三宝敬礼;第二颂遮止了反对开端之人;第三颂显示了能诠等。同样,以“令心喜悦”这一教示为由,依止出世间法的教理——即一切智语,显示了自己对无余法宝的净信。而这一对法的净信,因与佛、僧不相离,故于佛、僧亦得成立;以此婉转表达,显示了以三宝为所缘的敬礼。此敬礼,就实质而言,即是成就敬礼之善思。此处之果报,如前已述。显示巴利原文
1. Suparisuddhabuddhigocaraparamavicittaganthakārakoyamācariya- saṅgharakkhitamahāsāmipādo sapiṭakattayasabbasatthapārāvataraṇena sañjātānappakapītisukhamanubhavaṃ paṭipattipaṭivedhasāsanadvayassa pariyattimūlakattā yena kenaci pariyāyena tassā pariyattiyā atthāvabodhena ‘‘appeva nāma sādhujanaṃ paritoseyya’’miti tadadhigamopāyabhūtamidaṃ pakaraṇamārabhanto ganthārambhe iṭṭhadevatāya paṇāmakaraṇaṃ satācārānurakkhaṇatthaṃ , visesato abhimataganthassānantarāyena parisamattiyā ca kāraṇamiti iṭṭhadevatānussaraṇaṃ, ganthantarārambhapaṭikkhepakajanapaṭibāhanapubbakāni abhidhānābhidheyyakaraṇappakārapayojanāni ca dassento ‘‘munindavadanambhoja…pe… parissamo’’ti gāthattayamāha. Ettha paṭhamagāthāya iṭṭhadevatāsaṅkhātaratanattayappaṇāmo dassito, dutiyagāthāya ārambhapaṭikkhepakajanā nisedhitā, tatiyagāthāya abhidhānādikaṃ dassitaṃ. Tathā hi lokuttaradhammanissitapariyattisaṅkhātasabbaññubhāratiyā manosampīṇanāsīsanāpadesena attano nissesadhammaratane pasādo pakāsito. So pana dhammappasādo tadavinābhāvato buddhasaṅghesupi siddhoti ratanattayavisayaṃ paṇāmaṃ vaṅkavuttiyā dasseti. So hi atthato paṇāmakriyābhinipphādikā kusalacetanā. Ettha phalaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
再者,有反对者说:“在罗摩、三曼等庄严论存在时,再作此庄严论,如同将已磨之物再磨,多此一举。”为反驳他们,先揭示罗摩、三曼等论的存在,然后以“他们非纯粹摩揭陀语,故不使用”而予以遮破。因为,遮破的作用正是令此论无有过失。此外,以“庄严”一词,既能诠显音声庄严与意义庄严,又能表示作为论体的“名”(能诠)与作为名之对象的“所诠”。通过说明“庄严”一词及所诠的音声庄严等皆为纯粹摩揭陀语,并采用与“庄严”相称的“随顺”一词,暗示佛语的表达适宜以摩揭陀语,从而显示了造作方式。又因庄严论的流传依止于义庄严等,故以此“庄严”一词本身,便显示了名为庄严造作的目的。显示巴利原文
Puna santesu rāmasammādyalaṅkāresu piṭṭhapisanaṃ viya hotīdaṃ alaṅkārakaraṇanti vadantā viruddhavādino rāmasammādīnamatthibhāvaṃ ubbhāvetvā te suddhamāgadhikā na vaḷañjentīti iminā paṭisiddhā. Nirākaraṇaphalañhi ganthassa niddosabhāvova. Apica saddālaṅkāraatthālaṅkāradīpakena alaṅkārasaddena ganthasarīrasaṅkhātasaññino saññāsaṅkhātaabhidhānañca alaṅkārasaddassa saddālaṅkārādyabhidheyyañca suddhamāgadhikattaṃ vatvā alaṅkārasaddassa visesanabhūtaanurūpasaddopādānena buddhavacanassa upayogattaṃ māgadhikavohārena bhavatīti gamyamānattā karaṇappakārañca alaṅkāraganthappavattiyā atthālaṅkārādinissitattā iminā alaṅkārasaddeneva alaṅkārasaṅkharaṇasaṅkhātappayojanañca dasseti.
然而,论典与目的之间的关系,具有所成与能成的特征;而当显示了作为关系之所依的论典与目的时,关系本身因依止于它们,自然也就得到了说明。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Satthappayojanānaṃ sādhyasādhanalakkhaṇo sambandho pana sambandhassa nissayabhūtasatthappayojanānaṃ dassaneneva tannissitattā sayampi vutto hoti. Vuttaṃ hi–
论典与目的两者,即是关系的所依;
仅由说明此二者,依止于彼的关系亦得说明。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Satthaṃ payojanañceva, ubho sambandhanissayā; Vuttā taṃvuttiyāyeva, vutto tannissitopi so’’ti.
其义为:作为关系所依、即关系基础的论典与目的,二者已得说明;仅由说明此二者,依彼而有、缘彼生起的关系亦得说明。显示巴利原文
Tassattho– sambandhanissayā sambandhassa ādhārabhūtā satthaṃ, payojanañca ubho vuttā, taṃvuttiyāyeva tesaṃ ubhinnaṃ kathaneneva tannissito te nissāya pavatto sopi sambandho vutto bhavatīti.
此处说明“能诠”是为了便于言说;说明“所诠”等,则是为了显示:与这些相应的论典,具足善慧等功德,故应采纳;相反的论典,则如疯人之语,不应采纳。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Ettha abhidhānakathanaṃ vohārasukhatthaṃ, abhidheyyādikathanaṃ pana tehi yuttānaṃyeva ganthānaṃ subuddhipubbakādīnaṃ upādeyyattañca tabbiparītānaṃ ummattakavacanādīnamivaanupādeyyattañca pakāsanatthanti veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhi –
随顺关系的方便,宣说人所追求之义利;
由审虑所得的语句,非从他人见解所得。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sambandhānuguṇopāyaṃ , purisatthābhidhāyakaṃ; Vīmaṃsādhigataṃ vākya-matonadhigataṃ para’’nti.
其义为:依随顺关联之方便,对于以能成就与所成就为相之关联,其能诠与所诠互为所依,而为关联者;为了遍知彼此相顺的性质,作为其因,能宣说四种人义——即法、义、欲、解脱——的语句,具足‘一动词、一词缀,或有具格之句’所说之相,这些中间句聚的集合,乃名为大句之论。此义由审察得来,由具足智相之观察得来,是所期求的;自此以后,在所说相之论以外,不再别有所得,而非所期。这便是诸偈颂安立的目的。显示巴利原文
Tassattho– sambandhānuguṇopāyaṃ sādhiyasādhanalakkhaṇasambandhassa nissayabhūtavāccavācakānaṃ sambandhibhūtānaṃ aññamaññānurūpaguṇaparijānane kāraṇabhūtaṃ purisatthābhidhāyakaṃ catubbidhadhammaatthakāmamokkhasaṅkhātānaṃ purisatthānaṃ vācakabhūtaṃ vākyaṃ ‘‘ekākhyāto padaccayo, siyā vākyaṃ sakārako’’ti vuttalakkhaṇamajjhapatitavākyasamudāyopetaṃ mahāvākyasarūpasatthaṃ vīmaṃsādhigataṃ ñāṇagatilakkhaṇaupaparikkhāya adhigataṃ adhippetaṃ, ato paraṃ vuttalakkhaṇasatthato aññaṃ anadhigataṃ nādhippetanti. Idaṃ panettha gāthānaṃ nikkhepappayojanaṃ.
世间中,住于莲花胎内、一切肢体洁白、能成就所欲之义的名为‘妙音天女’之女神,惯用上称为‘语’。以此义结合,依不破词之双关庄严而说故,词义应如是了知:由具足光辉、芳香等功德而与牟尼王(佛陀)之面相似,而非由称为面之莲花胎内、由腹中生起、运行或出生而美丽无垢,或由光辉而为众生之皈依。即由此故,以除害利乐之义而为一切众生之所依处,具足如前所说功德之语——即妙音天女,而非一切知者之语——如是所说之正法宝,令我心愉悦,令从事著作之我,以成就所欲之义而愉悦。显示巴利原文
Loke padumagabbhe vasantiyā sabbaṅgadhavalāya yathicchitatthasādhikāya sarassatīnāmikāya devatāya ‘‘vāṇī’’ti vohārato iminā atthena yojetvā abhinnapadasilesālaṅkāravasena vuttattā padattho evaṃ veditabbo – munindassa sobhāsugandhādiguṇayogato mukhasadisassa, no ce mukhasaṅkhātaambhojassa gabbhe udare sambhavena pavattiyā uppattiyā vā sundarī niddosā, sobhanā vā pāṇinaṃ saraṇaṃ atoyeva ahitāpanayanahitāvahatthena sabbasattānaṃ paṭissaraṇabhūtā vāṇī yathāvuttaguṇopetā sarassatīdevatā, no ce sabbaññubhāratīti vuttasaddhammaratanaṃ mayhaṃ manaṃ ganthaviracane byāvaṭassa me cittaṃ pīṇayataṃ abhimatatthasampādanena pīṇayatūti.
由了知两世间故为牟尼,且由令自在状态转起故为自在者,依持业释;或于在家牟尼、非家牟尼、有学牟尼、无学牟尼四者中,成为第五,而为自在者,依第六格依主释,故称‘牟尼王’。于天众分,面如同面故为‘面’,即莲花;于正法分,莲花如同莲花故为‘莲花’,于面亦依隐喻而取,为持业释。‘牟尼王的面莲花’、‘其胎’、‘于中生起’、‘由此美丽’等为句。虽为‘语’之差别,因‘皈依’一词唯中性故,无性别转变。‘pāṇinaṃ’为短音,因长音不定故。‘mayhaṃ’以单数显示自己善德生起之因,及无骄慢之状态。虽有余胜者同义词存在,但‘牟尼王’一词,为令可爱、令心悦、莲花相似、美丽、皈依等余义得以恰当而用。如是,彼之面与莲花相似,于彼面腹中生起故美丽,即由此故为众生之皈依。即由此故,于令心悦中善巧、善显,故为恰当。此义于世间中广为流布,故为恰当、应受尊重。其中,唯最上诗人为教导者。即如所说——显示巴利原文
Ubhayalokajānanato muni ca so indabhāvapavattanato indo ceti kammadhārayena vā, agāriyamunianagāriyamunisekhamuniasekhamunīnaṃ catunnaṃ pañcamo hutvā indoti chaṭṭhītappurisena vā munindo. Devatāpakkhe vadanamiva vadananti ambhoje, saddhammapakkhe ambhojamiva ambhojanti vadane ca upacārena gahite kammadhārayo. Munindassa vadanambhojamiti ca, tassa gabbhoti ca, tasmiṃ sambhavoti ca, tena sundarīti ca vākyaṃ. Vāṇiyā visesanattepi ekantanapuṃsakattā saraṇasaddassa na liṅgaparivattanabhāvo. Pāṇinanti rassattaṃ, dīghassa byabhicārattā. Mayhanti ekavacanena attano sādhuguṇodayakāraṇaṃ niratimānataṃ dīpeti. Santesupi aññesu jinapariyāyesu munindasaddo iṭṭhamanosampīṇanaambhojatulyatāsundarittasaraṇattasaṅkhātānaṃ atthantarānaṃ ocityaṃ posetīti payutto. Tathā hi tādisassa mukhaṃ ambhojatulyaṃ, tasmiṃ mukhodare sambhavā sundarī, tatoyeva pāṇinaṃ saraṇaṃ. Tasmāyeva manosampīṇane paṭuttaṃ subyattamiti ocityaṃ hoti. Loke patthaṭamidamocityamādaraṇīyaṃ hoti. Tasmiñhi uttamakavayoyeva upadesakāti. Vuttañhi –
所谓“合宜”者,于世间中广受称扬与敬重,应如是了知;显示巴利原文
‘‘Ocityaṃ nāma viññeyyaṃ, loke vikhyātamādarā;
Tatthopadesappabhavā, sujanā kavipuṅgavā’’ti .
罗摩等古贤之庄严,善妙而悠久,于往昔即已存在;
然而,那些说纯净摩揭陀语的人,却不使用它们。
显示巴利原文 Rāmasammādyalaṅkārā, santi santo purātanā; Tathāpi tu vaḷañjenti, suddhamāgadhikā na te.
2 2. 如此,先以“依止于如此通达、具足成就、能令多种善巧之最胜天众状态的正法宝”的方式,示现对所乐天众的供养。继而,为遮止那些以“前人的庄严相本就存在,何须这番磨粉之劳”为由反对另立庄严相之人的反驳,在遮止了那些人的反驳之后,为说明所诠、目的与关联,而说“拉摩善等”。“拉摩善等”指的是拉摩善等先前的诸位大师,或由与他们相关联而称为拉摩善等。确实存在由相关联而得名的例子,如某种医书被称为“频毗娑罗”。“庄严”指殊胜的装饰,或因令庄严相成就而得名的特定论书。“善”即美好。二者皆“古”,是往昔时所有,即古旧之义。二者皆“存在”。虽然存在。“然而”是一个不变词,用以引出差别。其义为“虽如是存在”。“摩揭陀语者”指生于摩揭陀国之人,或指该国所通行的摩揭陀语。他们拥有此语言,或此语言在他们之中应用,故为摩揭陀语者。“纯净”指因无梵语等混杂之染污而清净。或因他们不混杂、不熟悉其他语言,他们才是摩揭陀语者,故称为纯净的摩揭陀语者,如同说“苦行者”。他们对于如前所述的庄严——即殊胜装饰——并不使用,不享用殊胜装饰。但在论书方面,以学习、持诵等方式,因为他们自己是纯净摩揭陀语者,而拉摩善等人的论书属于梵语等性质——显示巴利原文
2. Athevamabhigatāmitasiddhisampadāpādanekacaturaparamiṭṭhadevatā- bhāvarūpitasaddhammaratanasso’ padassitanipaccakārena iṭṭhadevatāpūjaṃ dassetvā ‘‘nanu bandhalakkhaṇamatthiyeva pubbakaṃ, tasmā kimanena piṭṭhapisanene’’ti lakkhaṇantarārambhapaṭikkhepakajanapaṭibāhanapubbakamabhidheyyappayojana- sambandhe dassetumāha ‘‘rāmasamme’’ccādi. Rāmasammādīnaṃ rāmasammapabhutīnaṃ pubbācariyānaṃ, rāmasammādayo vā taṃsambandhato. Bhavati hi taṃsambandhato tabbohāro yathā kiñcipi vejjasatthaṃ ‘‘bimbisāro’’ti. Alaṅkārā bhūsāvisesā, bandhālaṅkārapaṭipādakatthena alaṅkārakhyā ganthavisesā vā. Santo sobhanā. Dvepi purā pubbakāle bhavā purātanā, porāṇikā. Ubhopi santi. Yajjapi saṃvijjanti. Tathāpi tūti nipātasamudāyoyaṃ visesābhidhānārambhe. Evaṃ santepīti attho. Suddhamāgadhikāti magadhesu bhavā, tattha viditā vā magadhā, saddā. Te etesaṃ santi, tesu vā niyuttāti māgadhikā. Suddhā ca sakkaṭādibhāsitakālusiyābhāvena visuddhā, asammissā vā aparicitattā te māgadhikā cāti suddhamāgadhikā, yatipotā. Te yathāvutte alaṅkāre ābharaṇavisese na vaḷañjenti, pasādhanavisese nānubhavanti. Ganthavisese pana uggahaṇadhāraṇādivasena attano suddhamāgadhikattā, rāmasammādīnañca sakkaṭādibhāvatoti ayamettha saddattho. Bhāvatthalesopettha paripūrati, tathāvidhapatītiyogato. Suddhamāgadhikā attano parisuddhabhāvena pubbe sobhanāpi te alaṅkārā idāni malaggahitabhāvappattā ‘‘kiṃ tehi malaggahitehi amhādisānaṃ suddhasattāna’’nti na vaḷañjentīti.
然而,某些被认可的事物,
大诗人们的言辞之中确然存在
那是超越常人所知的肢分
犹如优雅之美在肢体上闪耀
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Patīyamānaṃ pana kiñci vatthu, Attheva vāṇīsu mahākavīnaṃ; Yaṃ taṃ pasiddhāvayavātiritta- Mābhāti lāvaṇyamivaṅganāsū’’ti.
2 2. 其为贤智者所称许,故为善妙;因其古老、往昔所生,且由罗摩等阿阇梨所造,或因与其相关而仅名称近似的缘故,名为“罗摩等庄严”,正如某医典中“频婆娑罗”之称谓。庄严即是殊胜的装饰;或因成就庄严之相而名为庄严的特定典籍。虽然这些确实存在,然而即便如此,纯摩揭陀语者对其他语言如梵语、俗语等并不熟悉,唯以摩揭陀语者并不将这些罗摩等庄严用作庄严之具,亦不依之而修学、受持等。生于摩揭陀者,或于彼处所了知者,名为摩揭陀;种种音声。他们具有此,或于他们中通行者,即为摩揭陀语者。“纯”一词,是摩揭陀语的简别,或是摩揭陀语者的简别。由于诸音声具有如是令人信受的特殊关联,此处亦显明了义理层面的意味。正如纯摩揭陀语者,虽其音声排列庄严而善妙,却因其语言本身古老故,视为不清净而轻慢,不予采用。应知,作为所欲表达义理之支撑的义理层面,亦唯于大诗人之语中可得。即如所说——显示巴利原文
2.Santo viññūhi pasatthattā sobhanā purātanā pubbakālasambhūtā rāmasammādyalaṅkārā rāmasammādīhi ācariyehi viracitattā, tesaṃ taṃsambandhato tabbohārasadisanāmattā vā rāmasammādayo nāma alaṅkārā kismiñci vejjasatthe ‘‘bimbisāro’’ti vohāro viya. Alaṅkārā bhūsāvisesā, alaṅkārattapaṭipādanato alaṅkāranāmikā ganthavisesā vā santi kiñcāpi vijjanti, tathāpi tu evaṃ santepi suddhamāgadhikā sakkaṭapākatādīsu aññabhāsāsu paricayābhāvato kevalamāgadhikā te rāmasammādike alaṅkāre na vaḷañjenti pasādhanavasena, uggahaṇadhāraṇādivasena na sevanti. Magadhesu bhavā, tesu vā viditā magadhā, saddā. Te etesaṃ atthi, tesu niyuttāti vā māgadhikā. Suddhasaddo magadhavisesano, māgadhikavisesano vā hoti. Saddānaṃ tādisapatītivisesayogato bhāvatthalesopi idha dippati. Tathā hi suddhamāgadhikā attano suddhattā tesaṃ vinyāsena sobhanatte satipi bhāsāya purātanattā aparisuddhoti avamaññamānā na vaḷañjentīti. Vatticchitassatthassa upatthambhakabhūto bhāvatthalesopi mahākavīnaṃ vacanesuyeva labbhatīti daṭṭhabbo. Vuttaṃ hi–
然而,若有某种事物为可信受,
的确存在于大诗人的言辞之中;
那超越诸显著支分的事物;
犹如优雅之美在肢体上闪耀。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Patīyamānaṃ pana kiñci vatthu, Attheva vāṇīsu mahākavīnaṃ; Yaṃ taṃ pasiddhāvayavātiritta- Mābhāti lāvaṇyamivaṅganāsū’’ti.
其意为:于大诗人及受崇敬的诗人的言辞、殊胜语句中,所认知、所了知的任何事物、任何微细义理,皆确实存在。此事物,犹如女子身上超越手足等显著身体支分的优雅之美,又如成为心之所缘的美丽一般,超越显著的声音支分而闪耀放光。显示巴利原文
Tassattho – mahākavīnaṃ pūjitakavīnaṃ vāṇīsu vacanavisesesu patīyamānaṃ gammamānaṃ yaṃ kiñci vatthu yo koci atthaleso attheva atthi eva, taṃ vatthu aṅganāsu vanitāsu pasiddhāvayavātirittaṃ hatthapādādipākaṭasarīrāvayavato adhikaṃ lāvaṇyamiva manogocarībhūtasundarattaṃ viya pasiddhāvayavātirittaṃ pakāsasaddāvayavato adhikaṃ hutvā ābhāti dippatīti.
名称等之解释显示巴利原文
Abhidhānādivaṇṇanā
因此,我或许能以与这些无庄严者相宜的庄严,令他们满足;
此精勤正是为他们而设。
显示巴利原文 Tenāpi nāma toseyya-mete’laṅkāravajjite; Anurūpenā’laṅkāre-ne’sameso parissamo.
3 “因此”等:由于他们不采用那些庄严,以此因缘,这些行者便无有庄严——即远离饰物或特定典籍,或者说,他们舍离了如前所述的庄严;我今以与这些行者相称的庄严——因其现今所作故为崭新,因其安住于十力尊口莲中所生之语而作故为合宜——或以饰物,或以庄严典籍,令他们得以满足:即依其所欲庄严之用,或依听闻受持等之用而采用,令得欢喜。或许能如此。我们这精勤,便是为了令他们如此满足而进行的庄严典籍之运用。显示巴利原文
3.Teneccādi. Yena te alaṅkāre na vaḷañjenti, tena kāraṇena alaṅkāravajjite ābharaṇehi, ganthavisesehi vā rahite, alaṅkārā vā yathāvuttavajjitā yehi te, ete yatipote esaṃ yatipotānaṃ anurūpena idāni viraciyamānattābhinavabhāvato, dasabalavadanakamalamajjhavāsitabhāsitaviracitabhāvato ca anucchavikena alaṅkārena ābharaṇena, alaṅkārasatthena vā toseyyaṃ apināma yathicchitapasādhanavasena, savanadhāraṇādivasena vā vaḷañjanena santuṭṭhe kareyyaṃ appeva nāma yannūnāti eso parissamo ayaṃ amhākaṃ tādisasantuṭṭhijanakālaṅkārapakaraṇappayogo.
“装饰”是指以装饰品庄严自身,即项链、手镯等饰物。而“以庄严组合之身而称为庄严”这一说法,则用“庄严”一词涵盖了音声庄严如明快等,以及种种义理庄严如本性叙述等;通过这些,那名为音声与意义的组合之身得以美化。正如人的身体佩戴项链、手镯等装饰品而显得美丽,同样,在组合之身上安立音声庄严与义理庄严,也由此显得美丽。因此,下文将说:“那些庄严使其达到值得获取的状态”,以及“具足义理庄严”等。显示巴利原文
Alaṅkaronti attabhāvamanenāti alaṅkāro, ābharaṇaṃ hārakeyūrādi. Alaṅkaronti bandhasarīramanenāti alaṅkārotiminā pana alaṅkārasaddena pasādādayo saddālaṅkārā, sabhāvavutyādayo ca atthālaṅkārā nānappakārā saṅgahitā, yehi saddatthasaṅkhātaṃ bandhasarīraṃ sobhate, yathā hi purisasarīre hārakeyūrādyalaṅkāro nyasyate, yena sobhate, tathā bandhasarīrepi saddālaṅkārā, atthālaṅkārā ca nikkhipīyanti, yato sobhate. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘taṃ tu pāpentulaṅkārā, vindanīyatarattana’’nti ca, ‘‘atthālaṅkārasahite’’ccādikañca .
然而,由于具备庄严的安立特性,组合之身也因其与庄严相关而被称为庄严;同样,阐明它的、名为《善觉庄严》的论著,也因具备庄严的阐明作用而被称为庄严,正如《吉祥经》一般。因为下文将说:“论著也是诗人们言语的庄严之阐明者”等。在此说:显示巴利原文
Alaṅkāravidhānabhāvena tu bandhasarīrampi tadatthiyā alaṅkāro, tathā tappaṭipādakaṃ subodhālaṅkāranāmadheyyasatthaṃ alaṅkatapaṭipādakattena maṅgalasuttanti viya. Vakkhati hi ‘‘ganthopi kavivācāna-malaṅkārappakāsako’’ ccādi. Atra uccate –
“庄严”一词,主要依止于音声庄严与义理庄严;
依其功能,亦转用于其所依之处,以及论著之中。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mukhyolaṅkārasaddoyaṃ, saddatthālaṅkatissito; Sāmatthiyā tvadhiṭṭhāne, tathā satthepi tabbatī’’ti.
以此说明其所诠等。“所诠”,即完整的论著所表达的意义。而它(所诠)便是透过身体庄严的分类安立,对这些庄严的阐明。因为它们是由《善觉庄严》阐明的。以某物阐明某物时,该物即成为其所诠,因此论著也是所诠。然而,身体庄严的撰述目的已经显示,因为《善觉庄严》正是依此而展开的。凡是为了某种目的而展开,那便是它的目的,而这一目的具有诗才、名声、成就等特征,因为《善觉庄严》的撰述辗转以此为目的。论著与目的之间,具有能成与所成的关系,这已由显示所依的语句表明了。如所说:显示巴利原文
Anenassābhidheyyādīni vuccanti. Abhidhīyate iti abhidheyyaṃ, samuditena satthena vacanīyattho. So ca sarīrālaṅkāravibhāgakappanāya tesaṃ paṭipādanaṃ. Subodhālaṅkārena hi te paṭipādīyanti. Yena ca yo paṭipādīyati, tassāyamattho bhavatīti abhidheyyasatthopi. Dassitameva tu sarīrālaṅkārasaṅkharaṇaṃ payojanaṃ, taṃ nissāya subodhālaṅkārappavattito. Yassa hi yamuddissa pavatti hoti, taṃ tassa payojanaṃ, taṃ pana kavittakittipasiddhādilakkhaṇaṃ, paramparāya tadatthatāya subodhālaṅkārasaṅkharaṇassa. Satthapayojanānaṃ, sādhiyasādhanalakkhaṇo sambandho tu nissayapadassinā dassitoyeva. Yathāha –
论著与目的两者,皆以关系和所依为依止;
通过如是之语,所述便已说明,依止于它者亦复说明。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Satthaṃ payojanañceva, ubho sambandhanissayā; Vuttātaṃvuttiyāyeva, vutto tannissitopi so’’ti.
而有关所诠等的论述,乃为具足此者而说;因为它是为具足殊胜审察者所摄受,才被采纳,其他如狂人言语等则应予舍离。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Abhidheyyādikathanañca taṃsamaṅgisseva ca vīmaṃsāvisesasamaṅgīnamupādīyamānattā, aññādisassa pana ummattakavacanādino viya heyyattā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
随顺关系之方便,宣说人义;
由审察所得之语句,非从他人所获。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sambandhānuguṇopāyaṃ, purisatthābhidhāyakaṃ; Vīmaṃsādhigataṃ vākya-matonadhigataṃ para’’nti.
此处“语句”,意指具足语句特征的内部语句集合,即大语句之体,正是指这部论著本身。显示巴利原文
Vākyanti cettha vākyalakkhaṇopetamantaravākyasannicayaṃ mahāvākyasarūpaṃ satthamevādhippetaṃ.
3 他们因以那样的庄严作为受用,故以此因缘,那些缺失庄严(即饰物或著作)者,便远离了它们。对于这些纯摩揭陀语者,为令其满足——由依于适合他们纯摩揭陀语者、因新颖而随顺摩揭陀语形态的,或者因由十力(佛陀)所说而构成故随顺的庄严,即饰物或著作——我或令他们使用庄严,或令他们掌握、受持等著作,以此令其满足。或许,“这真是殊妙啊”——这即是我的精进,即我此《庄严论》之著作。“或许”一词于此暗示“iti”一词之义。显示巴利原文
3. Yena te te alaṅkārena vaḷañjenti, tena kāraṇena alaṅkāravajjite ābharaṇavisesehi, ganthavisesehi vā vajjite, te virahite yehi ete suddhamāgadhike esaṃ suddhamāgadhikānaṃ anurūpena abhinavabhāvato māgadhikasarūpaṃ anugatarūpena, dasabalabhāsitaviracitattā vā anukūlena alaṅkārena ābharaṇavisesena, ganthavisesena vā toseyyaṃ alaṅkāravaḷañjāpanena, ganthavisese uggahaṇadhāraṇādikārāpanena vā santuṭṭhe kareyyaṃ apināma yaṃnūna sundaramiti, eso parissamo ayaṃ mama alaṅkārapakaraṇappayogo. Apināmāti ettha itisaddo gamyamāno.
“Alaṅkārehi vajjitā”意为以庄严而被舍弃,“alaṅkārā vajjitā”则指他们被舍弃之庄严。所谓“rūpassa anu anurūpaṃ”,即随顺于色、与色相合,或随行于色、与色相应,以此相应故。所谓“alaṅkaronti”,即以此而庄严自身之躯体,故称庄严:在首饰方面,指项链、臂钏等;在著作方面,则指以此庄严著作之身体,故称庄严。依此主要义,诸如“pasāda”等音声庄严及自性直陈等义理庄严,皆得称说。而从次要义来说,作为此二种庄严之依处的著作身体本身,亦如《吉祥经》《宝经》等名称一般,被称为能显了庄严的“庄严显了”;依“正觉者以此了知二种庄严”之义,获得善解庄严之胜名的论典,亦得称说。此义即已说竟。显示巴利原文
Alaṅkārehi vajjitā, alaṅkārā vajjitā yehi vāti ca. Rūpassa anu anurūpaṃ, rūpaṃ anugataṃ anurūpaṃ vā, tena anurūpena. Alaṅkaronti attabhāvamaneneti alaṅkāro, hārakeyūrādi ābharaṇapakkhe, ganthapakkhe tu alaṅkaronti bandhasarīramaneneti alaṅkāro. Iminā mukhyabhāvena pasādādisaddālaṅkārā ca sabhāvavutyādiatthālaṅkārā ca pavuccanti. Amukhyato pana imesaṃ dvinnaṃ alaṅkārānamadhiṭṭhānabhūtabandhasarīrampi, tathā maṅgalasuttaratanasuttādivohāro viya alaṅkārapakāsakaṃ ‘‘sammā bujjhanti dvippakārā alaṅkārā anene’’ti iminā atthena laddhasubodhālaṅkāravaranāmadheyyasatthampi vuccati. Vuttamidameva –
此“庄严”一词,主要依托于音声庄严与义理庄严;
依其功能,它既适用于所依,也同样适用于论典。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mukhyolaṅkārasaddoyaṃ, saddatthālaṅkatissito; Sāmatthiyā tvadhiṭṭhāne, tathā satthepi tabbatī’’ti.
此处所谓“功能”,即:若依“能持、能显了”的称谓,则所持、所显了之义便不能成立;那么,还能依何成立呢?此即以“否则不成”为相。显示巴利原文
Ettha sāmatthiyaṃ nāma tadādhāratappaṭipādakattavohārato tadādheyyatappaṭipādanīyaṃ na bhavati ce, aññaṃ kiṃ bhavatīti aññathānupapattilakkhaṇamevāti.
那些未积聚智慧、未精通众多论典的人,
他们正是为痴迷所袭,丝毫不能了知。
显示巴利原文 Yesaṃ na sañcitā paññā-nekasatthantarocitā; Sammohabbhāhatāve’te, nāvabujjhanti kiñcipi.
Kiṃ tehi pādasussūsā, yesaṃ natthi gurūnī’ha ; Ye tappādarajokiṇṇā, te’va sādhūvivekino.
4-5 如此,在显示了先驳斥那些拒绝定义者及所述内容等之后,现在说:一切处唯依论典而简择功德与过失。因此说:显示巴利原文
4-5. Evaṃ lakkhaṇārambhapaṭikkhepakajanapaṭibāhanapubbakamabhidheyyādikaṃ dassetvā idāni satthatova sabbattha guṇadosavivecanaṃ. Atoyeva vuccati –
一切处唯依论典,简择功德与过失;
若离论典而造作,便是鲁莽之举,更有何加?
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbattha satthatoyeva, guṇadosavivecanaṃ; Yaṃ karoti vinā satthaṃ, sāhasaṃ kimatodhika’’nti.
因此,所谓对功德与过失的分辨审察,唯属通达此道者所能,而非不通论典之人或畜生所能。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Tasmā guṇadosavibhāgavicāraṇaṃ nāma tabbidūnaṃyeva, nāsatthaññūnaṃ purisapasūnaṃ. Tathā cāha –
'通达功德过失之教理者,如何为大众分别解说;
盲人于分辨形色差异之事,又有何能力?'
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Guṇadosamasatthaññū, jano vibhajate kathaṃ; Adhikāro kimandhassa, rūpabhedopaladdhiya’’nti .
为何如此?在此,那些见到功德与过失而生净信者,正是依无数教理之眼所证得的,并非与此相反的其他人所能;为了以随顺与违逆的方式显示这一道理,故说了“yesaṃ”等两首偈颂。其中,“yesaṃ”是不定指示,意为“于哪些”。所谓“于哪些人未曾积集、未成堆聚”,意思是虽然种种相续的状态各不相同,但依同一相续之理来看,于某一相续中未曾熏习、未曾修习。是什么未曾积集?是远离取舍分别相的智慧。“anekasatthantarocitā”(于多种教理中修习)又是对谁而说?即在包含三藏、因明、文法、修辞等多种教理中,通过听闻、受持等而修习(ucitā即paricitā),这些人(yesaṃ)的智慧却未曾积集,这便成了定论。“ete”(这些)即如所说为决定语。“sammohabbhāhatā”(被痴暗所击),即由于没有如前所说的极为锐利的智慧,而被强力的痴所击、所打,因此被称为被痴暗所击,这是它的意趣。既然如此,那么对于任何应取应舍的相状,若是由于不随顺等,唯以对师长足尘的恭敬等而证得的离欲智慧——由于未能获得此慧,他们便不能了知,不能了知之义。然而,由于执取懈怠等过失,纵然长时承事师长,头顶师足之尘等,虽历经长时……显示巴利原文
Yenevaṃ, tenettha guṇadosadassane pasannānekasatthacakkhuyevādhigato, nañño tabbiparītotyanvayabyatirekavasena dassento ‘‘yesa’’ntiādigāthādvayamāha. Tattha yesanti aniyamuddeso, yehīti attho. Yehi na sañcitā na rāsikatā, nānāsantānavuttinīpi ekattanayena ekasmiṃ santāne na vāsitā naparibhāvitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kā sā? Paññā heyyopādeyyavivekarūpā. Kīdisīti āha ‘‘anekasatthantarocitā’’ti. Anekasmiṃ tipiṭakatakkabyākaraṇālaṅkārasatthādike satthantare ucitā savanadhāraṇādivasena paricitā sāyaṃ paññā yesaṃ na sañcitāti pakataṃ. Eteti yathāuddiṭṭhānaṃ niyamavacanaṃ. Sammohabbhāhatāti yathāvuttāyātisayavatiyā paññāyābhāvato balappattena mohena abbhāhatā visesena pahatā, evasadditā hontīti adhippāyo. Yato evaṃ, tasmāpi kiñcipi heyyopādeyyarūpaṃ yaṃ kiñcideva aṭṭhānāniyojakatādisagurupādasussūsānissayapaṭiladdhavivekapaññāti- sayālābhena nāvabujjhanti, na jānantītyattho. Yato ālasiyādidosalesapariggahopi satatācariyasevanavasena sirovikiṇṇatādisagurupādapaṅkajambujaparāyano cirenapi kālena nānāvidhasatthantarakataparicayabalena pappoti tādisaṃ paññāveyattiyaṃ. Tenevāha bhagavā –
‘‘Nihīyati puriso nihīnasevī, Na ca hāyetha kadāci tulyasevī; Seṭṭhamupanamaṃ udeti khippaṃ, Tasmā’ttano uttaritaraṃ bhajethā’’ti .
因此,唯有具足如是慧者,于此善恶分别之考察中堪任,而非与彼相反的劣人——这是此处的意趣所在。“Ruḷho”是特定义。故说:“于诸无有可敬师长之人,师长足下之侍奉又有何用?”“于此(Iha)”,即于此世间,若有人对那应行师足恭敬、足下侍奉之师长视若无有,如前所述,这些无有慧刃之味的无知者,与彼何用?毫无少分,这便是“于此未证得故”之意趣。今从反面说“ye”等。哪些人先前已具足修福等成就,被彼师长的足尘所洒、所覆、所遍满?唯有这些善人,如前以慧刃所知,是离欲者,具足能决择应取应舍之善恶分别慧成就;唯有他们,于此善恶之考察中证得,这是意趣所在。且此师足之恭敬,应以殊胜而极尽修作,以此曲偈令善人修习彼随顺之行。显示巴利原文
Tato etādiso paññavāyevettha guṇadosavibhāgavivecane adhikārī, nañño tabbiparīto purisapasūti ayametthādhippāyo. Ruḷho atthaviseso. Tenāha ‘‘kiṃ tehi pādasussūsā, yesaṃ natthi gurūnihā’’ti. Ihāti imasmiṃ loke yesaṃ janānaṃ gurūnaṃ kātabbā pādasussūsā pādaparicariyā natthi, tehi janehi yathāvuttanayena paññāveyattiyarasānabhiññehi kiṃ payojanaṃ, lesamattampi natthi, anadhigatāyevettha eteti adhippāyo. Idāni byatirekamukhena āha ‘‘ye’’tiādi. Ye pubbe katapuññatādisampattisampannā tappādarajehi tesaṃ gurūnaṃ pādadhūlīhi okiṇṇā onaddhā gavacchitā, teva sādhū yathāvuttanayena paññāveyattiyena abhiññātā sajjanā eva vivekino heyyopādeyyaguṇadosavibhāganiyamanapaññāsampattisamaṅgino honti, teyevettha guṇadosavivecane adhigatāti adhippāyo. Sā cāyaṃ gurupādasussūsā visiṭṭhādarena karaṇīyāti vaṅkavuttiyā tadabhyāse sādhujane niyojeti.
4-5 第四、五偈:“哪些人遍修一切教理、智慧极锐利”——若他们将过失强加于人,便为他们遣除彼过;仅以片面了知而自许为智者,其语不可敬重。以此偈颂显示此义,并以此门显示自身非余人所共的敬师之道,应由善士以极恭敬心成就。为此而说“yesaṃ…pe…kiṃ no”二偈。在众多教理——即三藏、逻辑、文法等各种论书中,对其中的义理,依听闻、执持、受持等修习所得的慧,便是他们的闻所成慧。“哪些未曾积集、未成堆集”——这两种状态虽于一刹那亦不转起,然而由于已经积集成堆,由前时慧对后时慧获得无间修习等缘,因尚未达到厚重而转起,所以应积集而尚未成堆。那些没有如是慧之锐利者,被痴暗所击;因慧不锐利,被强力的痴所击,于任何应取应舍皆不知晓。“非一为多”、“他们与他们师”、“他们之中”、“于彼修习”、“被痴暗所击”——这是词语分解。故说:显示巴利原文
4-5. Ye sakalasatthaparicitaññāṇapāṭavā yadi dosamāropayanti, tesaṃ taddosanirākaraṇaṃ vinā padesāvabodhanamattena paṇḍitamānīnaṃ vacanassāgurukaraṇaṃ vaṅkavuttiyā dassento ca taṃdvāreneva attano anaññasādhāraṇagurugāravataṃ sādhujanehi paramādarena sampādetabbamiti dassetuṃ ‘‘yesaṃ…pe… kino’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Anekasatthānaṃ tipiṭakatakkabyākaraṇādīnaṃ anekesaṃ ganthānaṃ antare tatvatthasaṅkhātaabbhantare ucitā savanauggahaṇadhāraṇādivasena paricitā paññā sutamayā paññā yesaṃ yehi na sañcitā, dvinnamekakkhaṇe pavattiyābhāvepi upacitasamūhabhāvato, pubbakālikapaññāya aparakālikapaññāya anantaraāsevanādipaccayalābhato avatthabāhullapavattito vā sañcitabbāpi na rāsikatā. Ete īdisapaññāpāṭavarahitā ime sammohabbhāhatā paññāpāṭavābhāvato balappattena mohena visesena pahatā eva kiñcipi heyyopādeyyaṃ nāvabujjhanti. Na eke aneketi ca, te ca te satthā ceti ca, tesamantaramiti ca, tasmiṃ ucitāti ca sammohena abbhāhatāti ca viggaho. Tena vuttaṃ–
‘‘Guṇadosamasatthaññū, jano vibhajate kathaṃ; Adhikāro kimandhassa, rūpabhedopaladdhiya’’nti .
其义如下:不谙教理之人,如何能分辨功德与过失?譬如,于辨别色相差异、了知青黄等色相特征之事上,盲人何来辨识之能与相应资格?实不存在。是故,唯依止于多部教典中所获得之极清净慧眼,方能考察功德与过失;若缺此眼,则绝无可能。此即所谓——显示巴利原文
Tassattho – asatthaññū jano guṇadosaṃ kathaṃ vibhajate. Tathā hi rūpabhedopaladdhiyaṃ nīlapītādirūpavisesāvabodhane andhassa adhikāro abhimukhakaraṇaṃ kiṃ hoti, na bhavatyeva, tasmā anekasatthantaragatasuppasannapaññācakkhunā eva guṇadosavivecanaṃ bhavati, tadabhāve na bhavatyeva. Idameva vuccate–
于一切处,功过得失之辨别,唯仗明师;
若舍明师而自造作,如此鲁莽,孰有逾于此者?
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbattha satthatoyeva, guṇadosavivecanaṃ; Yaṃ karoti vinā satthaṃ, sāhasaṃ kimatodhika’’nti.
其含义是:于一切处,对功德与过失的辨别,唯有依靠明师方能成就。若无明师——即无如理作意等智慧——而妄加分别功德过失,较此更为鲁莽的举动,何曾有过?所谓不加审察而行,实无其事。显示巴利原文
Tassattho – sabbattha guṇadosavivecanaṃ satthatoyeva hoti, satthaṃ vinā satthocitatādisapaññaṃ vinā yaṃ karoti guṇāguṇavibhāgaṃ karoti, yaṃ karaṇaṃ atthi, atodhikaṃ sāhasaṃ kiṃ āsuṃ kiriyā anupaparikkhanakiriyā nattheva.
在此世间,那些未曾积集福德之人,对于师长——显示巴利原文
Iha imasmiṃ loke yesaṃ akatapuññānaṃ janānaṃ gurūnaṃ
——可爱、可敬、应受尊重者,
善于言谈且能堪忍言辞者;
能作甚深论议者,
亦不于非处驱使者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Piyo garu bhāvanīyo, Vattā ca vacanakkhamo; Gambhīrañca kathaṃ kattā, No cā’ṭṭhāne niyojako’’ti .
对于具足所述功德的阿阇梨,应行的足下恭敬与足下侍奉其实并不存在——他们又有何所需?那些积有福德的善人,足上沾染师长之足尘并因而得到庇护,正是这些善士,正是这些远离者,通过亲近善友、承事师长而证得殊胜的远离智慧,唯有他们才能了知远离,这便是其中的意趣。‘欲闻即恭敬’,依此义而有应行的足下侍奉,也因此而得名恭敬。所谓‘于足下恭敬’,即对其足;‘足尘’,即其尘;‘所沾染’,即被沾染,这是词句的分解。由于弟子的全部智慧皆系属于师长,因此应当依止功德超胜于己者。世尊曾如是说:显示巴利原文
Niddiṭṭhaguṇopetānaṃ ācariyānaṃ kātabbā pādasussūsā pādaparicariyā natthi, tehi kiṃ payojanaṃ. Ye katapuññā janā tappādarajokiṇṇā tesaṃ gurūnaṃ pādarajehi gavacchitā, teva sādhū janā eva vivekino kalyāṇamittagurupāsanāhi adhigatavisiṭṭhavivekabuddhino bhavanti, te eva vivekaṃ jānantīti bhāvo. Sotumicchā sussūsā, taṃ nissāya kattabbapādaparicariyāpi tadatthiyā sussūsā nāma hoti. Pādesu sussūsāti ca, tesaṃ pādāti ca, tesu rajānīti ca, tehi okiṇṇāti ca viggaho. Sissānaṃ sakalābhibuddhiyā gurupaṭibaddhattā attano guṇato adhikatarāyeva sevitabbā. Vuttañhi bhagavatā –
亲近卑劣者,人则退堕;
亲近同等者,则永不退堕;
亲近殊胜者,则迅速提升。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nihīyati puriso nihīnasevī, Na ca hāyetha kadāci tulyasevī; Seṭṭhamupanamaṃ udeti khippaṃ, Tasmā’ttano uttaritaraṃ bhajethā’’ti .
那些倾心于诗歌与戏剧的诗人学者;
凡所造作,皆不足令他人惊叹。
显示巴利原文 Kabbanāṭakanikkhitta-nettacittā kavijjanā; Yaṃkiñci racayante’taṃ, na vimhayakaraṃ paraṃ.
Teye’va paṭibhāvanto, so’va bandho savimhayo; Yena tosenti viññūye, tatthāpya’vihitādarā.
6-7 如此,在此通过顺逆推理显示所证得之义后,为鼓舞那些心生退怯的听众——他们以为:“我们不熟悉诗歌与戏剧,何必费心创作殊胜作品而徒劳辛苦?”——便说“诗歌与戏剧”等。所谓“诗歌”,即诗人的作品,也就是称为诗作的东西。它由散句等语句、自有韵律等部分组成,具有中间语句集合,分为前述各类体裁:诗体、散文体、诗散混合体、名为“占布”的体裁,以及称为大诗的大诗歌。那种大诗歌以名为“章”的段落分部结集创作,故称“章结”。关于其特征,有多种描述:“章结的开端应为祈愿祝福,或陈述与作品相关之事,或顶礼”等。那是怎样的呢?显示巴利原文
6-7. Evametthānvayabyatirekavasenādhigate dassetvā idāni ‘‘kiṃ amhākaṃ kabbanāṭakaparicayābhāveracanāvisesābhiyogopajanitaparissamenā’’ti olīnavuttino sotujane samussāheti ‘‘kabbanāṭakā’’tiādinā. Kavippayogasaṅkhāto bandhova kavino idanti kabbaṃ. Muttakādivākyasvamuttikādyavayavasabhāvā antaravākyasamudāyasampannaṃ vuttajātibhedabhinnaṃ pajjamayaṃ gajjamayaṃ pajjagajjamayaṃ campūnāmakañca, mahāvākyarūpaṃ mahākabbañca, taṃ pana mahākabbaṃ saggehi sagganāmakehi paricchedavisesehi bandhyate karīyatīti saggabandhoti pavuccati. Tassa tu lakkhaṇaṃ ‘‘saggabandhassa mukhaṃ iṭṭhāsīsanaṃ siyā paṇāmo vā bandhasambandhino kassaci atthassa niddeso vā’’tiādinā anekadhā vaṇṇenti. Taṃ yathā?
所谓章结即大诗,其特征如下:显示巴利原文
‘‘Saggabandho mahākabba-muccate tvassa lakkhaṇaṃ;
或源于历史传说,或依真实事件而立;
涉及四类果报,以四位高尚者为主角。
描述古来所传的山峦、明月与日出之景,
园林水戏,饮酒欢庆。
离别与婚嫁,王子的诞生与成长;
计议、遣使、出征、休战,以及领袖的兴盛。
辞藻庄严而不简略,韵味相续无间;
章节不过于铺陈,言辞可爱,连音美妙。
显示巴利原文 Paṇāmo vatthuniddeso, āsīsāpi ca tammukhaṃ. Itihāsakathubbhūtaṃ, santasannissayampi vā; Catuvaggaphalāyattaṃ, caturodāttanāyakaṃ. Puraṇṇavutuselindu-savitūdayavaṇṇanaṃ; Uyyānasalilakkīḷā, madhupānaratussavaṃ. Vippalambhavivāhehi, kumārodayavaḍḍhihi; Mantadūtappayānāji-nāyakābhyūdayehipi. Alaṅkatamasaṃkhitta-rasabhāvanirantaraṃ; Nātivitthiṇṇasaggehi, piyavuttasusandhibhi. Sabbattha bhinnasaggante-hupetaṃ lokarañjakaṃ; Kabbaṃ kappantaraṭṭhāyi, jāyate sādhvalaṅkatī’’ti .
其中,“依于历史传说”,指依托于往昔所传的故事。“依于真实”,指依托于其他殊胜的、以功德为主的帝王行迹等。“系属于四类果报”,即系属于法、义、欲、解脱四类果报。法,是现世兴盛与涅槃之因;义,即明处、土地等如理清净,及守护已得之物;欲,即地狱、感官对象与业行;解脱,即一切轮回苦的止息。“有四种高贵的领袖”,指具足精进力、念力、慧力等结合,以及因殊胜布施等而高贵、卓越的领袖,其中有其对立面与反对面。“蜜”即酒。“分离”即离别。“商议”即与通达政术者共同作出的决定。“使者”即从事联络的人。“出征”即因战斗等而出发。“休战”即没有和约时的争斗。“不简略的味与情连续不断”,指不简略的众多味,如艳情、英勇等,以及情,如爱、精进等,以此连续不断地遍布。“以可爱的言辞与美妙的连音”,指用可爱、悦耳的言辞,如因陀罗金刚等,及因彼此关联结合而成的美妙连音,即各章之间相互摄持。显示巴利原文
Tattha itihāsakathubbhūtanti purāvuttakathāsannissayaṃ. Santasannissayanti itarasobhanādhikaraṇaguṇarājacaritādinissayaṃ vā. Catuvaggaphalāyattanti dhammādicatuvaggaphalāyattaṃ. Dhammo nāma abbhūdayanibbānahetuko. Attho nāma vijjābhumyādīnaṃ yathāññāyamajjanaṃ, ajjitānañca rakkhaṇaṃ. Kāmo nāma nirayo visayo payogo. Mokkho nāma sabbasaṃsāradukkhanivatti. Caturodāttanāyakanti ussāhasattimantasattipabhūsattiyogena caturo kusalo cāgātisayādiyogena udātto udāro nāyako vipakkho, paṭipakkho ca yattha, taṃ. Madhu nāma surā. Vippalambho viraho. Manto nītivedīhi saha kārīyanicchayo. Dūto sandhānappavatto puriso. Payānaṃ saṅgāmādinimittagamanaṃ. Āji sandhyābhāve viggaho. Asaṅkhattarasabhāvanirantaranti asaṃkhittā bahuttā rasā siṅgāravīrādayo, bhāvā ratiussāhādayo, tehi nirantaraṃ patthaṭaṃ. Piyavuttasusandhibhīti piyāni sutisubhagāni vuttāni indavajirādīni aññamaññasambandhasaṃsaggatāya sobhano sandhi aññamaññasaṅgahā yesaṃ saggānaṃ, tehīti.
再者,为了表明:在上述的城市描绘等诸支分中,即使有些地方依情况而没有饮酒等内容,也能令知者心生欢喜,而善士们确实会采纳,故说:显示巴利原文
Punapi yathāvuttesu aṅgesu nagaravaṇṇanādīsu kiñca yathāsambhavaṃ madhupānādirahitampi taññūnaṃ mano rañjeti upādiyateva sabbhīti dassetumāha–
诗作纵有支分之不足,亦不因恶分而毁损;
通达者若有意,亦能以结构之圆满令其满足。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kabbaṃ na dussataṅgehi, nyūnamapyatra kehici; Bandhaṅgasampadā taññū, kāmamārādhayanti ce’’ti .
先以功德称赞导师,由此对于诸怨敌;
此即断除之道,本性清净美妙。
赞叹了诸如族姓英雄的听闻等之后,即使对于敌人也(如此赞叹);
他们说:“以此胜利,对导师的极度称赞之语也令我们愉悦。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Guṇato paṭhamaṃ vatvā, nāyakaṃ tena sattuno; Nirākaraṇamiccesa, maggo pakatisundaro. Vaṃsavīrasutādīni, vaṇṇayitvā ripussapi; Tajjayā nāyakukkaṃsa-kathanañca sukheti no’’ti āhu.
这一切,对于那些常饮正法甘露、心乐其味,远离为纷繁绮语所扰的戏剧与诗歌,恒常行持如宝器般的善士们,怎会因心生忧恼而感到疲惫呢?因此所示现的,正与他们相应。显示巴利原文
Sabbampetaṃ saddhammāmatarasapānasarasahadayānaṃ samphappalāpavipulavisappavesopaddutakabbanāṭakaparammukhānaṃ satatacaritasañcaritaratanabhājanānaṃ sappurisānaṃ kiṃ hadayakhedopajanitaparissameneti tadanurūpamevopadassitanti.
所谓“剧”,即婆罗多等戏剧论典中以种种方式所阐述的形态与规则;以其部分特征为特征的,有情节剧等九种戏剧形式。小剧也包含其中。而“诗与剧,于其中放置眼与心者”的分解为:于他们中放置、安立眼与心者。他们是谁?是诗人。此处,“放置眼与心”一语,显示了通过听闻与思惟,以审察推究的方式,如其所把握而确定不颠倒之义,对已决断者的修习,以及无间断的精勤。而“诗与剧”一语,显示了闻、思、修。当闻被显示时,依止于闻的闻所成智也得以显示。“于诗与剧中放置眼与心者”,此语显示了依循闻、思、修的次第,成就智慧敏锐、具足诗歌创作能力的诗人。因为对于他们,那样的闻等正是创作之因。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Nāṭakaṃ nāma bharatādināṭyasatthe nānappakāranirūpitarūpaṃ kappaṃ, taṃlakkhaṇekadesabhūtalakkhaṇāni pakaraṇādīni nava rūpakāni. Nāṭikā ca etthevāvarumbhanti. Kabbañca nāṭakañca, tesu nikkhittaṃ ṭhapitaṃ nettañca cittañca yehīti viggaho. Ke te? Kavino. Tattha nikkhittanettacittavacanena sutassa cintanañca ūhāpohamukhena yathuggahitaniyāmaṃ, aviparītatthanicchayanaṃ, nicchitassa bhāvanā, nirantarābhiyogo ca dassito. Kabbanāṭakavacanena sutaṃ, cintitaṃ, bhāvitañca dassitaṃ. Sute dassite tannissayaṃ sutamayañāṇampi dassitameva siyāti. ‘‘Kabbanāṭakanikkhittanettacittā’’ti iminā sutacintābhāvanānukkamena sampāditapaññāpāṭavānaṃ kabbaracanāya sāmatthiyaṃ dasseti. Hoti hi tādisānaṃ taṃsutādi bandhanakāraṇaṃ. Vuttañhi –
‘‘Sābhāvikī ca paṭibhā, Sutañca bahu nimmalaṃ; Amando cābhiyogoyaṃ, Hetu hotiha bandhane’’ti .
“任何”是指自己心中浮现的任何创作作品。以此不定之辞,显示了自己对此的不敬重。他们进行创作、造作。他们所作的那些创作作品,对于他人并非绝对令人惊叹,因为对于具足此种方便成就的人来说,所期望的成就本非稀有——这是意旨所在。在此,那些诗与剧等,作为殊胜创作唯一方便的,即使不敬重,不依听闻等方式生起敬重,那些具足智慧、知善恶、通达论典的善士们,如何能以殊胜创作令他们喜悦满足呢?他们确实令其喜悦,即使缺乏自然的才思,对于如此的义理,也凭借闻、思、修而精勤努力。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Yaṃkiñcīti attano cittāruḷhaṃ yaṃkiñci bandhajātaṃ. Iminā pana aniyamavacanena attano tattha ādarābhāvaṃ dīpeti. Racayanti karonti. Etaṃ tehi racitaṃ bandhajātaṃ paraṃ accantameva vimhayakaraṃ na hoti, tādisopāyasampattisampannassa upeyyasampattisabbhāvato anacchariyamevāti adhippāyo. Tattha tesu kabbanāṭakesu racanāvisesaekantopāyabhūtesu avihitādarāapi sutādivasena akatādarāpi ye sappurisā paññavanto yena bandhavisesena viññū guṇadosaviduno satthaññuno paṇḍitajane tosenti pīṇenti. Tosentiyeva hi te tādise sābhāvikipaṭibhāvirahepi etādisesu atthesu sutacintābhāvanāvasena vāyamantā. Vuttañhi –
即使没有前世的习气,
与功德相连的奇妙辩才,亦不复存;
而由多闻与精勤所成就的言语,
则必定能成就,纵使是少许的利益。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na vijjatī yajjapi pubbavāsanā- Guṇānubandhi paṭibhānamabbhutaṃ; Sutena vācu’ssahanenupāsitā, Dhuvaṃ karotyeva kamapyanuggaha’’nti .
具有辩才者,即依抉择应取应舍为相的智慧而称为有智慧者,他们正是真善士。那束缚伴随着惊奇:‘这是怎样?即使没有那种方便,也会有这样的系缚吗?’如此与惊奇俱起。然而,那束缚正是那束缚,并非其他,因为缺少了那种方便的成就,应达到的成就便不存在。显示巴利原文
Paṭibhāvanto heyyopādeyyaparicchedalakkhaṇapaññāya paññavanto nāma, teyeva sappurisā. Savimhayo ‘‘kīdisāyaṃ, tādisopāyantararahitānampi etādiso bandho siyā’’ti vimhayena saha vattamānopi. Sova bandho tameva bandhanaṃ tādisopāyasampattivirahenopeyyasampattiyā sabbhāvato, nāññoti.
6-7 6-7. 如今,对于诗歌与戏剧未得通达的我们,因不能明了著作构造的自性而退怯,故以“诗歌与戏剧”等两首偈颂来策励。那些将心与眼专注于诗歌与戏剧的人,那些诗人、诗歌作者,通过闻、思、修的方式将心与眼安立于诗歌与戏剧,他们创作出任何自己心中所想之物。这种创作并非极令人惊奇、不可思议,因为通过不间断的用功,凭借已成就的方便及根本智慧,作为应达到之成果的著作构造是必然存在的——这是此处的意旨。所谓“诗歌”是诗人所说,所谓“戏剧”是舞者所说的舞蹈、歌唱等。但在此处,阐明其内容的讲述之作名为戏剧。所谓“诗歌与戏剧”,指将心与眼专注于诗歌与戏剧者——这是词解。那些人,即使此前未曾对诗歌与戏剧给予尊重,仅凭听闻、受持等而未生轻慢,他们这些智者也能以某种著作构造的特殊性令他人满足、令他人喜悦,他们正是具有辩才者,即具有名为辩才的智慧者。那束缚伴随着惊奇,即伴随着他人所生的惊奇。他们具有辩才,与惊奇俱起,即使未曾给予尊重——这是词解。即使没有外典的用功,即使没有前世的习气,只要在此处不间断用功者,便能成就那样的能力——这是所说。正如所说:显示巴利原文
6-7. Idāni kabbanāṭakesu aparicitānamamhākaṃ gantharacanāsabhāvāvabodhova kutoti osakkante ‘‘kabbanāṭakā’’digāthādvayena samussāheti. Kabbanāṭakanikkhittanettacittā kabbanāṭakesu sutānulokanacintābhāvanāvasena ṭhapitanettacittā kavijjanā kabbakārakā yaṃ kiñci attano abhimataṃ racayanti karonti, etaṃ bandhanaṃ paraṃ atisayena na vimhayakaraṃ acchariyakaraṃ na hoti, nirantarābhiyogato siddhopāyamūlapaññāsampadāya upeyyabhūtaganthasaṅkharaṇaṃ bhavatyevāti adhippāyo. Kavino idaṃ kabbanti ca, naṭakassa idaṃ nāṭakaṃ, naccagītādi. Idha pana tappaṭipādakakathāpakāsakagantho nāṭakaṃ nāma. Kabbañca nāṭakañcāti ca, kabbanāṭakesu nikkhittaṃ nettacittaṃ yehīti ca viggaho. Ye janā tattha tesu kabbanāṭakesu avihitādarāpi savanadhāraṇādivasena akatasambhamā eva viññū yena gantharacanāvisesena tosenti pīṇenti, teyeva paṭibhāvanto paṭibhānasaṅkhātapaññavanto bhavanti. Sova bandho savimhayo aññesaṃ uppajjamānavimhayena sahito. Paṭibhā etesaṃ atthīti ca, saha vimhayena vattatīti ca, avihito ādaro yehīti ca viggaho. Bāhirasatthābhiyogābhāvepi pubbavāsanābhāvepi iha nirantarābhiyogaṃ karonto tādisasāmatthiyaṃ sādhetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañhi –
即使没有前世的习气,
随逐功德的奇妙辩才;
由多闻与精勤所修习的言语,
必定能成办所求的摄益。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na vijjatī yajjapi pubbavāsanā- Guṇānubandhi paṭibhānamabbhutaṃ; Sutena vācu’ssahanenupāsitā, Dhuvaṃ karotyeva kamapyanuggaha’’nti .
其义为:即使那种从前世习气之德相续而来的奇妙辩才——即由过去生中熟练熏习之德,以给予随助的方式相续——并不存在,然而,通过听闻、通过精勤努力,或通过为使语业熟练等的言说精勤所奉行的、已行尊师奉事之语,也必定能成就某种程度的智慧善巧。显示巴利原文
Tassattho – yadi pubbavāsanāguṇānubandhī atītajātiyā paricayavāsanāguṇassa anubalappadānavasena anubandho yassatthi, tādisaṃ abbhutaṃ paṭibhānaṃ na vijjatipi, tathāpi sutena savanena ussahanena paguṇakaraṇādivācussahanena vā upāsitā katagurupāsanā vācā kamapi anuggahaṃ kiñcipi paññāpāṭavaṃ dhuvaṃ ekantena karoti evāti.
此处,所谓诗歌,乃以散句、结集等语句形式,及以部分为自性,由这些语句内各部分之集合而具足圆满;依所述之差别而分类,或纯粹为韵文所成,或为散文所成,或为名为“占布”的韵散混合所成,并以大句之自性而成立。所谓戏剧,乃依婆罗多等舞论所示之种种方式而显现的自性。而依此处所示之相,诗歌亦含摄一分相应的论典等九种形式及小剧。如此,可观诗歌之相应:显示巴利原文
Ettha kabbaṃ nāma muttakakulakādivākyavasena ca avayavasabhāvehi tesaṃyeva antaravākyāvayavasamūhehi paripuṇṇaṃ vuttavisesehi pabhedagataṃ kevalaṃ pajjamayaṃ vā gajjamayaṃ vā campūtikhyātapajjagajjamayaṃ vāti mahāvākyasabhāvena ca tiṭṭhati. Nāṭakaṃ nāma bharatādinaṭasatthagatanānappakāradassitasabhāvaṃ. Kabbañca idheva dassitalakkhaṇato ekadesayuttappakaraṇādinavarūpakāni ca nāṭikā ca bhavanti. Kabbalakkhaṇaṃ pana evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ–
以天界为所缘之大诗,其相如是说:
以礼敬、主题说明及祈愿为其开篇;
由历史传说所成,或亦为善士之依止;
系属四组果证,有四位尊贵导师。
庄严具足,味蕴紧凑而相续不断;
以不过于广大的章节,与可爱的言辞、美妙的连声。
处处以分章为庄严,令世间喜悦,
此诗篇能住持一劫之久,以善美庄严而生起。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saggabandho mahākabba-muccate tvassa lakkhaṇaṃ; Paṇāmo vatthuniddeso, āsīsāpi ca tammukhaṃ. Itihāsakathubbhūtaṃ, santasannissayampi vā; Catuvaggaphalāyattaṃ, caturodāttanāyakaṃ. Puraṇṇavutuselindu-savitūdayavaṇṇanaṃ; Uyyānasalilakkīḷā, madhupānaratussavaṃ. Vippalambhavivāhehi, kumārodayavaḍḍhihi; Mantadūtappayānāji-nāyakābhyūdayehipi. Alaṅkatamasaṃkhitta-rasabhāvanirantaraṃ; Nātivitthiṇṇasaggehi, piyavuttasusandhibhi. Sabbattha bhinnasaggante-hupetaṃ lokarañjakaṃ; Kabbaṃ kappantaraṭṭhāyi, jāyate sādhvalaṅkatī’’ti .
其义为:“章之结”——即以名为“章”的区分部分结集而成,称为“大诗”。而其特征今当说,此为关联。如同乌鸦啄眼之法,此诗之开端,乃是礼敬或祈请诸天,或是陈述事由——显示巴利原文
Tassattho – saggabandho saggasaṅkhātehi paricchedavisesehi bandho ‘‘mahākabba’’nti uccate. Assa lakkhaṇaṃ tu vuccateti sambandho kākakkhigoḷakanayena tammukhaṃ tassa kabbassa ādi pana paṇāmo devatānamassanaṃ vā, vatthuniddeso –
涉入东西两方的大海,
屹立不动吗?犹如傲慢者的惩治?
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Astyuttarasyāṃ digi devatātma, Himālayo nāma nagādhirāja?; Pūvāpareṅa vārinidhī vigāhya, Sthita? Pathijhā iva mānadaṇḍa?’’ .
见到任何具有此类系缚关系的事物,即使是“愿我心愉悦”的愿望,也成了邪见相应的希求。显示巴利原文
Iccādibandhasambandhino kassaci vatthuno dassanaṃ, āsīsāpi ‘‘mayhaṃ pīṇayataṃ mana’’ miccādiiṭṭhāsīsanaṃ vā bhavati.
所谓“法”,即是如是传说故事、古行事传之依止,或优美王行等之依止,是四双果所摄的世间与出世间乐之因,是明地等的积集,是所积集的保护;所谓“欲”,即是导向恶趣的五欲功德;所谓“解脱”,即是一切苦的退还之因。如是,四双果所依的四种高尚首领,由于精进力、有念力、有慧力等故,于四种(事)善巧,由施等殊胜结合故,是高尚、伟大、己方的;无论何处有敌方的首领,即如前所说的古城、大海、冬春等季节、山岳、日月升起等之描述处。此处savitā(日)是带tupaccayanto(后缀)。无论何处有游园水戏、饮蜜之祭典,即游园戏乐、饮酒之乐所成的祭典处;由离别与迎娶、王子之生与长、密使出发与己方首领之胜利等所装饰。了知义理之慧为“明”,作连结者为“使”,赴战为“出发”,战争所成之“赌”,己方首领之增胜所成之“胜利”——以这些装饰、严饰、不略……乃至……中间不略、广说之味,即艳情等八情态、喜乐与精进等,由这些不间断地广布,以爱行妙合、以闻妙语、以月雷等语,由初后关联与分齐而明净,其分齐处之天(段)被破,终了之天被破,由他们不过广之天、不过广之分齐所成,相应、随顺、具善庄严、具妙庄严之“诗”,为世间所喜,此诗若住于劫间或劫中间则生。此处,离饮蜜等之旧描述等,若亦能悦诸知音之心,此亦是恶。因为说:显示巴利原文
Itihāsakathubbhūtaṃ purāvuttakathāsannissayaṃ vā santasannissayampi sobhanānampi rājacariyādinissayaṃ vā catuvaggaphalāyattaṃ lokiyalokuttarasukhakāraṇaṃ dhammo, vijjābhūmiādīnaṃ sañcayo, sañcitānaṃ rakkhā ca attho, apāyasaṃvattanikapañcakāmaguṇasaṅkhāto kāmo, sabbadukkhā nivattihetu mokkho cāti catuvaggaphalādhīnaṃ caturodāttanāyakaṃ ussāhasattimantasattipabhūsattiyogato caturo dakkho cāgātisayādiyogena udātto uḷāro sapakkho, vipakkho vā nāyako yattha, taṃ yathāvuttaṃ puraṇṇavutuselindu-savitūdayavaṇṇanaṃ puraṃ nagaraṃ, aṇṇavaṃ sāgaraṃ, utu hemantavasantādiutu, selaṃ pabbato, indusavitūdayo candasūriyānaṃ udayo cāti imesaṃ vaṇṇanaṃ yattha, taṃ. Savitāti ettha tupaccayanto. Uyyānasalilakkīḷāmadhupānaratussavaṃ uyyānakīḷāsurāpānaratikīḷāsaṅkhāto ussavo yattha, taṃ vippalambhavivāhehi dārāviyogadārapariggahehi ca kumārodayavaḍḍhihi kumāruppattikumāravaḍḍhīhi ca mantadūtappayānājināyakābhyūdayehi nītijānanapaññā manto, sandhānakārako dūto, yuddhābhigamanaṃ payānaṃ, yuddhasaṅkhāto āji, sapakkhanāyakassa abhivaḍḍhisaṅkhāto abhyūdayo cāti imehi alaṅkataṃ sajjitaṃ asaṃkhitta…pe… ntaraṃ asaṃkhittā vitthārā rasā siṅgārādayo aṭṭha bhāvā ratiussāhādayo cāti imehi nirantaraṃ vitthiṇṇaṃ piyavuttasusandhibhi sutisubhagehi indavajirādīhi vuttehi pubbāparasambandhaparicchedatāya sobhanā sandhi yesaṃ saggānaṃ, tehi sabbattha sabbasmiṃ paricchede bhinnasaggantehi bhinnasaggā pariyosānā yesaṃ, tehi nātivitthiṇṇasaggehi nātivitthārasaggasaṅkhātehi paricchedehi upetaṃ yuttaṃ sādhvalaṅkati sobhanālaṅkāravantaṃ kabbaṃ lokarañjakaṃ taṃ samānaṃ kappantaraṭṭhāyi kappanirantaraṭṭhāyi kappantare ṭhāyi vā jāyate. Ettha madhupānādirahitapuravaṇṇanādayopi taññūnaṃ cittaṃ ārādheti ce, taṃpyaduṭṭhaṃ. Vuttañhi –
诗不因诸支分不足而有损,纵有少许欠缺亦然;
若知音者由结构支分等圆满,而得随心满愿。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kabbaṃ na dussataṅgehi, nyūnamapyatra kehici; Bandhaṅgasampadā taññū, kāmamārādhayanti ce’’ti.
其义为:于这些诗支之中,若因某些支分或部分而有少许不足,亦非过失。诗不损,而这无损的情形即是:由结构支分圆满、所造旧描述等支分圆满,令知诗之知音随其所欲而得满足,能如此承许方为妥当。再者,在描述首领时,描述了己方首领后,亦应描述遮止所对敌者。若不如此,则应在描述敌对者后,再描述己方首领克胜彼。因为说:显示巴利原文
Tassattho – atra imesu kabbaṅgesu majjhe kehici aṅgehi kehici avayavehi nyūnamapi ūnamapi, nisaddotratabbhāve. Kabbaṃ na dussati, taṃ pana adussanaṃ bandhaṅgasampadā racitapuravaṇṇanādiaṅgasampadā taññū kabbaññū jane kāmaṃ icchānurūpaṃ ce ārādhayanti, evaṃ sante bhavati. Punapi nāyakavaṇṇanāsu sapakkhanāyakaṃ vaṇṇetvā tena nirākaraṇabhāvampi. No ce, paccatthikaṃ vaṇṇetvā attano nāyakena tassābhibhavanampi vaṇṇetuṃ vaṭṭati. Vuttañhi –
先依功德述彼众生之导师,
此即是遣除,此道本自美妙;
述种姓、英雄之子等已,复当述怨敌。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Guṇato paṭhamaṃ vatvā, nāyakaṃ tena sattuno; Nirākaraṇamiccesa, maggo pakatisundaro. Vaṃsavīrasutādīni, vaṇṇayitvā ripussapi; Tajjayā nāyakukkaṃsa-kathanañca sukheti no’’ti.
所谓“结合”,是指词语与意义无过失地连结。显示巴利原文
Bandho ca nāma saddatthā, sahitā dosavajjitā;
Pajjagajjavimissānaṃ, bhedenā’yaṃ tidhā bhave.
8 如此,通过这些方式激励闻者之后,现在为说明“应作之结合”,便开始阐述结合的特征,如“结合”等。远离过失,即远离依附于词语和依附于意义的相违过失;或者说,远离那些有过失之处,令词语与意义结合,成为一体。凡具足所述特征者,先师们便称之为“结合”。而结合的体性——能令心欢喜之因、所成就的“结合性”——如此随顺“远离过失、词语与意义结合”这一共许之义而说后,便确立了“结合”这一不广为人知的结合体。此结合体依本性表达、曲说表达、庄严表达而有三种,例如“那位戴耳环者,即天授”。其中,“ca”字则是连接应说的其余事项,意为“并且”。显示巴利原文
8. Evametehi sotujanasamussāhanaṃ dassetvā idāni kattumicchitabandhoti vuttaṃ bandhassa lakkhaṇaṃ kattumārabhate ‘‘bandho cā’’tiādi. Dosavajjitā dosehi saddanissitehi, atthanissitehi ca virodhehi vajjitā pariccattā, te vā vajjitā yehi, saddatthā sahitā ekībhūtā. Vuttalakkhaṇā yehi te pubbācariyehi sahitā vuccanti. Sahitānaṃ bhāvo sahadayahilādakāraṇaṃ sādhyaṃ sāhiccaṃ. Iti dosavajjite sahite saddatthe pasiddhabhāvena anuvaditvā bandho nāma sabhāvavuttivaṅkavuttialaṅkāravuttivasena tividhopīti appasiddhaṃ bandhasarīraṃ vidhīyate yathā ‘‘yo kuṇḍalī, so devadatto’’ti. Casaddovattabbantarassa samuccayo, kiñcīti attho.
于中,词的意义以种类、功德、作用、实体为相,主要有四种。由于主要意义有四种,在三类词中,能诠表这些意义的词便有四种:种类词、功德词、作用词、实体词。词依作用差别可分为三类:能诠、所表、暗示。所谓作用,即指词使意义显现的功用。此作用有三种:主要作用、所表作用、暗示自性。其中,以种类等为直接对象的词的作用,是主要作用,这也称为“说示”。由这种作用而直接以种类等说示其义的词,如“牛”等,即是能诠。以他词的意义为对象而加以指示的词的作用,便是所表。所表有二种:纯净所表与混合譬喻所表。其中,纯净所表者,如“牛应被释放”、“床在喧哗”、“恒河中有声音”。此处以“牛”词说示种类的共相,而非指牛之个体。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Tattha jātiguṇakriyādabbalakkhaṇo saddānamattho mukhyo catubbidho hoti. Mukhyassatthassa catubbidhattā tividhesu saddesu tabbācako catubbidho hoti jātisaddo guṇasaddo kriyāsaddo dabbasaddoti. Tividho hi saddo vācako lakkhaṇiko byañjakoti byāpārabhedena. Byāpāro ca nāma saddassa’tthappatītikārittameva. So hi tividho mukhyo lakkhaṇo byañjanasabhāvo ceti. Tattha jātyādinirantaratthavisayo saddabyāpāro mukhyo. Soyeva abhidhāti uccate. Taṃbyāpāravā abyavahitajātyādisakehi tamatthaṃ mukhyabhāvena yo vadati goādiko, so vācako. Saddantaratthavisayaniddiṭṭho saddabyāpāro lakkhaṇo. Sā duvidhā suddhā, upacāramissā ceti. Tattha suddhā yathā ‘‘go muccatu, mañcā ugghosenti, gaṅgāyaṃ ghoso’’ti. Ettha gosaddena visesanaṃ gottasāmaññamevoccate, na tu gobyatti. Vuttañhi –
“能诠于所差别中力用已尽,故不达于所别。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Visesyaṃnābhidhā gacche, khīṇasatti visesane’’ti .
由于共相是周遍而无实体的,所以其中不可能有束缚和解脱。因此,作为其依止的牛个体便被牵引;同样地,床不可能喧哗,所以为了成就喧哗的作用,拥有床的人便被牵引;同样地,恒河这个词所诠的水流不可能发出声音,因此恒河一词便指示其自所诠水流附近的河岸。由于譬喻有多种类别,混合譬喻的所表义也有多种。例如,某些地方以因譬喻果,如‘寿命即酥’;某些地方因果无别,如‘此即寿命’;某些地方以所喻来譬喻能喻,如‘牛是巴希卡’;某些地方二者无别,如‘此即是牛’;某些地方以依处而作彼称呼,如‘灯盏即灯’;某些地方以与其业相关而作彼称呼,如‘此人非木匠,亦是木匠’;某些地方以所属关系而称,如‘与王相关者即王’;某些地方以部分称呼整体,如‘于一部分称布’等等。显示巴利原文
Sāmaññassa byāpakattā, asarīrattā ca. Tattha bandhanamocanāni na sambhavantīti attano nissayabhūtā gobyatti ākaḍḍhīyate, tathā mañcānamugghosanaṃ na sambhavatīti attano ugghosanakriyāsiddhyatthaṃ mañcasamaṅgino purisā ākaḍḍhīyanti. Tathā gaṅgāsaddavāccassa jalappavāhassa ghosappatyākaratā na sambhavatīti gaṅgāsaddo attanobhidheyyassodakappavāhassa nikaṭaṃ taṭaṃ lakkheti. Upacārassānekappakārattā upacāramissā lakkhaṇāpyanekadhā siyā. Yathā katthaci kāraṇe kārīyamupacariyate, yathā ‘‘āyu ghata’’nti. Katthaci kāraṇakāriyānamabhedo yathā ‘‘āyuyeveda’’nti. Katthaci upamāne upameyyamupacarīyate, yathā ‘‘go bāhiko’’ti. Katthaci abhedo tesaṃ, yathā ‘‘goyevāya’’nti. Katthaci tadādhāratāya taṃbyapadeso, yathā ‘‘padīpaṭṭhā kapallikā padīpo’’ti. Katthaci taṃkammasambandhā taṃbyapadeso, yathā ‘‘avaḍḍhakīpi vaḍḍhakī aya’’nti. Katthaci saṃsāmisambandhā, yathā ‘‘rājasambandhī puriso rājāya’’nti. Katthaci avayave samudāyabyapadeso, yathā ‘‘paṭekadese paṭasaddo’’ iccādi.
以所表义为所依的词,是所表词。而暗示自性,即词的他义功用,是词的第三种作用。以它为所依的词,是暗示词。如此,依这三种词,义也有三种:所诠义、所表义、暗示义。其中,正是暗示义被称为诗作结合的本质。因此,以主要暗示为结合者最上,以次要暗示者为中,全无暗示者为下。若毫无暗示,结合便无生命——此是先师们之说。然而,本性表达的结合也并非无生命,不应有所疑虑。因为诗人们对世间惯用法的善巧,正导向本性表达。凡是不了知一切世间安立的人,便不是诗人。显示巴利原文
Lakkhaṇāya nissayo saddo lakkhaṇiko. Byañjanasabhāvo pana parapariyāyo saddassa tatiyo byāpāro. Tassa nissayo saddo byañjanako. Iccetaṃ tiṇṇaṃ saddānaṃ vasena atthopi tividho hoti vācco lakkhaṇiyo byaṅgyoti. Tattha byaṅgyoyevattho bandhasatthā vuccate. Teneva padhānabyaṅgyo bandho uttamo, apadhānabyaṅgyo majjhimo, abyaṅgyo adhamo, byaṅgyena vinā bandho nijjīvo siyāti pubbācariyānaṃ pavatti, sabhāvavutti bandhopi tu nijjīvoti nāsaṅkanīyo. Yasmā kavīnaṃ lokavohārakosallaṃ sabhāvavuttiyeva gameti. Yo hi sakalalokaṭṭhitiṃ na jānāti, so kaviyeva na hotīti.
在此,为了使那些人能了知这三种义,将举例说明:‘于牟尼王面莲’等。此处,vāṇī一词以正法为所诠义。vāṇī是指思,在这思中,只要还未将天神之义附加其上,则‘这思会达成令自己内心喜悦的愿望’便不能成立——借助语句之力,正是通过‘此即是彼’的同一性,将天神一词的意义附加于vāṇī之上,这便是所表义。同样地,vadana一词以‘面’为所诠义,ambhoja一词则以附加义为所表义。而内心的喜悦,若不如此便不能成立,依止息等次第如实生起觉了,毫不费力地以种种词义的辩才,成就了名为‘著作圆满’的所欲义,这便是暗示义。能诠这些义的词,即是能诠词、所表词、暗示词。如此,于一切处都应这样观察词与义。显示巴利原文
Athettha tividhampi atthaṃ tādisajanāvabodhatthaṃ samudāharissāma ‘‘munindavadanambhoje’’tyādi. Ettha vāṇīsaddassa saddhammasaṅkhāto attho vāccattho. Vāṇī nāma cetanā, tassaṃ yāva devatatthaṃ nāropyate, tāva tappatī attano manosampīṇanaāsīsanā na saṃgacchatīti vākyasāmatthiyāyeva vāṇiyaṃ sāyamocityabhedena devatāsaddassa āropitottho lakkhaṇiyo. Tathā vadanasaddassāpi mukhaṃ vāccattho. Ambhojasaddassa samāropitottho lakkhaṇiyo. Manosampīṇanassa tu aññathā anupapattiyā passaddhyādikkamena yathābhūtāvabodhasambhavā anāyāsena vicittānekasaddatthapaṭibhānena ganthaparisamattisaṅkhātā yathicchitatthanipphatti hoteva, ayaṃ byaṅgyattho. Tabbācakā saddā vācakalakkhaṇikabyañjakā hontīti evaṃ sabbattha saddatthavicāro gantabbo.
如是,针对上述结缚之体,有人问:“有几种?”于是说“诗偈”等。以上所说的“结缚”,即结缚之体,有三种,以三种方式存在,既不多也不少。如何呢?依诗偈、散文、混合的差别,也就是依诗偈自性等的差别而有三种,此乃众所周知。其中,所谓“诗偈”,即在我们自己所造的《语日》论中所阐述的、依偈颂类别而分别的、由四句构成的偈颂。而独立偈等,也都是诗偈的类别,故此处不予展示。在这些中,一首偈颂意义完整、独立、不依于其他偈颂的,称为独立偈;通过某一个共同行为而相互依存、各偈意义看似完整、但单独看时意义不整的偈颂,称为群偈;将不同主题、不同行为、各自独立的偈颂如同刀鞘一般排列的,称为鞘偈;为了描述同一主题的过失等而整体运作、行为各异的偈颂,称为合偈。这四种诗偈的类别,应知就是前述的章节结缚。所谓“散文”,是指不依诗律限制、以名词动词等结尾的连续文句。它有两种类别:传记与故事。所显示巴利原文
Tamevaṃ yathāvuttabandhasarīraṃ katividhamiccāha ‘‘pajje’’ccādi. Ayaṃ yathāvutto bandho bandhasarīraṃ tidhā bhave tippakārena siyā, nādhikaṃ nāpyūnaṃ. Kathaṃ? Pajjagajjavimissānaṃ bhedena pajjasabhāvādīnaṃ visesena tidhā bhaveti pakataṃ. Tattha pajjaṃ nāma amhehiyeva viracitavuttodayākhye chandasi nirūpitā vuttajātippabhedā catuppadikatthā nirūpito muttakādipi vuttajātippakāroyeva. Tenevettha tesamadassanaṃ. Tesu ekagāthā niṭṭhitatthā sappadhānā gāthantarānirapekkhā muttakaṃ, ekakriyādānena aññamaññasāpekkhā niṭṭhitatthā paccekaṃ aniṭṭhitatthā gāthā kulakaṃ, nānābhittiyo bhinnakiriyo sappadhānā gāthā koso viya ṭhapitā koso, ekabhittipadosādikaṃ vaṇṇetuṃ samudāyena pavattā bhinnakriyā gāthā saṅghāto, sopi catubbidho pajjappakāro yathāvuttasaggabandhovāti viññātabbaṃ. Gajjaṃ nāma pādasanniṭṭhānarahito syādyantatyādyantappabandho. Tassa tu dve pakārā ākhyāyikā, kathāti. Vimissaṃ pajjagajjamayaṃ nāṭakappakaraṇādi, campū jātakamālādikā ca.
8 现在,为了让希望了解者明白,说明依庄严而建立的结缚之体,也就是所谓“结缚”本身。如同说“戴耳环者,即是天授”,以众所周知的“戴耳环”这一属性,来确立不为人知的“天授”这一身份,同样地,开示“结缚”等。其中,所谓“结缚”,即是连结。“远离过失”,即舍弃了基于声与义的过失,或者说,那些过失已被这些所远离。“相合”,即由相互适宜之义而达到共存。“声与义”,即声音和意义。由如是性质的声音和意义,令智者欢喜、相互协调、具足功德的状态,依词义而称为相合。所谓“声与义”,此处声音和意义的差别是什么呢?声音,在表达意义时,其作用分为三种:主要作用、间接作用、暗示作用,如此依作用而有差别。依次为:表示声、间接声、暗示声。同样地,意义也有三种:表示义、间接义、暗示义。在此,表示声,因其要表示的主要意义有类、德、业、实四种差别,故自身也依类声、德声、业声、实声而有四种。表示声的主要作用,称为表示。此主要作用,只运用于不被类等所间隔的意义上。例如,“牛、蓝色、厨师、有角者”等,牛等词的主要作用,只运用于牛体、蓝色布匹、厨师、有角者等。显示巴利原文
8. Idāni sañjānanābhilāsīnaṃ alaṅkāranissitaṃ bandhasarīraṃ, sova bandhoti adhikataṃ, ‘‘yo kuṇḍalī, so devadatto’’ti pasiddhakuṇḍalittānuvādena appasiddhassa devadattattavidhānaṃ viya dassento ‘‘bandho’’ccādimāha. Tattha bandho nāma ca bandhanaṃ pana. Dosavajjitā saddatthanissitadosehi pariccattā, te vā vajjitā etehi tādisā. Sahitā aññamaññānurūpatthena sahabhāvaṃ gatā. Saddatthā saddo, attho ca. Evaṃpakārehi tu īdisasaddatthānaṃ viññūnaṃ tuṭṭhijanakaaññamaññānurūpaguṇasahitānaṃ bhāvoti vacanatthena ‘‘sāhicca’’miti vadanti. Saddatthāti ettha saddatthānaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti? Saddo pana atthappatītiyaṃ attano mukhyabyāpāraṃ lakkhaṇabyāpāraṃ byañjanasabhāvabyāpārañceti tividhaṃ byāpārabhedena. Kamato vācako lakkhaṇiko byañjanako ceti tividho. Tathā atthopi vācco lakkhaṇiyo byaṅgyo cebhi tividho. Atra tu vācako saddo attanā dīpetabbamukhyatthassa jātiguṇakriyādabbabhedena catubbidhattā sayampi jātiguṇakriyādabbasaddavasena catubbidho. Vācakasaddassa mukhyabyāpāro ‘‘abhidhā’’ti ca voharīyati. So mukhyabyāpāro jātyādīhi abyavahitattheva vattate. Tathā hi ‘‘go nīlaṃ pācako visāṇi’’ccādo goādisaddānaṃ mukhyabyāpāro gopiṇḍanīlapaṭapācakakattusiṅgīti dabbānaṃ visesanabhūtajātiguṇakriyādabbesveva pavattati, na pana jātyādīnaṃ nissayabhūtagopiṇḍādīsūti. Vuttaṃ hi–
主要作用在修饰语上力已尽时,不达于所别。显示巴利原文
‘‘Visesyaṃ nābhidhā gacche, khīṇasatti visesane’’ti .
其含义为:在作为属性的类等之上,表示功能的力量与作用皆已耗尽;其本身的主要作用并不达至、不触及所别之实体。显示巴利原文
Tassattho – visesane visesanabhūtajātyādimhi khīṇasatti khīṇabyāpāravatī abhidhā mukhyabyāpārova visesyaṃ dabbaṃ na gacche na pāpuṇātīti.
若表示功能并不说明作为类等所依的牛体等,那么在“牛行走”“身穿蓝色”“厨师来”“有角者跑”等句中,牛等词又如何能成为具有类等属性的牛体等的表示者呢?因为当言及依附于实体的类、德等时,那些词便通过迂回的方式,成为具有他们属性的实体的表示者。而若论直接表示,那纯然是间接作用的领域。间接作用又有两种:纯粹的和混合转用的。其中,纯粹的间接作用,以排除了类等之后的意义为其领域。例如,在“牛行走”“身穿蓝色”“厨师来”“有角者跑”“诸床喧哗”“恒河上有声音”等句中,类、德、业、角、实体、床、恒河等与行走等不可能直接结合,因此便超越类等,依次将行走、穿衣、来、跑、喧哗、声音等的所依——牛体等——作为所把握的对象。显示巴利原文
Jātyādīnaṃ nissayagopiṇḍādikaṃ abhidhā na vadati ce, evañca sati ‘‘go gacchati, nīlaṃ nivāseti, pācako āgacchati, siṅgī dhāvati’’ccādīsu jātyādivisiṭṭhagopiṇḍādīnaṃ goādisaddassa kathaṃ vācakattaṃ yujjatīti? Dabbādhīnajātiguṇādīsu vuttesu tabbisiṭṭhassa dabbassa pariyāyato vācakattā. Nippariyāyato pana suddhalakkhaṇabyāpārasseva visayo. Lakkhaṇabyāpāropi suddho upacāramissoti duvidho. Tattha suddho lakkhaṇabyāpāro jātyādivajjitatthavisayo. Tathā hi ‘‘go gacchati, nīlaṃ nivāseti, pācako āgacchati, siṅgī dhāvati, mañcā ugghosenti, gaṅgāyaṃ ghoso’’tyādīsu jātiguṇakriyāsiṅgadabbamañcagaṅgādīnaṃ gamanādīhi yogāsambhavato jātiguṇādayo atikkamma yathākkamaṃ gamananivāsanaāgamanadhāvanaugghosanaghosādīnaṃ nissayabhūtagopiṇḍādayo parāmasati.
而混合的间接作用,则依转用的种种差别而有多种。例如,有时将结果转用于原因,如说“寿命即酥油”,此处便在作为增长寿命之因的酥油上,赋予了作为果的“寿命”之名。更上的转用,应随其所应而配合。所谓转用,即于非彼性质的事物上,赋予彼性质。有时,因与果无别,如“寿命就是酥油”。有时,以所比转用于能比,如“牛是巴希卡”。有时,以能比转用于所比,如“这巴希卡就是牛”。有时,因其为彼之所依而作彼之转用,如“灯盏即是灯”。有时,因行为关联而作彼之称谓,如“这个并非木匠的人也称为木匠”。有时,因同处关联而作彼之称谓,如“这国王的宠臣也就是国王”。有时,于部分上作整体之称谓,如“布烧了”。依此门径,应见转用之差别。暗示作用,即所谓的“dhana”,其第三作用的领域,当知正是那样的语句本身。显示巴利原文
Misso tu upacārabhedena bahuvidho. Tathā hi katthaci kāraṇe kāriyamupacarīyate, yathā ‘‘āyughata’’nti, ettha āyuvaḍḍhanakāraṇabhūte ghate kāriyabhūtaāyuno vohāro āropito hoti. Uparipi upacāro yathāyogaṃ yojetabbo. Ataṃsabhāve hi taṃsabhāvāropanaṃ upacāro. Katthaci kāraṇakāriyānamabhedo, yathā ‘‘āyuyeva ghata’’nti. Katthaci upameyyaupamānopacāro, yathā ‘‘go bāhiko’’ti. Katthaci upamānaupameyyānamabhedo, yathā ‘‘goyevāyaṃ bāhiko’’ti. Katthaci tadādhāratāya tadūpacāro, yathā ‘‘padīpaṭṭhā kapallikā padīpo’’ti. Katthaci kriyāsambandhena taṃbyapadeso, yathā ‘‘avaḍḍhakīpi vaḍḍhakī aya’’nti. Katthaci saṃsāmisambandhena taṃbyapadeso, yathā ‘‘rājavallabhopi rājā aya’’nti. Katthaci avayave samudāyabyapadeso, yathā ‘‘paṭo daḍḍho’’ti. Iminā mukhena upacārabhedo daṭṭhabbo. Byañjanasabhāvabyāpāro eva ‘‘dhana’’nti ca vuccati, tassa tatiyabyāpārassa visayo tādisavākyameva vāti daṭṭhabbo.
他们说:暗示义是文句的生命;以暗示义为主的文句是上品;不以暗示义为主的文句是中品;无暗示的文句是下品。于此有偈云:显示巴利原文
Ettha byaṅgyatthaṃ bandhassa jīvitamiti ca, byaṅgyatthapadhānaṃ bandhamuttamanti ca, byaṅgyatthapadhānarahitaṃ majjhimanti ca, abyaṅgyabandhaṃ adhamamiti ca vadanti. Honti cettha –
在表达意义时,声音的作用有三种:
此处即主要作用、间接作用和暗示作用。
第一类作用名为“别名义”,即依同义异名而转起;
第三类作用则是“财释别名义”,即依财富等而转起。
主要义用于无间之义,特征义则用于隐晦之义;
另一种意义则唯依语句本身的意义而转起。
依作用的差别,音声亦有三种能诠;
谓特征义、能诠义,其义亦被许为三种。
虽因种种譬喻而有差别,然而……
而暗示义因非别异,故不单独由他们说示。
显示巴利原文 Atthappatītiyaṃ sadda-byāpāro tividho bhave; Mukhyo lakkhaṇabyañjana-sabhāvo cāti ettha tu. Abhidhāparapariyāyo, byāpāro paṭhamo bhave; Dhanantāparapariyāyo, byāpāro tatiyo puna. Mukhyo nirantaratthesu, lakkhaṇā tu tirohite; Atthe’taro tu vākyassa, attheyeva pavattati. Byāpārassa pabhedena, tidhā saddopi vācako; Lakkhaṇiko byañjakoti, tadatthopi tidhā mato. Vācco lakkhaṇiyo byaṅgyo-ccevaṃ saddesu vācako; Jātiguṇakriyādabba-bhedena so catubbidho. Vāccatthassa catuddhāva, bhinnattā jātiādito; Jātyādīnaṃ pabhedena, tathā lakkhaṇiko mato. Upacārabahuttena, bhede satipi tassa tu; Byañjako tu anaññattā, visuṃ tehi na vuccatīti.
从特征的角度应如此了知:在“munindavadanambhoje”等偈颂中,vadana一词的直接义为“口”,其附加的“莲华”义是特征义;ambhoja一词的直接义为“莲花”,其转用的“口”义是特征义;vāṇi一词的直接义为“正法”所摄之义,其附加的“女神”义是特征义。于此,所谓“希求”,即依前述方式而有之福德殊胜性。由此而有:所期望之义的障碍——不善的遮止,以及善法的随顺助成;由此有身苦与心苦的消除;由此有乐受的获得;由此有心的等持;由此有种种义的觉悟;由此有所期望之典籍的圆满成就——这是从句子的功能所获得的义,属于暗示义。那些能开显各自义的声音,称为能诠、特征、能显。应如此了知声与声义的考察。显示巴利原文
Lakkhaṇato evaṃ veditabbaṃ – ‘‘munindavadanambhoje’’ tyādigāthāyaṃ vadanasaddassa mukhattho vāccattho, āropitaambhojattho lakkhaṇiyattho. Ambhojasaddassa padumattho vāccattho, upacaritamukhattho lakkhaṇiyattho. Vāṇisaddassa saddhammasaṅkhāto attho vāccattho, āropitadevatāattho lakkhaṇiyattho. Ettha āsīsanā nāma yathāvuttanayena puññātisayatā, tato idha abhimatatthabādhakākusalanivāraṇañca kusalānamanubalappadānañca tato kāyacittapīḷāvigamo ca tato sukhappaṭilābho ca tato cittasamādhānañca tatoyeva anekavidhatthāvabodho ca tato abhimataganthaparisamatti ca bhavatītyayaṃ vākyasāmatthiyato laddhattho byaṅgyatto. Taṃtaṃatthappakāsakā saddā vācakalakkhaṇikabyañjanakā nāma bhavanti. Evaṃ saddasaddatthavicāro veditabbo.
现在说已开显的结集分类,以“pajja”等为始。此具足前述特征的结集,依偈颂、长行及二者混合的差别,有三种。声与义二者,达于共住状态,远离过失,或远离那些过失,以及偈颂、长行与混合——这是词的分释。在此,所谓偈颂,依解脱偈、族类偈、库藏偈、合集偈而有四种分类,是在韵律中依所指示、所宣说的特殊规则而构成的四句偈颂结集。其中,解脱偈:意义完整、有主句的一首偈颂。族类偈:各首意义不完整、相互依存、以同一动作为门的众多偈颂。库藏偈:以种种注释为背景、以不同动作为门而展开、有主句的偈颂群。合集偈:依同一注释背景(如时间等)、以不同动作的集合而展开的偈颂。所谓长行,是句数不定、依故事叙述而有二种分类、以名词动词等为结尾的语词组合。混合则是此二者相混,如戏剧、作品等,以及本生鬘等夹颂散文。显示巴利原文
Idāni pakāsitabandhassa bhedaṃ vadati ‘‘pajjā’’dinā. Ayaṃ vuttalakkhaṇo bandho pajjagajjavimissānaṃ bhedena gāthācuṇṇiyatadubhayamissānaṃ vasena tidhā bhave. Saddo ca attho ceti ca, sahabhāvaṃ itā pattāti ca, dosehi vajjitā, dose vā vajjitā yehīti ca, pajjañca gajjañca vimissañceti ca viggaho. Iha pajjaṃ nāma muttakakulakakosakasaṅghātavasena catuppabhedaṃ chandasi niddiṭṭhavuttavisesaviracitaṃ catuppadikagāthābandhaṃ. Tattha muttakaṃ nāma niṭṭhitatthā sappadhānā ekā gāthā, kulakaṃ nāma paccekamaniṭṭhitatthā aññamaññasāpekkhā ekakriyādvārikā nānāgāthā, kosako nāma nānāvidhavaṇṇanābhūmikā bhinnakriyādvārappavattā sappadhānā gāthārāsi, saṅghāto nāma sañcyākālādiekavaṇṇanābhūminissitā bhinnakriyāsamudāyena pavattā gāthā. Gajjaṃ nāma aniyatapado ākhyāyikākathāvasena dvippabhedo syādyantatyādyanto vacanappabandho. Misso pana imehi dvīhi saṃmisso nāṭakapakaraṇādi ca jātakamālādicampū ca.
Nibandho cā’nibandho ca, puna dvidhā niruppate; Taṃ tu pāpentya’laṅkārā, vindanīyatarattanaṃ.
9 第九。如此说过三种结集之身后,现在为以另一种方式显示,而说“结集与非结集,又分为二种而安立”。再者,如前所说的以偈颂为体的结集,又分为二种,即以二种方式而安立确定。如何呢?结集,即以其一分——解脱偈等四种,依天结集等方式而为结集;非结集,即纯粹依解脱偈的方式。如此分为二种而安立,这已经说过。难道不是先说了此以偈颂为体的结集有梵语、俗语、阿波布朗舍语、毕舍遮语及混合语五种,而后又说:“梵语是天神的语言。俗语有四种:因与梵语仅字母差别而生起的摩欣陀、信度等,是彼同生语;其同类的希利诃罗迦、迦摩罗等;在大国等地通行的,是地方语;与彼同生语等混合的,是混合语。阿毗罗等人的语言是阿波布朗舍语,它如俗语一样有四种,又依城市、近城市、古老而有三种。毕舍遮的语言是毕舍遮语。依一切而混合的是混合语。”如此说了梵语等的特征。同样,说了“以艳情为主、称为舞蹈的嬉戏等,因是嬉戏等的开显者,故嬉戏等以表演为主,是应被观看的;其他的诗是应被听闻的”,如此说了二种。像这样,先前诸师依语言差别而说五种,依用途差别而说二种。显示巴利原文
9. Evaṃ tippakāraṃ bandhasarīraṃ vatvā idāni aññathāpi dassetumāha ‘‘nibandhocā’nibandho ca, puna dvidhā niruppate’’ iti. Puna bhiyyo yathāvutto pajjamayabandho dvidhā dvippakārena niruppate nicchīyate. Kathaṃ? Nibandho ca tadekadesabhūtehi muttakādīhi catūhi saggabandhādivasena bandho ca anibandho ca kevalaṃ muttakavasenāti evaṃ dvidhā niruppate iti pakataṃ. Nanu tassetassa yathāvuttavātimayassa sakkaṭaṃ pākataṃ apabbhaṃso pesācikaṃ missañceti pañcavidhattaṃ vatvā ‘‘sakkaṭaṃ nāma devatābhāsā. Pākataṃ catubbidhaṃ sakkaṭehi vaṇṇaññattamattena uppannattā mahindasindhavādi tabbhavaṃ, tassamaṃ hiriharakamalādi, mahāraṭṭhādidesapasiddhaṃ desīyaṃ, tabbhavādīhi sammissaṃ missaṃ. Ābhīrādīnaṃ vācā apabbhaṃso, so ca pākataṃ viya catubbidho, tividho ca nāgaraupanāgaravuddhabhedena. Pisācānaṃ vacanaṃ pesācikaṃ. Sabbesaṃ vasena missa’’nti sakkaṭādīnaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā ‘‘siṅgārappadhānanaccasaṅkhātalāsyādīnaṃ paṭipādakatthena lāsyādikamabhinayappadhānattā dassanīyaṃ, itaraṃ kabbaṃ savanīya’’nti duvidhaṃ vuttaṃ, evaṃ pubbācariyehi bhāsābhedena vuttaṃ pañcavidhattaṃ, viniyogabhedena vuttaṃ duvidhattañca idha kasmā na vuttanti? Saccaṃ, tathāpi tadevamidhānupayogitāya na vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
如此,先以作为庄严所依处的身份显示了结集之身后,现在为显示:如同以项链、臂钏等装饰的男子之身,结集之身以声庄严与义庄严而成为更应被领受的,故说“那些庄严则令彼……”等。tu字是表示简别的词。那些庄严——即令彼结集之身被庄严,彼结集之身由这些而被庄严;其中,明净等是声庄严,本性直说等是义庄严——令彼结集之身达到更应被领受的状态,即极其应被领受、应被品尝的境地。意思是:一切无过失的声与义,因相互随顺而结合,具足最上的词藻丰美,如同那样的男子之身,即使本身已应被领受,若以庄严装饰,则成为绝对应被领受的。显示巴利原文
Evamalaṅkārādhiṭṭhānabhāvena paṭhamaṃ bandhasarīraṃ dassetvā idāni hārakeyūrādinā purisasarīramiva bandhasarīraṃ saddālaṅkāraatthālaṅkārehi vindanīyataraṃ hotīti dassetumāha ‘‘taṃ tu’’ iccādi. Tusaddo visesavacanicchāyaṃ. Taṃ bandhasarīraṃ tu alaṅkārā alaṅkariyati taṃ bandhasarīrametehīti pasādādayo saddālaṅkārā, sabhāvavutyādayo atthālaṅkārā ca vindanīyatarattanaṃ atisayena vindanīyabhāvaṃ assādanīyabhāvaṃ pāpenti nayanti. Sabbathā niddosabhūtānaṃ saddatthānaṃ aññamaññānurūpato sahitabhāvena paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgataṃ tādisapurisasarīramiva vindanīyampi samānaṃ alaṅkārehi pasādhite sati accantameva vindanīyaṃ siyāti adhippāyo.
9 第九,为了说明此‘结缚’的区分,而说‘结缚者’等。再者,‘结缚’与‘无结缚’:由于与解脱等四者不可分离,依大诗等自性而连续造作,故为‘结缚’;‘无结缚’则唯依大诗等自性,因其是解脱,故不连续造作。如此,该‘结缚’被确定为二种。再者,该‘结缚’依梵语、俗语、阿波布朗舍、毕舍遮语、混合语等语言差别而有五种。以艳情为主等舞蹈称为‘拉西亚’等,以观赏为主,故那样的舞蹈是可观的;与此不同的诗是可听的,依所用差别亦有二种。凡此之类,于此因无用途,故不取用。其中,梵语名为天语。依此而有字母差别者为俗语。此俗语又依‘同生语’、‘同似语’、‘地方语’、‘混合语’而有四种。其中,唯由梵语字母变化而生者为‘同生语’,如‘摩兴陀’、‘信度’等。‘同似语’如‘希利’、‘诃罗’、‘迦摩罗’等。于地方所通行者为‘地方语’。与同生语等相杂者为‘混合语’。‘阿波布朗舍’名为牧牛者等之语,此亦依同生语等而有四种,依城市、近城市、古老差别而有三种。毕舍遮之语为‘毕舍遮语’。与梵语等相杂者为‘混合语’。今为说明具有如是显示巴利原文
9. Punapi tasseva bandhassa bhedaṃ kathetuṃ ‘‘nibandho cā’’dimāha. Puna nibandho ca muttakādīhi catūhi avinābhāvato mahākabbādisabhāvena nirantaraṃ katvā bandho ca anibandho ca kevalaṃ mahākabbādisabhāvena muttakattā anirantaraṃ katvā bandho cāti sova bandho dvidhā niruppate nicchīyate. Punapi so bandho sakkaṭapākataapabbhaṃ sapesācikamissabhāsābhedena pañcavidho. Siṅgārapadhānanaccasaṅkhātalāsyādīnaṃ dassanappadhānattā tādisaṃ naccaṃdassanīyaṃ, tadaññaṃ kabbaṃ savanīyamiti vaḷañjanabhedato duvidho ca hoti. So sabbopi payojanābhāvato iha na gahito. Tattha sakkaṭaṃ nāma devatābhāsā. Tato kehici akkharehi bhinnaṃ pākataṃ nāma. Taṃ pana tabbhavatassamadesiyamissavasena catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha sakkaṭato vaṇṇaññattamattena nibbattaṃ tabbhavaṃ nāma, taṃ mahindasindhavādi. Tassamaṃ hiriharakamalādi. Dese pasiddhaṃ desiyaṃ. Missaṃ nāma tabbhavādīhi sammissaṃ. Apabbhaṃso nāma gopālakādīnaṃ vācā, so ca tabbhavādīhi catubbidho, nāgaraupanāgaravuddhabhedena tividho ca hoti. Pisācānaṃ vacanaṃ pesācikaṃ. Tehi sakkaṭādīhi sammissaṃ missaṃ nāma hoti. Idāni īdisappabhedavantabandhassa alaṅkārena sobhanattaṃ vattuṃ ‘‘taṃ tu’’ccādimāha. Taṃ tu taṃ pana vuttappakāraṃ bandhasarīraṃ alaṅkārā pasādādisaddālaṅkārā, sabhāvavutyādiatthālaṅkārā ca vindanīyatarattanaṃ atisayapasādanīyattaṃ pāpenti. Nirantaraṃ bandho nibandhoti ca, na nibandho anibandhoti ca, atisayena vindanīyo vindanīyataro, tassa bhāvo vindanīyatarattananti ca viggaho.
无过失的面如莲花,无过失的言语
已庄严者尚能闪耀,未庄严者岂不更美?
显示巴利原文 Anavajjaṃ mukhambhoja-manavajjā ca bhāratī; Alaṅkatāva sobhante, kiṃ nu’te niralaṅkatā?
10 第十,以“无过失”等来成立彼义。“无过失”:因眼、耳等各部分相互匀称、优越,且无丘疹、痣、黑点等瑕疵而具足美妙,故无可指责的面庞莲花;同样,“无过失”指不被句、字等过失所染而具足美妙,故无可指责的言语,并依转喻而指彼所表达之义。这些正是已庄严者:面庞以痣、耳饰等庄严装饰,声与义以声庄严与义庄严而完备;未庄严者即未如此装饰、未完备者,难道会闪耀吗?意谓“我认为不会”。“nu”表审择。显示巴利原文
10. Tameva samattheti ‘‘anavajja’’ miccādinā. Anavajjaṃ aññamaññānurūpādhikatanettakaṇṇādiavayavena piḷakatilakakāḷakādyanāhatāya ca sundarabhāvato agarahitaṃ mukhambhojaṃ vadanāravindañca tathā anavajjā padādidosānabhibhūtāya sundarabhāvena agarahitā bhāratī ca vāṇī upacārato tappaṭipādanīyo attho cāti ete alaṅkatāva mukhaṃ tilakatāḍaṅkādinālaṅkārena, saddatthā saddālaṅkāraatthālaṅkārehi pasādhitā sajjitā eva, niralaṅkatā tathā apasādhitā asajjitā sobhante kiṃ nu, na sobhantevāti vitakkemīti attho. Nuiti vitakke.
10 第十,以“无过失”等来成立彼义。因具足色、形等支分圆满,且无丘疹、痣、黑点等过失,故面莲花无可指责;“无过失”又指言语不夹杂句过失、语过失、义过失而无可指责,并以此无别借代所表达之义。这些正是已庄严者:以耳环、痣等饰品及声庄严、义庄严而完备;未庄严者即未被他们装饰者,难道会闪耀吗?我认为不会闪耀。“无过失”即“彼无过失”,“面即是莲”——如是分解。“kiṃ”表遮止,“nu”表审择。显示巴利原文
10. Tameva ‘‘anavajja’’ miccādinā samattheti. Vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādiavayavasampattiyā ca piḷakatilakakāḷakādidosarahitattā ca aninditaṃ mukhambhojañca anavajjā padadosavākyadosaatthadosehi amissattā agarahitā bhāratī vāṇī ca abhedopacārena tappaṭipādanīyattho cāti ime alaṅkatāva kuṇḍalatilakādiābharaṇehi ca saddālaṅkāraatthālaṅkārehi ca sajjitā eva, niralaṅkatā tehi avibhūsitā sobhante kiṃ nu, na sobhanteti maññe. Natthi avajjamassāti ca, mukhameva ambhojamiti ca viggaho. Kimiti paṭisedhe, nuiti vitakketi.
若无师长教导,愚者欲庄严彼;
他怎能不被智者视作可笑?
显示巴利原文 Vinā gurūpadesaṃ taṃ, bālo’laṅkattumicchati; Sampāpuṇe na viññūhi, hassabhāvaṃ kathaṃ nu so?
11 第十一:为说明若离开师教而作他们的庄严,则除了招致嘲笑之外,别无其他殊胜可得,故说“无……”等双关庄严。“师”:即教导装饰方法者,或教导庄严作法者;“教”:即“这样做便会美观”的教导。离此教导,因对面部及结缚的庄严无知,任何愚昧无知之人若欲依适宜方式圆满庄严面容或结缚,如此无知之人,怎能不被智者——那些了知此事、具足智慧的人——视作可笑、加以嘲笑呢?意思是:“这无知者到底在做什么?”他们必定会嘲笑。“nu”表思择。显示巴利原文
11. Alaṅkaraṇañca tesaṃ vinā gurūpadesena karonto vinā pahāsaṃ nāparaṃ visesamadhigacchatīti dassetuṃ silesālaṅkāramāha ‘‘vinā’’tiādi. Gurūnaṃ pasādhanopāyopadesakānaṃ, alaṅkārakāraṇopāyopadesakānaṃ vā upadesaṃ ‘‘ettha evaṃ kate sobheyyā’’ti upadisanaṃ vinā pariccajja mukhassa, bandhassa ca alaṅkaraṇānabhiññatāya bālo aññāṇako yo koci puggalo taṃ mukhaṃ, bandhaṃ vā alaṅkattuṃ anurūpavasena sajjetuṃ icchati adhippeti, so tādiso aññāṇapuggalo viññūhi tabbidūhi paṇḍitajanehi hassabhāvaṃ avahāsaṃ kathaṃ kena pakārena na sampāpuṇeyya. ‘‘Kimidaṃ aññāṇapurisena kariyatī’’ti hasantevāti adhippāyo. Nuiti vitakke.
11 第十一:现在为了显示,即使没有任何文句等过失的结缚身,当其以庄严进行装饰时,也唯与师教一同才最为殊胜,故说“无师教”等双关庄严。愚人:凡是于面等身庄严或于结缚庄严无能之人,若离开师教——即关于身庄严作法或结缚庄严作法的恰宜教导——而欲以痣、耳饰等来庄严其身,或以声庄严、义庄严来庄严结缚,则他怎能不被了知此二者的智者视作可笑、应受嘲笑呢?必定如此。因此,应当恭敬地从师学习而后再作,这是意趣所在。显示巴利原文
11. Idāni padādidosarahitabandhasarīrassa alaṅkārehi bhūsanamapi gurūpadesasahitameva seṭṭhanti dassetuṃ ‘‘vinā gurūpadesa’’ miccādisilesālaṅkāramāha. Bālo mukhādisarīrālaṅkāre, bandhālaṅkāre vā asamattho yo koci gurūpadesaṃ vinā sarīrālaṅkārakaraṇassa, bandhālaṅkārakaraṇassa vā anurūpopadesamantarena taṃ sarīraṃ, bandhaṃ vā alaṅkattuṃ tilakatāḍaṅkādīhi, saddālaṅkāraatthālaṅkārehi vā sajjetuṃ icchati ce, so viññūhi tadubhayaññūhi hassabhāvaṃ avahasitabbataṃ kathaṃ na sampāpuṇe, pāpuṇātyeva, tasmā gurūhi sādarato uggaṇhitvā kattabbanti bhāvo.
Ganthopi kavivācāna-malaṅkārappakāsako; Yāti tabbacanīyattaṃ, tabbohārūpacārato.
12 第十二,若问:声所行、义所行之庄严,书籍如何?因此说‘书籍亦’等。书籍:即对诗人言语——诗人所用的集合形式——以及为表达而成为彼所应说者之义,这些之庄严的阐明者,也就是如前所述之庄严的阐明者。书籍,即名为‘作用仪则’的论书,亦依彼庄严之声而成为彼所应说者,即获得被说性。如何如此?故说‘依彼惯用语之转用’。‘转用’:即于彼已成为惯用的庄严之声,或于彼装饰差别中生起的庄严惯用语,将其执取为‘此即是彼’而无差别,这便是转用。为什么呢?因为所表达者与能表达者无差别,故于因中果被转用,这是意趣所在。显示巴利原文
12. Nanu saddagammā, atthagammā ca alaṅkārāti gantho kathanti āha ‘‘ganthopī’’tiādi. Kavivācānaṃ kavippayogānaṃ samudāyarūpānaṃ, paṭipādanīyatāya tabbacanīyānañca atthānaṃ alaṅkārappakāsako alaṅkārānaṃ yathāvuttānaṃ vibhāvito ganthopi kiriyākappasaṅkhātaṃ satthampi tabbacanīyattaṃ tena alaṅkārasaddena vāccataṃ yāti upagacchati. Kinti āha ‘‘tabbohārūpacārato’’ti. Tassa katavohārassa alaṅkārasaddassa, tasmiṃ vā maṇḍanavisese pavattassa alaṅkāravohārassa upacaraṇaṃ soyamityabhedena parikappanaṃ upacāro. Kasmā? Paṭipādanīyapaṭipādakānaṃ abhedavasena kāraṇe kārīyassa upacariyatoti adhippāyo.
12 现在,为了说明声音庄严与意义庄严的著作如何被称为“庄严”,而说“著作”等。诗人的语言——即由诗人所说语句所构成者,以及通过转喻而指其所应表达的意义的诗语运用——阐明这些庄严的著作,也就是阐明声音庄严与意义庄严的著作,也通过转用其名称的方式,被称为行为仪轨的论典。对于那个已被赋予“庄严”之称者,“庄严”一词以原因处施设结果的转喻,而获得可被该词表述性,即可以被那个“庄严”一词所表述。“亦”字关联于庄严。它阐明庄严,或是诸庄严的阐明者,因此可被它言说,以及它的状态,如此作释。此处所说的“状态”,即所言与能言的关系。而所谓它的声音等庄严的运用,以及它的那个名称——“庄严”一词的转用,这些是语句。显示巴利原文
12. Idāni saddālaṅkāraatthālaṅkāragantho kathamalaṅkāroti āha ‘‘gantho’’ccādi. Kavivācānaṃ kavīhi vuttavākyasaṅkhātānaṃ, upacārato tappaṭipādanīyaatthasaṅkhātānañca kavippayogānaṃ alaṅkārappakāsako saddatthālaṅkārappakāsako ganthoapi kiriyākappasaṅkhātaṃ satthampi tabbohārūpacārato tassa alaṅkāroti katavohārassa alaṅkārasaddassa kāraṇe kārīyūpacārena tabbacanīyattaṃ tena alaṅkārasaddena vattabbataṃ yāti. Apisaddo alaṅkāramapekkhati. Alaṅkāre pakāseti, alaṅkārānaṃ vā pakāsakoti ca, tena vacanīyo, tassa bhāvoti ca viggaho. Ettha bhāvoti vāccavācakasambandho. Tassa saddādialaṅkārassa vohāroti ca, tabbohārassa alaṅkārasaddassa upacāroti ca vākyanti.
庄严有两种,于此,依声音与意义的差别而分;
声音与意义,其名为‘结缚’;由它们所庄严的,即是它们的序列。
显示巴利原文 Dvippakārā alaṅkārā, tattha saddatthabhedato; Saddatthā bandhanāmāva, taṃsajjitatadāvali.
13 13. 现在,为了将前述庄严的别类、其关联及前述结缚之体——虽前已述——一同结合而显示,故开示“有两种”等。其中,在那部名为《行为仪轨》的著作中,或在关于结缚庄严的章节里,如前所述的庄严有二种。何等为二?依声音的差别与意义的差别,即声音庄严与意义庄严,故庄严有二种,此为其义。由于这些差别而使庄严分为二种的,即是声音与意义。“结缚”一名,那个序列便以此结缚为名。“由他们所庄严的他们之序列”:谓由那些庄严所装饰者,即所庄严;那些声音与意义的序列,即是集合体,或为大句,或为中间句。圆满的结缚是大句,而孤调等支分是中间句。以“由他们所庄严的他们之序列”这一已获共许的义理为共许,来确立尚未共许的声音与意义。显示巴利原文
13. Idāni yathāvuttaalaṅkārānaṃ pabhedaṃ, tappasaṅkañca taṃbandhasarīrañca heṭṭhā vuttampi ekato sambandhetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘dvippakārā’’di āraddhaṃ. Tattha tasmiṃ kiriyākappasaṅkhāte ganthe, tasmiṃ vā bandhālaṅkārādhikāre alaṅkārā yathāvuttā dvippakārā honti. Kathaṃ? Saddabhedato, atthabhedato ca, saddālaṅkārā atthālaṅkārāti alaṅkārā dvippakārā hontīti attho. Yesaṃ bhedena te dvippakārā, te saddā, atthā ca. ‘‘Bandho’’ iti vuttaṃ nāmaṃ yassā āvaliyā sā bandhanāmā eva. Taṃsajjitatadāvali tehi alaṅkārehi sajjitā pakāsitā taṃsajjitā, tesaṃ saddatthānaṃ āvali samudāyā, mahāvākyaṃ, antaravākyaṃ vā. Paripuṇṇo bandho mahāvākyaṃ, muttakādayovayavā antaravākyāni, taṃsajjitatadāvalikaṃ pasiddhabhāvena anuvaditvā appasiddhā saddatthā vidhīyante.
13 13. 现在,为了将前述庄严未说的类别,及其所依属的前述结缚之体一并显示,而说“有两种”等。其中,在那部名为《行为仪轨》的庄严著作中,或在庄严的章节里,诸庄严——即将要被说的庄严——依声音与意义的差别,以声音庄严与意义庄严的类别,而有二种。由于它们的差别而使庄严区分,那些声音与意义,即以此结缚为名。“由他们所庄严的他们之序列”:由那些声音与意义庄严所装饰,那些声音与意义的、以大诗等集合为形式的顺序结缚,这是所说之义。“结缚”是此之名称;由那些声音与意义庄严所装饰;那些声音与意义的序列——如此构成复合词。显示巴利原文
13. Idāni yathāvuttaalaṅkārānaṃ avuttabhedañca tadādhārādhikataṃ yathāvuttabandhasarīrañca ekato dassetuṃ ‘‘dvippakāre’’ccādimāha. Tattha tasmiṃ kiriyākappasaṅkhāte alaṅkāraganthe, no ce, alaṅkārādhikāre vā alaṅkārā vakkhamānālaṅkārā saddatthabhedato saddālaṅkāraatthālaṅkārabhedena dvippakārā honti, yesaṃ bhedena alaṅkārā bhinnā, te saddatthā bandhanāmāva. Taṃsajjitatadāvali tehi saddatthālaṅkārehi alaṅkatā, tesaṃ saddatthānaṃ mahākabbādisamudāyarūpā paṭipāṭibandhoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Bandho’’ iti nāmaṃ yasseti ca, tehi saddatthālaṅkārehi sajjitāti ca, tesaṃ saddatthānaṃ āvalīti ca samāso.
纵使具足功德庄严,亦为些许过失所污;
不为智者所赞赏,她就如同那样的女子。
显示巴利原文 Guṇālaṅkārasaṃyuttā, api dosalavaṅkitā; Pasaṃsiyā na viññūhi, sā kaññā viya tādisī.
14 14. 如此,为了显示:即使具足功德庄严的音声与意义之序列,若沾染些许过失,也必不为智者所取,故说“功德”等。即使它兼具音声庄严之功德与意义庄严,蒙特别装饰,若被些许过失——哪怕极微细的过失所标记,便不被明了功德过失差别的智者们所赞赏,决不受赞赏。为显此义而作喻,说“如同那样的女子”。比如一位十岁的少女,将近青春,具有夺人心目的功德,并佩戴殊妙饰物庄严其身,但若被某个如麻风病般的微小过失所染,则对智者而言便不可接触,何况其他女子。同样地,音声与意义的序列,即使染上极少如麻风病般的音声形式或意义特征之过失,也必为智者所摒弃,更不必说被众多过失所染——这是所说之义。显示巴利原文
14. Evaṃ guṇena alaṅkārena sajjitāpi sā saddatthāvali appakenapi dosena saṃyuttā satī asamphusitabbāva viññūhi siyāti dassetumāha ‘‘guṇa’’ iccādi. Saddālaṅkārākhyena guṇena, atthālaṅkārena ca saṃyuttāpi visesena sajjitāpi saddatthāvali dosalavena dosalesenāpi aṅkitā abhilañchitā satī viññūhi guṇadosavibhāgavidūhi paṇḍitapurisehi na pasaṃsiyā neva pasaṃsitabbā. Kāviyāti āha ‘‘kaññā viyatādisī’’ti. Yathā hi kaññā dasavassikā sannaddhayobbanābhimukhabhāvena jananayanamanovilubbhinīguṇena, ābharaṇavisesena cālaṅkatā kenaci kuṭṭhadosalesena aṅkitā viññūnaṃ asamphusanīyā siyā, pagevāparā, evameva saddatthāvalipi appakenapi saddarūpena, atthalakkhaṇena ca dosena kuṭṭhakappena vajjanīyā eva viññūnaṃ, pageva bahunāti vuttaṃ hoti.
14 14. 如此,为了显示:若以功德为本的庄严所装饰的音声与意义之序列,因某一词句等过失而被标记,便成低劣,故说“功德庄严”等。该音声与意义之序列,即使与功德庄严结合——即与名为音声庄严的功德及意义庄严特别相应,若被些许过失,乃至极微量的词句等过失所标记、所伴随,这样的序列,即使具足功德庄严,却为些许过失所染,便如一位女子,一位十岁、已届青春的少女,对于审察功德过失的智者而言,是不被赞赏、不应被赞赏的。正如那十岁女子,虽有其可爱本性所安立的悦意功德,且佩戴合宜的项链等殊妙饰物,但只要伴有少许可见的白癜风,审察功德过失者即视之为不堪入目。同样地,若所说的结缚方式伴有如同麻风般的词句等过失,对智者而言亦不可喜——这是其意旨。以过失的微末部分而标记;她如此显现,故为“那样的”;如是解释。显示巴利原文
14. Evaṃ saddatthānaṃ guṇībhūtehi alaṅkārehi sajjitā saddatthāvali kenaci padādidosena abhilakkhitā ce, appasatthāti dassento ‘‘guṇālaṅkāri’’ccādimāha. Guṇālaṅkārasaṃyuttā api saddālaṅkārasaṅkhātaguṇena, atthālaṅkārena ca visesena yuttāpi sā saddatthāvali dosalavaṅkitā padadosādinā aṇumattenapi dosena aṅkitā yuttā sahitā tādisī guṇālaṅkārasaṃyuttāpi dosalavaṅkitā kaññā viya dasavassikā yobbanappattā vanitāva viññūhi guṇadosaparikkhakehi na pasaṃsiyā na pasaṃsitabbā. Yathā hi dasavassikā itthī piyasabhāvasaṇṭhitā manuññehi guṇehi, sobhanānurūpagīveyyādiābharaṇavisesehi yuttāpi dissamānena kenaci setakuṭṭhalavena yuttā samānā guṇadosaparikkhakehi dassanīyā na hoti, evaṃ vuttappakārāpi bandhapaddhati kuṭṭhatulyena kenaci padādidosena yuttā viññūhi assādanīyāti adhippāyo. Dosānaṃ lavo, tena aṅkitāti ca, sā viya dissatīti tādīsīti ca viggaho.
Tena dosanirāsova, mahussāhena sādhiyo; Niddosā sabbathā sā’yaṃ, saguṇā na bhaveyya kiṃ.
15 因此之故,应以大精进、以大努力,唯除遣诸过失——即词句过失等无义之因;这唯有依止论典、由论典之力而舍断,方应成就(“由智者”是余文)。若问:如此除遣过失时,能获得何等功德?答:这一声义序列若于一切时、以一切方式无有过失、脱离过失,则具足功德,即具足名为声庄严的功德,怎会不成就?必定成就。倘若离于功德,那所庄严者便成为不可取——这是它的意趣。显示巴利原文
15. Yato evaṃ, tena tasmā kāraṇā mahussāhena mahatā vāyāmena dosānaṃ padadosādīnamanatthanimittānaṃ nirāsova satthadiṭṭhiyā satthappabhāvato pariccāgoyeva sādhiyo sādhetabbo, ‘‘viññūhī’’ti seso. Evaṃ dosanirāse ko guṇo upalabbhatīti ce. Sabbathā sabbappakārena niddosā dosehi niggatā sāyaṃ saddatthāvali saguṇā saddālaṅkārasaṅkhātehi guṇehi sahitā na bhaveyya kiṃ, bhavatyeva, guṇarahitaṃ taṃalaṅkatamanupādeyyaṃ siyāti adhippāyo.
15 因此,既然带有过失的言辞不为智者所采纳,那么,便应以大精进、更胜勤策,由智者凭借通达众多论典的智慧,证成过失的断除——亦即遮遣语句等种种过患,方为最善。若能如此,此词义流在一切时、一切相上便无有过失、远离过失,又怎会不与名为‘文饰’的功德相俱呢?必与功德相俱,正是此意。‘过失的断除’意为此中无过失,或已出离过失;‘与功德俱’意为与功德共处——此为词义辨析。显示巴利原文
15. Tena yato dosayuttā viññūhi anupādeyyā, tasmā mahussāhena adhikavāyāmena dosanirāsova padadosādīnaṃ nirākaraṇameva sādhiyo anekasatthavisayāya paññāya viññūhi sādhetabbo, evaṃ sati sabbathā sabbākārena niddosā dosarahitā sā ayaṃ saddatthāvali saguṇā saddālaṅkārasaṅkhātehi guṇehi yuttā na bhaveyya kiṃ, guṇayuttā bhaveyyāti adhippāyo. Dosānaṃ nirāsoti ca, natthi dosā etissā, niggatā dosehi vāti ca, saha guṇehi vattamānāti ca viggaho.
纵无文饰,若具功德,亦令人心悦;
无过失、远离过失,具足功德,犹如新妇。
显示巴利原文 Sā’laṅkāraviyuttāpi, guṇayuttā manoharā; Niddosā dosarahitā, guṇayuttā vadhū viya.
16 为何如此?通过舍离过失、具足功德而成就悦意,故说“即使未以文饰庄严”等。此语词义流虽未以文饰庄严,却无过失、以一切方式远离过失,且具备名为“文饰”的功德;作为令众生生起喜乐的诸多原因,它能夺人心意、引至自身,故为“令人悦意”。在此,举例说“离过失、具功德如新妇”。即如:脱离一切过失、具足可爱行止等殊胜功德的新妇,即使未佩任何饰物、未经妆点,尚令人悦意,何况加上诗人优美的文饰,岂不更令人悦意?此语词义流亦如此令人悦意,这便是其义。显示巴利原文
16. Kiṃkāraṇamevaṃbhūto dosapariccāgena guṇādānena bandhoti āha ‘‘sā’laṅkāre’’ccādi. Sā saddatthāvali alaṅkārehi viyuttāpi satī niddosā sabbappakārena dosehi niggatā guṇehi saddālaṅkārasaṅkhātehi saṃyuttā janānamānandasandohābhisandanekahetutāya mano harati attano santikamākaḍḍhatīti manoharā hotīti. Tatthodāharaṇamāha ‘‘dosarahitā guṇayuttā vadhū viyā’’ti. Yathā yena kenacipi dosena virahitā vadhū manāpacāritādīhi guṇavisesehi saṃyuttā satī kenaci ābharaṇena amaṇḍitā apasādhitāpi kinnāma madhurā kavīnaṃ pasādhanaṃ kinnāma manoharā hoti, evamayaṃ saddatthāvalipi manoharā hotīti attho.
16 现在为了显示舍离过失、具足功德的利益,而说“即使未以文饰庄严”等。此语词义流虽无文饰,却无过失、以一切方式远离过失,且具功德,正因如此成为具功德者,与文饰相俱。所谓离过失,即已舍弃丑陋等过失;具功德,即具备悦意之功德。恰如新妇、少女般令人悦意,令善士欢喜。显示巴利原文
16. Idāni dosapariccāgena guṇādāne payojanaṃ dasseti ‘‘sā’laṅkāraviyutte’’ccādinā. Sā saddatthāvali alaṅkārehi viyuttā satīpi niddosā sabbappakārena dosarahitā guṇayuttā tatoyeva guṇībhūtā saddālaṅkārena yuttā dosarahitā dubbaṇṇadussaṇṭhānādidosehi pariccattā guṇayuttā hadayaṅgamaguṇayuttā vadhū viya aṅganā viya manoharā sādhujane ārādheti.
于词语、句子及其义理中,凡种种过失所被认知者;
连同例证,我今宣说其相。
显示巴利原文 Pade vākye tadatthe ca, dosā ye vividhā matā; Sodāharaṇametesaṃ, lakkhaṇaṃ kathayāmya’haṃ.
17 17. 既然如此,即使具足功德庄严,若沾染些许过失,亦不为智者所敬重;纵使不具庄严,若远离过失而具足功德,则令人心悦;纵使过失不直接导致非义,亦应避除——此是教法之正见。因此,为揭示这些过失,他承诺说“于词……”等。所谓词、句之义,即是他们之义,于此(说明)。“Udāharīyati”(被举例)即是“例证”;与例证俱者,即是“sodāharaṇa”(连同例证);以此而被了知者,即是“lakkhaṇa”(相)。显示巴利原文
17. Yato evaṃ guṇālaṅkārasaṃyuttāyapi dosalavaṅkitāya viññūnamanādaraṇīyatā, alaṅkāraviyuttāpi dosābhāvena guṇayuttāya manoharatā, evamanatthāvahassāpi dosassa pariharitabbatā satthadiṭṭhiyā, tasmā te dose dassetuṃ paṭijānāti ‘‘pade’’tiādinā. Tesaṃ padānaṃ vākyānaṃ attho tadattho, tasmiṃ. Udāharīyati lakkhyabhāvenāti udāharaṇaṃ, saha udāharaṇehīti sodāharaṇaṃ. Lakkhiyati lakkhiyamanenāti lakkhaṇaṃ.
17 17. 如此,即使具备庄严,若文章为些许过失所染,便不被取用;纵无庄严,若无过失,则被智者取用。因此,必须避除主要过失。现在为指出已知过失,他承诺说“于词、于句……”等。“词”即名等四种词;“句”即所谓“具首尾等之聚合为句,有作者与动作”之相的句子;以及他们词句之义。于他们中,被智者依过失相而认知的种种不同过失,我今连同例证,宣说这些词等过失之相。于此——显示巴利原文
17. Evaṃ alaṅkārayuttāpi appakena dosena yuttabandhassa anupādeyyattā, alaṅkāraalaṅkaraṇe asatipi dosarahite viññūhi upādeyyattā ca mukhyassa dosaparihārassa avassaṃ kattabbattā idāni adhigatadose dassetuṃ paṭijānāti ‘‘pade vākye’’ccādinā. Pade nāmādicatubbidhapade ca, vākye ‘‘syādyantatyādyantānaṃ cayo vākyaṃ sakārakakiriyā’’ti vuttalakkhaṇe vākye ca, tadatthe ca tesaṃ padavākyānaṃ atthe ca vividhā anekappakārā ye dosā viññūhi dosabhāvena matā ñeyyā, etesaṃ padādidosānaṃ sodāharaṇaṃ udāharaṇasahitaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ ahaṃ kathayāmi. Ettha ca–
词有四类,诸智者说:名、动、附加,
及不变词;他们当知:‘马’为是奔驰。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Padaṃ catubbidhaṃ vuttaṃ, nāmākhyātopasaggikaṃ; Nipātakañca taññūhi, asso khalvābhidhāvatī’’ti .
依如上所说之规则,首应观词。“Udāharīyati(被举例)”者,谓以其作为相之性质故,名为udāharaṇāni(诸例证);与诸例证俱者故,名为sodāharaṇa(带例证者);被此所标别者故,名为lakkhaṇa(相/标记)——此为词构之辨析。显示巴利原文
Vuttaniyāmena padaṃ tāva daṭṭhabbaṃ. Udāharīyanti lakkhiyabhāvenāti udāharaṇānīti ca, saha udāharaṇenāti sodāharaṇanti ca, lakkhīyati lakkhiyamanenāti ca viggaho.
语义相违者、内涵赘余者、烦恼杂染者,及相违者
应了知者、待简别者,义趣卑劣者,及无义者
显示巴利原文 Viruddhatthantarājhattha-kiliṭṭhāni virodhi ca; Neyyaṃ visesanāpekkhaṃ, hīnatthakamanatthakaṃ.
句过失章显示巴利原文
Vākyadosauddesa
词语之失、句子之失:语义单一者,坏失风格者
同样,混杂村俗、缺乏庄严、次序错乱者;
过度言说、意义乖离者,以及关联粗野者,也是如此;
显示巴利原文 Dosā padāna, vākyāna-mekatthaṃ bhaggarītikaṃ; Tathā byākiṇṇagāmmāni, yatihīnaṃ kamaccutaṃ; Ativuttamapetatthaṃ, sabandhapharusaṃ tathā
句义过失章显示巴利原文
Vākyatthadosauddesa
次序失当、不合时宜、缺乏庄严、毁坏风格、犹带疑惑者;
村俗与恶庄严,即是依于句义的过失。
显示巴利原文 Apakkamo’cityahīnaṃ, bhaggarīti sasaṃsayaṃ; Gāmmaṃ duṭṭhālaṅkatīti, dosā vākyatthanissitā.
词过失等章之解释显示巴利原文
Padadosādiuddesavaṇṇanā
18-19-20 18-19-20. 现在,依前所承诺,以“意义相违”等开始指出过失。“有相违他义者”,即该词中含有与所欲之义相违的其他意义。那是什么?是词。以下各处亦随宜而解。“有增上义者”,即对于所修饰者,其意义成为多余者。“应导入者”,即未说出的原因在此被引入,故为应导入者。“词过失”:那些令词语变坏的过失,意义相违等即是词过失——这是其含义。以下各处亦随宜而解。“句过失”是关联。“破坏风格者”,即风格、次序被破坏的句子。次序不当等是句义过失,因为它们是依于句义的过失。句子可能有过失,故以句子本身为所修饰。因此,处处以中性词表述。显示巴利原文
18-19-20. Idāni yathāpaṭiññāte dose uddisati ‘‘viruddhatthantara’’ iccādinā. Viruddhaṃ atthantaraṃ yassa taṃ viruddhatthantaraṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Padaṃ. Evamuparipi yathāyogaṃ. Adhiko attho visesyassa yena taṃ adhyatthaṃ. Nīyati avutto hetu ettha ānīyatīti neyyaṃ. Dosā padānanti yehi dosehi padāni duṭṭhāni, te viruddhatthantaratādayo padānaṃ dosāti attho. Evamuparipi yathāyogaṃ. Vākyānaṃ dosāti sambandho. Bhaggā rīti kamo yasmiṃ taṃ bhaggarītikaṃ, vākyaṃ. Apakkamatādayo vākyatthadosā, vākyatthānaṃ dosato. Vākyaṃ duṭṭhaṃ siyāti vākyameva visesyate. Tena sabbattha napuṃsakaliṅgena niddeso.
18-19-20 现在,为说明依应说方式所承诺的过失,而说:“意义相违……所依”等。若某词含有与诗人们所欲之义相违的其他意义,此词即名为“有相违他义者”。因使所修饰者具有多余之义,而名为“有增上义者”。因在显示诗人们所欲之义时晦暗不明,而名为“染污”。因与处所、时间、技艺等相违,而名为“有相违者”。因须引入其他意义才能说明,而名为“应导入者”。因唯有获得修饰语才具意义,而名为“期待修饰者”。因使所修饰者变得低劣,而名为“有劣义者”。因毫无意义,而名为“无义者”——这八种过失依于词而有,故称“词过失”。显示巴利原文
18-19-20. Idāni kathetabbabhāvena paṭiññāte dose uddisanto ‘‘viruddha…pe… nissitā’’ti āha. Kavīhi icchitatthato viruddho aññattho yassa padassāti taṃ viruddhatthantaraṃ nāma. Visesyassa adhikatthabhāvakaraṇato ajhatthaṃ nāma. Kavīhi icchitatthassāvīkaraṇe avisadattā kiliṭṭhaṃ nāma. Desakālakalādīnaṃ viruddhattā virodhi nāma. Aññamāharitvā vattabbato neyyaṃ nāma. Visesanaṃ patvāva sātthakabhāvappattito visesanāpekkhaṃ nāma. Visesyassa hīnatāpādanato hīnatthakaṃ nāma. Attharahitattā anatthakaṃ nāmāti ime aṭṭha padanissitattā padadosā nāma.
因重复说已说之义,故称“单一义者”;因次序错乱,故称“破坏格律者”;同样,因是导致迷惑之因,故称“杂乱者”;因缺乏殊胜言辞,故称“村俗者”;因缺乏停顿的成就,故称“停顿缺失者”;因偏离词义的次第,故称“次第偏离者”;因超越世间惯用语而说,故称“过度说者”;因偏离整体意义,故称“意义偏离者”;因与粗硬的组合相连,故称“组合粗硬者”,与之俱者即为“有组合粗硬者”——这九种是句子的过失。此处的“同样”一词是将“过失”关联起来。显示巴利原文
Vuttatthasseva puna vacanato ekatthaṃ nāma. Bhinnakkamattā bhaggarītikaṃ nāma. Tathā sammohakāraṇattā byākiṇṇaṃ nāma. Visiṭṭhavacanavirahato gāmmaṃ nāma. Yatisampattivirahato yatihīnaṃ nāma. Padatthakkamato cutattā kamaccutaṃ nāma. Lokiyaṃ vohāramatikkamma vuttattā ativuttaṃ nāma. Samudāyatthato apagatattā apetatthaṃ nāma. Bandhapharusayuttattā bandhapharusaṃ nāma, tena sahitaṃ sabandhapharusanti ime nava vākyānaṃ tathā dosā nāma. Ettha tathāsaddo ‘‘dosā’’ti padaṃ upasaṃharati.
因次序离失,故称“次序脱离者”;因缺乏适当性,故称“适当性缺失者”;因变格次序错乱,故称“破坏格律者”;因产生疑惑,故称“有疑惑者”;因令人不悦,故称“村俗者”;因装饰毁坏,故称“恶装饰者”——这六种依于句义而有,故称“句义过失”。显示巴利原文
Apagatakkamattā apakkamaṃ nāma. Ucitabhāvassa parihīnattā ocityahīnaṃ nāma. Bhinnavibhattikkamattā bhaggarīti nāma. Saṃsayajananato sasaṃsayaṃ nāma. Duppatītikarattā gāmmaṃ nāma. Dūsitālaṅkārattā duṭṭhālaṅkati nāmātime cha vākyatthanissitattā vākyatthadosā nāma.
“他义”即其他的意义。与之相违的他义存在于该词中,此即词之分析。即使是指明过失的词,由于与过失本身无别,亦称为“过失”。虽然如此,因在复合词中取的是词,故成为中性。此理于此后诸条亦然。使所修饰者具有增上之义者,即是彼。“染污”如同染污一般。正如被污垢所附的镜子,因自身染污,在于显示面容等时并不清晰;同样,不能有力显示所欲之义的词,称为“染污”。有相违存在于彼者,即“有相违者”。未说之因于此被引,故为“应引导者”。对修饰语有所期待者,即是彼。所修饰者的意义因彼而低劣者,即是彼。无意义存在于彼者,此即词之分析。显示巴利原文
Añño attho atthantaro. Viruddho atthantaro yassāti viggaho. Dosapakāsakapadampi dosato abyatirittattā doso nāma. Evaṃ santepi samāsena padassa gahitattā napuṃsakaṃ hoti. Esevanayo ito paresupi. Visesyassa adhiko attho yassa taṃ, kiliṭṭhaṃ viya kiliṭṭhaṃ. Yathā hi malaggahito ādāso attano kiliṭṭhattā mukhādīnaṃ pakāsane avisado hoti, evamadhippetatthappakāsane asamatthaṃ padaṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ nāma. Virodho assa atthīti virodhi. Nīyati avutto hetu etthāti neyyaṃ. Visesane apekkhā yassa taṃ. Hīno visesyassa attho yena taṃ. Natthi attho yassa tanti viggaho.
词过失虽无别异性,然因分类不同而说为“词的过失”,如称“石像之身体”。句子的过失,于此亦同此理。
单一意义存于彼者,即名为“彼”;破坏格律之次序存于彼者,即名为“彼”;各各分散而杂乱者,乃为“杂乱”;存于村落者,即是“村俗”,为不学之人所用语;纵是指称彼之词,亦随转名为“村俗”;停顿缺失于彼者,即名为“停顿缺失”;从次第偏离者,即名为“次第偏离”;过度而说者,即名为“过度说”;从意义偏离者,即名为“意义偏离”;组合中粗涩、粗涩性存于彼者,即名为“彼”;次序从彼离去者,即名为“彼”;适当性缺失于彼者,即名为“彼”;格律破坏于彼者,即名为“彼”;与疑惑俱行者,即名为“彼”。“村俗”如前所说;装饰被破坏、被损毁存于彼者,即名为“彼”。
依于句义解其义者,是为“依句义者”,此属语词之解析。在此,无义与意义偏离两种过失,于词与句上有所差异;其余如破坏格律两种、村俗两种、次第偏离与次序远离两种,于句与句义上亦有所差异。显示巴利原文
Padadosānaṃ anaññattepi vikappanābhedato ‘‘padānaṃ dosā’’ti vuttaṃ, yathā ‘‘silāputtakassa sarīra’’nti. Vākyānaṃ dosāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Eko attho yassa taṃ. Bhaggārīti kamo yassa taṃ. Visuṃ visuṃ ākiṇṇaṃ byākiṇṇaṃ. Gāme bhavo gāmmo, abyattānaṃ vohāro. Tappakāsakapadampi upacārato gāmmaṃ nāma. Yati hīnā etthāti yatihīnaṃ. Kamato cutaṃ kamaccutaṃ. Atikkamma vuttaṃ ativuttaṃ. Atthato apetaṃ apetatthaṃ. Bandhe pharusaṃ pharusatā yattha taṃ. Apagato kamo yasmā taṃ. Ocityaṃ hīnaṃ yattha taṃ. Bhaggā rīti yattha taṃ. Saha saṃsayena vattatīti taṃ. Gāmmaṃ vuttanayameva. Duṭṭhā dūsitā alaṅkati alaṅkāro yattha taṃ. Vākyānaṃ attho, tannissitā vākyatthanissitāti viggaho. Ettha anatthakāpetatthadosadvayaṃ padavākyato bhinnaṃ, aññaṃ bhaggarītidosadvayaṃ, gāmmadvayaṃ, kamaccutaapakkamadvayañca vākyavākyatthato bhinnaṃ.
词过失分别之解释显示巴利原文
Padadosaniddesavaṇṇanā
所谓“对立之他义”,即其意义与他义相违。显示巴利原文
Viruddhatthantaraṃ tañhi, yassa’ññattho virujjhati;
Adhippete yathā megho, visado sukhaye janaṃ.
21 二十一、今依开示次第,以“相违”等句例示词等过失。“hi”字于此表原因,或表确信。若某一词在所欲表达之义外另有他义,且该他义与所欲表达之义相违,如此被指斥后,即立名为“有相违他义者”。举“例如”以明。正如这是有相违他义者,余类似者亦应照见;非仅此一例,此即“例如”一词之义。“云:清净者令众人安乐”——“visa”为水,给予水者名“visada”,即云,运水者,令世人、众生安乐,此乃诗人所欲表达之义。然“visa”一词亦为毒药之能诠,故若“云”为“毒药给与者”,则成杀害,而非令安乐。因此,“visada”这一修饰词有相违性。显示巴利原文
21. Athoddesakkamena padādidose udāharati ‘‘viruddhi’’ ccādinā. Hi yasmā kāraṇā, pasiddhiyaṃ vā hisaddo. Yassa padassa añño adhippetato aparo attho adhippete vattumicchite atthe virujjhatīti anuvaditvā tasmā taṃ ‘‘viruddhatthantara’’nti vidhīyate. ‘‘Yathe’’tyudāharati. Yathā idaṃ viruddhatthantaraṃ, tathā aññampi tādisaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na tvidameveti yathāsaddassa attho. Megho visado sukhaye jananti. Visaṃ udakaṃ, taṃ dadātīti visado megho vārivaho janaṃ lokaṃ sukhaye sukhayatīti kavicchitattho. Visasaddo garaḷassa ca vācako siyāti garaḷado megho mārayati, na pana sukhayatīti ‘‘visado’’ti visesanapadassa viruddhatā.
21 二十一、今依所开示次第,为显“相违义他”等过失之自相与所相,而说“相违”等。若某一词,于诗人所欲表达的意义之外另有他义,且该他义与所欲表达的意义相违,则此词即名“相违义他”。“hi”字在此亦可表“确实”义。如是,先阐明不显著的“相违义他”——即“于所欲表达的意义之外另有他义,且此他义相违”;复于已阐明的意义范围内加以运用。由连接“taṃ hi”(因为那个),故先以显著方式引述“于所欲表达的意义之外另有他义,且此他义相违”这一定义,随后规定彼不显著的“相违义他”应藉由引述而确立为“相违义他”,犹如“彼戴耳环者,即是提婆达多”一般。当知:此即是通过引述显著者以规定不显著者。“犹如……人”是显示所相的例子。如同“云是清净者”等是“相违义他”的实例,意谓此类余者亦为此过失之例,非唯“云”等方为实例。且此处“犹如”一词,纵作为“iva”(如同)之同义词,亦应视为表示例证之意,以下皆同。云,即持水者,是……显示巴利原文
21. Idāni uddiṭṭhānukkamena viruddhatthantarādīnaṃ salakkhaṇalakkhiyaṃ dassento ‘‘viruddhi’’ccādimāha. Yassa padassa aññattho kavicchitatthato añño attho adhippete icchitatthe hi yasmā virujjhati, tasmā taṃ padaṃ viruddhatthantaraṃ nāma. Pasiddhiyaṃ vā hisaddo. Tathā hesa appasiddhaṃ viruddhatthantaraṃ ‘‘yassa aññattho adhippete virujjhatī’’ti pakāsetvā tasmiṃ pakāsitatthavisaye vattati. ‘‘Taṃ hī’’ti yojitattā ‘‘yassa aññattho adhippete virujjhatī’’ti lakkhaṇaṃ pasiddhabhāvena anuvaditvā taṃ viruddhatthantaranti anuvaditabbaappasiddhaviruddhatthantaraṃ vidhīyate, yathā ‘‘yo kuṇḍalī, so devadatto’’ti. Upari pasiddhānuvādena appasiddhavidhānameva daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Yathā…pe… jana’’nti udāharaṇaṃ lakkhiyaṃ dasseti. Yathā ‘‘megho visado’’ccādi viruddhatthantarassa udāharaṇaṃ, evamīdisamaññampi imassudāharaṇaṃ, na kevalaṃ ‘‘megho’’ccādimeva bhavatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathāsaddo cettha ivasaddapariyāyatthepi udāharaṇattho daṭṭhabbo, uparipyevaṃ. Megho ambudharo visado visasaṅkhātaṃ jalaṃ dadanto janaṃ sukhaye sukhayatīti kavīhi adhippetattho. Ettha visasaddassa garaḷasaṅkhātasappavisavācakattā, ‘‘visaṃ dadātīti visado’’ti ettha visassa udakavisānaṃ sādhāraṇattā visadāyako megho nāsetiyeva, na sukhayatīti kavinā adhippetassa sukhakāraṇassa meghavisesanavisasaddassa viruddhaaññatthatāti visapadaṃ viruddhatthantaradosena duṭṭhanti.
此中应知是‘内在多余’的过失,如同:
遍照一切方位者,
此萤火虫闪耀生辉。
显示巴利原文 Visesyamadhikaṃ yenā’- Dhyatthametaṃ bhave yathā; Obhāsitāsesadiso, Khajjoto’yaṃ virājate.
22 二十二、若某个词作为修饰语,使应受修饰的另一个词在意义上变得多余,在引述此点之后,便将这情况规定为“内在多余”的过失。以“犹如”举例,即“照亮了一切方向”等,以下皆应如此理解。“照亮了一切方向”即是照亮了一切方向,这只萤火虫在闪耀,也就是发光。在此,萤火虫能照亮一切方向的说法是言过其实的,因此构成“多余义”的过失。显示巴利原文
22.Yena padena visesyaṃ visesitabbaṃ aparaṃ padaṃ atthavasena adhikaṃ bhavatītyanuvaditvā etaṃ ajhatthaṃ bhaveti vidhīyate. ‘‘Yathe’’tyudāharati ‘‘obhāsite’’ccādi. Evamuparipi suviññeyyaṃ. Obhāsitā dīpitā asesā nikhilā disāyena soyaṃ khajjoto virājate dippati. Ettha khajjotassākhiladisābhāgāvabhāsanamativuttīti adhikatthaṃ.
22 二十二、当某个作修饰语的词使应受修饰的所修饰词在意义上变得多余时,这个具足如前所说特征的词,就是“内在多余”的过失,亦即名为“内在多余”的词之过失。正如它的例子那样。“照亮了一切方向”即普照一切方所,这只萤火虫、这只发光虫,在闪耀,即发光。在此,由于被修饰的对象“萤火虫”本身就有照亮一切方向的属性,所以“照亮了一切方向”这个修饰语就成了名为“内在多余”的词之过失。而“照亮了一切方向”的解析是:“它令一切方所都被照亮”。显示巴利原文
22.Yena visesanapadena visesyaṃ visesitabbaṃ padaṃ atthavasena adhikaṃ hoti, etaṃ yathāvuttalakkhaṇopetaṃ padaṃ ajhatthaṃ bhave ajhatthaṃ nāma padadoso bhave. Yathā tassudāharaṇamevaṃ. Obhāsitāsesadiso jotitasabbadiso ayaṃ khajjoto ayaṃ jotiriṅgaṇo virājate dippati. Ettha visesyassa khajjotassa sakaladisobhāsanassa ajhatthattā ‘‘obhāsitāsesadiso’’ti visesanapadaṃ ajhatthapadadoso nāma. Obhāsitā asesadisā yenāti viggaho.
按原形等区分故;
那个词即“粗俗”义,例如:由于她,
这位主人被可爱的她所拥抱。
显示巴利原文 Yassa’tthāvagamo dukkho, Pakatyādivibhāgato; Kiliṭṭhaṃ taṃ yathā tāya, So’yamāliṅgyate piyā.
23 二十三、“由原形等的分别”:pakati意为原形,因为它是先被造作的缘故;“等”字则包含了词缀等。从原形等加以分别,即加以区分、分析,也就是说,通过“这是原形,这是词缀,这是代换形”等方式来构想原形与词缀的分别。“pī”意为“喜悦”,即令喜悦;借助那位可爱、可意的“喜悦”,这位主人被拥抱、被亲近。在此,“piyā”(可爱的)一词是杂秽的。显示巴利原文
23.Pakatyādivibhāgatoti paccayā paṭhamaṃ karīyatīti pakati. Ādisaddena paccayādīnaṃ pariggaho. Pakatyādīnaṃvibhāgato vibhajanato, ‘‘ayaṃ pakati, ayaṃ paccayo, ayamādeso’’tiādinā pakatipaccayavibhāgakappanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pīṇetīti pī, tāya piyā vallabhāya soyaṃ sāmī āliṅgyate silissate. Ettha ‘‘piyā’’ti kiliṭṭhaṃ.
23 若对某词的意义理解、意义了知,是经由对原形等的分别——如“这是原形,这是词缀,这是代换形”等——以分别原形等的智,或通过探求“原形等是什么”而艰难获得的,那便名为杂秽。正如其例:“Tāya piyā vanitāya so ayaṃ vallabho āliṅgyate silissate”。“Paccayā paṭhamaṃ karīyatīti pakati”:先于词缀而被造作,故为原形;那些词缀以彼原形为始,对它们的分别即是此句。“Pīṇetīti pī”指女人。在此,以“piyā”指称名为“piyā”的亲爱者时,因“pī”这个音不清晰,故“piyā”一词为杂秽。显示巴利原文
23.Yassa padassa atthāvagamo atthāvabodho pakatyādivibhāgato ‘‘ayaṃ pakati, ayaṃ paccayo, ayamādeso’’tiādinā pakatyādīnaṃ vibhajanajānanena, ‘‘pakatyādi nāma ki’’nti gavesanato vā dukkho, taṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ nāma. Yathā tassudāharaṇamevaṃ. Tāya piyā vanitāya so ayaṃ vallabho āliṅgyate silissate. Paccayā paṭhamaṃ karīyatīti pakati. Sā ādi yesaṃ paccayānaṃ, tesaṃ vibhāgoti vākyaṃ. Pīṇetīti pī, nārī. Tāya piyā ettha piyāsaṅkhātāya vallabhāya kathane pīsaddassa avisadattā ‘‘piyā’’ti padaṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ.
Yaṃ kiliṭṭhapadaṃ mandā-bhidheyyaṃ yamakādikaṃ; Kiliṭṭhapadadoseva, tampi anto karīyati.
24 24. 现在,为了显示即使并非意趣所向的双关语等,也包含在杂秽词过失之中,故说‘yaṃ’等。其中,‘yaṃ’是不定词,其定词是‘yamakādikaṃ’(双关语等)。双关语等,即那些以双关为始的谜语之类。问其相状如何,故说‘kiliṭṭhapadaṃ’等。凡其词语杂秽——因住于不显了过失的自性而污浊、不清澈——者,为杂秽词。凡其意义微少、所诠之义寡少者,为义旨晦暗。如是,这些双关语等,亦正被纳入如前所述的杂秽词过失之中,被置于其内,被投入其中,意谓不超出杂秽词过失之外。显示巴利原文
24. Idāni yamakādikamanadhippetampi kiliṭṭheyeva antogadhaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘ya’’ntiādi. Tattha yanti aniyamavacanaṃ, tassa niyamavacanaṃ yamakādikanti. Yamakamādi yassa paheḷikājātassa taṃ yamakādikaṃ. Kīdisanti āha ‘‘kiliṭṭhapada’’ntiādi. Kiliṭṭhāni appatītadosasabhāve ṭhitatāya malitānyavisadāni padāni yassa taṃ kiliṭṭhapadaṃ. Mando appako abhidheyyo attho yassa taṃ mandābhidheyyaṃ, tādisaṃ tampi yamakādikaṃ kiliṭṭhapadadoseyeva yathāvutte anto abbhantare karīyati vidhīyati tattheva pakkhipīyati, kiliṭṭhapadadosato na byatiriccatīti adhippāyo.
24 24. 现在,以将非意趣所向的双关语等纳入杂秽过失之中的方式而开显,故说‘yaṃ kiliṭṭhe’等。杂秽词,即因不显了过失而混杂、不清澈的词;义旨晦暗,即所诠之义微少。凡属双关语等——即凡有双关、谜语之类者——这些亦正被纳入杂秽词过失之中,被包含于如前所述的杂秽词过失之内,意谓不超出杂秽词过失之外。其词杂秽者、其义旨晦暗者、其以双关为始的谜语之类者——此即杂秽词之过失的分解。显示巴利原文
24. Idāni anadhippetamapi yamakādiṃ kiliṭṭhadoseyeva antokaraṇabyājena āvīkaronto āha ‘‘yaṃ kiliṭṭhe’’ccādi. Kiliṭṭhapadaṃ appatītadosena missakattā avisadapadaṃ mandābhidheyyaṃ appakābhidheyyaṃ yaṃ yamakādikaṃ yaṃ yamakappaheḷikājātamatthi, tampi kiliṭṭhapadadoseyeva yathāvuttakiliṭṭhapadadoseyeva anto karīyati abbhantare karīyati, kiliṭṭhapadadosato abyatirittanti adhippāyo. Kiliṭṭhāni padāni yassa, mando abhidheyyo yassa, yamakaṃ ādi yassa paheḷikājātassa, kiliṭṭhapadānaṃ dosoti viggaho.
以显了之词所作,词与连声圆融;
具足明净功德,如是之双关语方为所许。
显示巴利原文 Patītasaddaracitaṃ, siliṭṭhapadasandhikaṃ; Pasādaguṇasaṃyuttaṃ, yamakaṃ mata’medisaṃ.
25 暂且不论那些并非所乐的双关语等,那什么是所乐的呢?故而说“显了”等。依自己所要说之义而显了,因此能诠之词也得名为“显了”——由显了、公认的词,即由名词词干所造作,称为“显了词所造”。其中,诸词——即语尾等——之间的连声,因互相融合而圆润滑畅,则是“圆融词连声”。正因由显了词所造,所以具足名为“明净”的功德——也就是词之庄严。如此具足如上所说功德、令人愉悦的双关语,方为所许、所乐。这是它的义。显示巴利原文
25. Hotu kāmamanabhimatamedisaṃ yamakādikaṃ, kiñcarahi abhimatanti āha ‘‘patīti’’ccādi. Attano vacanīyatthappatītavasena vācakāpi saddā patītāyeva nāmāti patītehi pasiddhehi saddehi pāṭipadikehi racitaṃ kataṃ patītasaddaracitaṃ. Siliṭṭhā aññamaññāliṅganena maṭṭhā padānaṃ syādyantādīnaṃ sandhayo sandhanā yassa taṃ siliṭṭhapadasandhikaṃ. Patītasaddaracitattāyeva pasādasaṅkhātena guṇena saddālaṅkārena saṃyuttaṃ sammadevopetaṃ edisaṃ yathāvuttaguṇāsayaṃ ramaṇīyaṃ yamakaṃ mataṃ abhimatanti attho.
25 现在,对于已了知的双关语句,为教导弟子“这样的双关语句最为可意”,故说“patīta”等。“由显了词所造”:即依“此词是此义的能诠”这一显了、公认的词而造,由名词词干所成。“圆融词连声”:指语尾等诸词的连声圆融。“具足明净功德”:正因由显了词所造,故具足名为“明净”的词庄严功德。如此成就、功德超胜、令人愉悦,且与下文将说双关语相似的这种双关语句,才为智者所认可。“显了”(patīta)即那些词,由它们所造;诸词的连声圆融;明净即功德、即词庄严,与之相应。这就是分解。显示巴利原文
25. Idāni adhigatesu yamakesu īdisaṃ yamakamiṭṭhamiti sissānaṃ upadisanto āha ‘‘patīte’’ccādi. Patītasaddaracitaṃ ‘‘imassatthassāyaṃ vācako’’ti patītehi pasiddhehi saddehi racitaṃ pāṭipadikehi kataṃ siliṭṭhapadasandhikaṃ siliṭṭhā syādyantādipadānaṃ sandhayo yassa taṃ pasādaguṇasaṃyuttaṃ patītasaddaracitattāyeva pasādasaṅkhātena saddālaṅkāraguṇena saṃyuttaṃ īdisaṃ evaṃbhūtaṃ guṇādhikato ramaṇīyaṃ upari vakkhamānayamakasadisaṃ yamakaṃ mataṃ viññūhi abhimataṃ. Patītā ca te saddā ca, tehi racitaṃ, siliṭṭhā padānaṃ sandhayo yassa, pasādoti guṇo saddālaṅkāro, tena saṃyuttanti viggaho.
无间、有间及另一种,皆由所说之多种音素所生;
彼双关语,以诸句之始、中、末为境。
显示巴利原文 Abyapetaṃ byapeta’ñña-māvuttānekavaṇṇajaṃ; Yamakaṃ tañca pādāna-mādimajjhantagocaraṃ.
26 26. 现在,为说明如前所述的所乐叠句,以“abyapeta”等语开始。“āvuttā”指重复、一再诵说,由多种音素合宜而有众多音素——即元音与辅音之相,非单一音素,因其不随诵。后文也将说“vaṇṇāvutti paro yathā”。由他们所生,故知为叠句。问彼分几种差别?故说“abyapetaṃ byapetaññaṃ”。其中,凡不被其他音素间隔、以音素集合而说者,为无间叠句。凡被间隔者,为有间叠句。凡两者混合者,为另一种,即无间有间混合。如是,叠句先分三种。此三种叠句,在境之分别的确定中,凡以始、中、末为境、为行境者,应知为“以始中末为境”。于何者之诸句?于各别四句——即偈颂之支分。虽有待他,然因能达义,故作复合词。显示巴利原文
26. Idāni taṃ yathāvuttamabhimataṃ dassetumupakkamate ‘‘abyapete’’ccādinā. Āvuttā adhivuttā punappunuccāraṇupetā anekesaṃ patirūpattā, bahuvaṇṇā sarabyañjanarūpā, na eko vaṇṇo tassānuppāsattā, tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘vaṇṇāvutti paro yathā’’ti , tehi jātaṃ yamakanti viññāyate. Katividhaṃ taṃ vikappīyatīti āha ‘‘abyapetaṃ byapetañña’’nti. Tattha yaṃ vaṇṇantarābyavahitaṃ vaṇṇasamudāyena vuttaṃ. Tadabyapetaṃ yamakaṃ. Yaṃ tu byavahitaṃ, taṃ byapetaṃ. Yaṃ pana ubhayamissaṃ, taṃ aññaṃ aparaṃ abyapetabyapetanti tidhā yamakaṃ tāva vikappīyate. Tametaṃ tividhaṃ yamakaṃ visayavibhāganirūpanāyaṃ ādi ca majjho ca anto ca gocaro visayo yasseti ādimajjhantagocaraṃ viññeyyaṃ. Kesaṃ pādānaṃ? Paccekaṃ catunnaṃgāthāvayavānaṃ. Sāpekkhattepi samāso gammakattā.
其中,对于四句组中属于开头、中间、末尾的叠句,可能出现的种类有多少?其根本种类有七种。如何呢?于同一句中,某处为开头叠句,某处为中间叠句,某处为末尾叠句,某处为中间末尾叠句,某处为中间开头叠句,某处为开头末尾叠句,某处为全叠句。如此,各自作为根本的七种,在四个句子中成为二十八种。而句子开头叠句,以及不间隔的第一句开头叠句,同样不间隔的第二句开头叠句、第三句开头叠句、第四句开头叠句,不间隔的第一第二句开头叠句,不间隔的第一第三句开头叠句,不间隔的第一第四句开头叠句等,以多种方式被称赞。当成为全叠句时,应知会产生大叠句等种种分别。显示巴利原文
Tattha pādacatukkassa ādimajjhantabhāvīnaṃ yamakānaṃ yāvanto pakārā sambhavanti, te mūlā satta. Kathaṃ? Ekasmiṃyeva pāde kvaci ādiyamakaṃ, kvaci majjhayamakaṃ, kvaci antayamakaṃ, kvaci majjhantayamakaṃ, kvaci majjhādiyamakaṃ, kvaci ādyantayamakaṃ, kvaci sabbayamakanti. Evaṃ paccekaṃ mūlabhūtā sattāti catūsu aṭṭhavīsati honti. Pādādiyamakañca paṭhamapādādiyamakamabyapetaṃ tathā dutiyatatiyacatutthapādādiyamakamabyapetaṃ paṭhamadutiyapādādiyamakamabyapetaṃ paṭhamatatiyapādādiyamakamabyapetaṃ paṭhamacatutthapādādiyamakamabyapetantiādinā anekadhā pasaṃsanti. Yadā ca sabbatoyamakaṃ, tadā mahāyamakādayo vikappā jāyantīti veditabbaṃ.
26 26. 现在,以“不间隔的”等语说明所乐的叠句。由一再诵说、具多种音色、以集合为体、由众多音节与音素之身所生的叠句,因不被其他音色间隔,故名“无间”;因被其他音色间隔,故名“有间”;因兼具二者,故成与他们不同的“无间有间”。如此有三种。而此叠句,依所行境之区分规则,以诗偈句子的开头为行境、中间为行境、末尾为行境,如是亦有三种。此处,“且”字用于引出应说之余事;所谓应说之余事,即不同于如前所述无间等分类的、现前为句子开头、中间、末尾之间的,或称为“陈述”、“语句开端”者,即是此之名称。由不相似的音色而离开,为“有间”;与此相反的为“无间”;无间与有间及其他,为相违聚集体。那些多种的即是音色,已说出的即是多种音色,由他们所生;开头、中间与末尾,是彼之行境,如此作释。显示巴利原文
26. Idāni abhimatayamakaṃ dīpeti ‘‘abyapete’’ccādinā. Āvuttehi punappunaṃ vuttehi anekavaṇṇehi samudāyarūpattā anekehi sarabyañjanasarīrehi vaṇṇehi jātaṃ yamakaṃ aññehi vaṇṇehi abyavahitattā abyapetaṃ, vaṇṇantarehi byavahitattā byapetaṃ, ubhayamissakattā tehi aññaṃ abyapetabyapetañcāti tividhaṃ hoti. Tañca yamakaṃ visayavibhāganiyamena gāthāpādānaṃ ādigocaraṃ majjhagocaraṃ antagocaramiti tividhaṃ hoti. Ettha casaddo vattabbantare pavattati, vattabbantaraṃ nāma yathāvuttaabyapetādibhedato aññaṃ vattabbatāya samukhībhūtaṃ pādānaṃ ādimajjhāvasānantaraṃ, upanyāso vākyārambhoti ca etasseva nāmaṃ. Visadisena vaṇṇena apetaṃ byapetaṃ. Tabbiparītamabyapetaṃ. Abyapetañca byapetañca aññañcāti samāhāradvando. Aneke ca te vaṇṇā ca, āvuttāyeva anekavaṇṇā, tehi jātaṃ, ādi ca majjho ca anto ca, te gocarā yassāti viggaho.
其中,于四句组的开头、中间、末尾处所获得的叠句分类,每一句各有七种。如何为七种?句首叠句、句中叠句、句末叠句、句中句末叠句、句中句首叠句、句首句末叠句、总叠句——如此各成七种,在四句之中,根本叠句便为二十八种。此中,句首叠句等,有不隔句的第一句句首叠句,同样第二、第三、第四句的句首叠句;有不隔句的第一与第二句句首叠句,同样第一与第三句、第一与第四句的句首叠句;有不隔句的第二与第三句句首叠句,同样第二与第四句、第三与第四句的句首叠句。如此,不隔句的句首叠句有十种。同样,隔句的也有十种,合为二十种。不隔句的第一句句中叠句,同样第二句的句中叠句等,句中叠句也有二十种。不隔句的第一句句末叠句,同样第二句的句末叠句等,句末叠句也有二十种。又依组合差别,则成更多种。显示巴利原文
Tattha pādacatukkassa ādimajjhāvasānesu labbhamānayamakabhedā ekekasmiṃ pāde satta satta bhavanti. Kathaṃ? Pādādiyamakaṃ pādamajjhayamakaṃ pādantayamakaṃ majjhantayamakaṃ majjhādiyamakaṃ ādyantayamakaṃ sabbatoyamakanti evaṃ paccekaṃ satta satta katvā catūsu mūlabhūtayamakā aṭṭhavīsa bhavanti. Ettha pādādiyamakādikampi abyapetapaṭhamapādādiyamakaṃ tathā dutiyatatiyacatutthapādādiyamakamiti ca abyapetapaṭhamadutiyapādādiyamakaṃ tathā paṭhamatatiyapādādiyamakaṃ paṭhamacatutthapādādiyamakamiti ca abyapetadutiyatatiyapādādiyamakaṃ tathā dutiyacatutthapādādiyamakamiti ca abyapetatatiyacatutthapādādiyamakamiti ca evamabyapetapādādiyamakā dasa honti. Tathā byapetāpi dasāti vīsati, abyapetapaṭhamapādamajjhayamakaṃ tathā dutiyapādamajjhayamakamiccādinā majjhayamakampi vīsatividhaṃ hoti. Abyapetapaṭhamapādantayamakaṃ tathā dutiyapādantayamakamiccādinā antayamakampi vīsatividhaṃ. Saṃsaggabhedato pana anekavidhaṃ hoti.
不间隔的第一句开头叠句之解释显示巴利原文
Abyapetapaṭhamapādādiyamakavaṇṇanā
善人与不善人,皆依功德而有辨别力;
若亲近无辨别者,则不得辨别。
显示巴利原文 Sujanā’sujanā sabbe, guṇenāpi vivekino; Vivekaṃ na samāyanti, avivekijanantike.
27 “善人”等。善人即贤善之人,不善人即不贤善之人,这一切分属两方的差别之众,虽以戒等功德为作具或因,而为具慧者,然因功德于善人中可得、于不善人中不可得,故由功德而显得种种不同;然而,在无慧者之人的近处——即与之共处,具慧者亦不能获得分辨、达不到辨别;由于缺乏辨别了知之慧,具慧者亦视他们为同一。此即“不间隔的第一句开头叠句”。显示巴利原文
27.‘‘Sujanā’’iccādi. Sujanā sajjanā, asujanā asajjanāti ete sabbe ubhayapakkhapātino visesā janā guṇena sīlādinā karaṇabhūtena, hetubhūtena vā vivekinopi sādhūsu labbhamānānamasādhūsvanupalabbhanato puthubhūtāpi avivekīnaṃ janānaṃ antike samīpe tesaṃ sannidhāne vivekaṃ vibhāgaṃ na samāyanti napāpuṇanti, vibhāgavijānanapaññāvekallena ca vivekinopi janā te ekato katvā passantīti. Idaṃ paṭhamapādādiyamakamabyapetaṃ.
27 现在,为了显示“不间隔的第一句开头叠句”的略貌,而说“善人”等。善人即贤善之人,不善人即不贤善之人,这一切属于两方者,以戒等、杀生等功德为因,虽为具慧者,但由于杀生等于善人中不现行、戒等于不善人中不现行,故由功德而成为种种;然而,在无慧者之人的近处——即缺乏辨别智之人的近处,不得辨别、不能达到辨别。“辨别”即他们之间无有分离,故称为具慧者。此处,依所缘的转起而言,辨别即是慧,非具慧者即是无慧者,他们即是人,他们之近处,如此解释。这是“不间隔的第一句开头叠句”。显示巴利原文
27. Idāni abyapetapaṭhamapādādiyamakassa mukhamattaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘sujani’’ccādi. Sujanā sādhujanā, asujanā asādhujanā ceti sabbe ubhayapakkhikā sīlādinā, pāṇātipātādinā guṇena hetunā vivekino api sādhūsu pāṇātipātādīnaṃ, asādhūsu sīlādīnaṃ appavattito guṇena puthubhūtāpi avivekijanantike vivekañāṇarahitānaṃ janānaṃ santike vivekaṃ vibhāgaṃ na samāyanti na pāpuṇanti. Viveko vinābhavanametesamatthīti vivekino. Ettha visayopacārena vivekoti paññā, na vivekinoti avivekino, teyeva janā, tesaṃ antikamiti ca viggaho. Idaṃ abyapetapaṭhamapādādiyamakaṃ.
不间隔的第一第二句开头叠句之解释显示巴利原文
Abyapetapaṭhamadutiyapādādiyamakavaṇṇanā
只要他们仍处于“曾存在”之中,而未到达,便成为苦乐的施与者。
显示巴利原文 Kusalā’kusalā sabbe, pabalā’pabalā’thavā; No yātā yāva’hosittaṃ, sukhadukkhappadā siyuṃ.
28 “善”等。强法,由串习与获得而成为有力者。复次,此为无间之义。弱法,因无他们而成为无力者。一切善与不善法,只要它们处于“曾存在”之际——由于仅生起而无果报可得,唯以“曾存在”的名义相而仅为业——尚未到达、未达到唯作业性;在彼时,它们便施与苦与乐,故成为苦乐的施与者。只要轮回流转,它们即是苦乐的施与者。这是无间隔的第一、第二句开头的双论。显示巴利原文
28.‘‘Kusalā’’iccādi. Pabalā āsevanappaṭilābhavasena balavanto ca. Athāti anantaratthe nipāto. Apabalā tadabhāvato dubbalā ca sabbe kusalākusalā dhammā yāva yattakaṃ kālaṃ ahosittaṃ vinā uppattimattaṃ phaladānāsambhavato kevalaṃ ‘‘ahosī’’ti vacanīyatthanimittamattakammabhāvena ahosikammattaṃ no yātā na sampattā, tāva tattakaṃ kālaṃ sukhañca dukkhañca taṃ padantīti sukhadukkhappadā siyuṃ. Yāva saṃsārapavatti, tāva sukhadukkhadāyakā hontīti. Idaṃ paṭhamadutiyapādādiyamakamabyapetaṃ.
28 二十八、强(法)因亲近、修习等缘而得力,或弱(法)因无这些缘而无力;一切善与不善,由于无有果报之生起,只要尚未到达、未达到(其)存续之量,在那段时间内,便依次成为苦乐之施与者,如实地给予苦乐。此为不混杂初、第二句等之双论。善之对治为不善。应说“已存在”之状态,即“已存在性”。如“来见”等词,从动词词根也可有ṇa等缘。显示巴利原文
28.Pabalā āsevanādipaccayalābhena balavanto vā atha apabalā tadabhāvena dubbalā vā sabbe kusalākusalā ahosittaṃ phaladānābhāvato pavattimattataṃ yāva yattakaṃ kālaṃ no yātā appattā, tāva tattakaṃ sukhadukkhappadā yathākkamaṃ sukhadukkhapadāyino siyuṃ bhavanti. Idaṃ abyapetapaṭhamadutiyapādādiyamakaṃ. Kusalapaṭipakkhā akusalā. ‘‘Ahosī’’ti vattabbassa bhāvo ahosittaṃ. ‘‘Ehipassiko’’tiādīsu viya kriyāpadatopi ṇādipaccayā honti.
不混杂初、第二、第三句等双论之注释显示巴利原文
Abyapetapaṭhamadutiyatatiyapādādiyamakavaṇṇanā
Sādaraṃ sā daraṃ hantu, vihitā vihitā mayā; Vandanā vandanāmāna-bhājane ratanattaye.
29 二十九、“恭敬地”等。礼敬与慢心(即供养),通过三门得以示现;在以令心生喜悦等义而称为“宝”的佛等之集合体——三宝中,即于作为依托、容器的三宝中,我以恭敬、具足敬意而安排、造作了此礼敬。此礼敬因能去除整个轮回之苦毒,故是殊胜的利益;愿此礼敬、此合掌,能摧毁、损减我的痛苦与烦恼——即身心的热恼。因我说“由我”,故从义理上可了知为“我”。此即不混杂初、第二、第三句等的双论。显示巴利原文
29.‘‘Sādara’’miccādi. Vandanā dvārattayopadassiyamānā māno ca pūjā, tesaṃ bhājane ādhārabhūte ratijananādinā atthena ratanasaṅkhātānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ taye samūhabhūte ratanattaye sādaraṃ ādarasahitaṃ katvā mayā vihitā katā, vihitā alaṃsaṃsāradukkhavisaṭanirākaraṇato visesena hitā padhyā sā vandanā so paṇāmo daraṃ darathaṃ kāyacittapariḷāhaṃ hantu hiṃsatu. Mayāti vuttattā meti atthato viññāyati. Idaṃ pana paṭhamadutiyatatiyapādādiyamakamabyapetaṃ.
29 二十九、三宝堪为合掌供养之所依——由三门施行的礼敬与供养,皆以三宝为依止处。于佛、法、僧三宝中,他们以能生喜悦等义而名为“宝”。我所恭敬、具足敬意而行之礼敬,乃是殊胜之利益,能成就世间与出世间之成就;愿此礼敬摧毁、灭除我的痛恼——身心之烦扰。此偈初句、二句、三句等并无杂糅,乃分说之法。与敬意俱行,即是“恭敬地”,乃动作之修饰语。此处所言动作,即“vihitā”一词所表之作。虽“vihitā”一词以所作之对象而说,然因“否则不成理”之理则之力,彼分化而存,既成与“已作”之动作相关之所缘,亦为动作本身;于“被安排”之义,带yup后缀之词,中性故为中性与单数。因彼为彼之修饰,“恭敬地”一词亦成中性、第二格、单数。显示巴利原文
29.Vandanāmānabhājane dvārattayena vidhiyamānapaṇāmapūjānaṃ ādhārabhūte ratanattaye ratijananādiatthena ratanasaṅkhātānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ taye mayā yā vandanā sādaraṃ ādarasahitaṃ vihitā katā, vihitā lokiya lokuttara sampattisādhanato visesena hitā sā vandanā daraṃ mayhaṃ kāyacittadarathaṃ hantu vināsetu. Idaṃ abyapetapaṭhamadutiyatatiyapādādiyamakaṃ. Saha ādarena vattamānaṃ sādaraṃ, kriyāvisesanaṃ. Ettha kriyā nāma vihitāsaddena niddiṭṭhakaraṇaṃ. Karaṇañhi vihitāsaddassa vuttakammattepi aññathānupapattilakkhaṇasāmatthiyato bhijjitvā vijjamānaṃ ‘‘akāsi’’nti kriyāya sambandhamupentaṃ kammañca hoti, bhāve vihitassa yupaccayantassa napuṃsakattā napuṃsakañca, sattāya ekattā ekavacanañca tabbisesanattā sādarasaddopi napuṃsakadutiyekavacano hoti.
“凡于所修饰之处可得见者,”
“他们性、数、格之变化;”
在同位关系中,更应如此。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Visesye dissamānā yā, Liṅgasaṅkhyāvibhattiyo; Tulyādhikaraṇe bhiyyo, Kātabbā tā visesane’’ti .
如前所说。如此,把握了动作修饰语之后,依其内在力量,“mayā”(由我)这个具格词成为主格,“vandanā”(礼敬)这个主格词成为属格。礼敬与慢,是它们的容器。三者的集合称为“三”,诸宝的集合称为“三宝”——如此分解。显示巴利原文
Hi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ kriyāvisesane gahite sāmatthiyato ‘‘mayā’’ti tatiyantassa paṭhamantattaṃ, ‘‘vandanā’’ti paṭhamantassa chaṭṭhuntañca hoti. Vandanā ca māno ca, tesaṃ bhājanaṃ. Tiṇṇaṃ samūho tayaṃ, ratanānaṃ tayanti ca viggaho.
不混杂四句等双论之注释显示巴利原文
Abyapetacatukkapādādiyamakavaṇṇanā
Kamalaṃ ka’malaṃ kattuṃ-vanado vanado’mbaraṃ; Sugato sugato lokaṃ, sahitaṃ sahitaṃ karaṃ.
30 三十、“莲花”即水中之莲。莲花以水为庄严,乃为善人而存在。由于如盛开莲花丛所点缀的池水等处,能成就如此可爱之相;它又给予土壤保护,是谷物丰饶等之因,故称为“护田者”。云给予水而不空虚,故名为“云”;虚空即天空,承载水流。具足是圆满、完善、善美、增长,由功德圆满的行者所成就。善逝者以清晰的言辞,如同过去诸佛一般,舍离贪欲等烦恼而前进,证得阿拉汉的境地,断除一切污染,进入光荣的涅槃之都,因此称为善逝。这一称号乃是伟大圣人以无量的波罗蜜功德成就及其所承担的光明标记,庄严世界、超越世间者,称为具足之世。这也作为四足之物(如座、床等)上装饰的称号。显示巴利原文
30.‘‘Kamala’’miccādi. Kamalaṃ aravindaṃ kaṃ jalaṃ alaṅkattuṃ sajjanatthāya hoti, vikasitāravindasandohasambhāvitodakassa vāpādīsu tādisaramaṇīyattasampattisambhavato, avanaṃ rakkhaṃ dadāti sassasampatyādikāraṇabhāvenāti avanado. Vanaṃ jalaṃ dadāti na tucchoti vanado megho ambaraṃ ākāsaṃ jaladhārabhārabharitambarakuharassa dassanīyatāguṇayogato alaṃkattunti adhikataṃ. Sahitaṃ sampuṇṇaṃ hitaṃ abhivuddhiṃ karaṃ karonto suṭṭhu gadatīti sugato mañjubhāṇī pubbabuddhā viya nekkhammādinā kāmacchandādike pajahanto gantvā arahattamaggena savāsanasakalakilese samucchinditvā sobhanaṃ nibbānapuraṃ gatoti vā sugatoti vutto so mahāmuni attano aparimitapāramitāsimpakacagalitatilakabhāvena lokaṃ lokattayaṃ, sahitaṃ lokanti vā yojanīyaṃ alaṅkattuṃ alaṃkaraṇāyāti. Idaṃ pādacatukkādiyamakamabyapetaṃ.
30 莲花与睡莲装饰着水面,五种莲花所覆盖的水域因此而悦意宜人。雨季应时,甘霖普降,令庄稼丰收等,于此给予守护的积云,为长空、为苍穹添上庄严,那饱含雨翳的云腹令人睹而生悦。同样地,诸佛圆满成就庄严的涅槃,亦使世间被环绕成华丽庄严的景象。由诸佛及如来庄严世界、庄严众生,藉由譬说故事等因缘,其他缺乏这些严丽的世界便得以辨明。一切义理皆依众生违犯而起,即所谓以上内容悉为第一重诸行善业所摄持。此即是不侵害四足动物等的行为轨则,也就是以不侵害之业为前导的教法体系。显示巴利原文
30.Kamalaṃ padumaṃ kaṃ jalaṃ alaṅkattuṃ pañcavidhapadumasañchannassa udakassa ramaṇīyattā sajjetuṃ hoti. Avanado kāle vuṭṭhisampadāya sassasampadādīnaṃ kāraṇattā ārakkhaṃ dento vanado megho ambaraṃ ākāsaṃ alaṅkattuṃ jaladhārabhārabharitambarakucchiyā dassanīyattā sajjetuṃ hoti, sahitaṃ sampuṇṇaṃ hitaṃ abhivuḍḍhiṃ karaṃ karonto sugato citrakathī sundaraṃ nibbānaṃ gato vā so sugato so tathāgato lokaṃ lokattayaṃ, sahitaṃ lokaṃ vā alaṅkattuṃ citrakathādikāraṇehi tādisassa aññassa ca lokarāmaṇeyyassābhāvā sajjetuṃ hoti. Sabbapadatthānaṃ sattābyabhicārittā hotīti gammaṃ. Tatoyeva sabbe paṭhamantabhavanakriyāya yujjantīti vadanti. Idaṃ abyapetacatukkapādādiyamakaṃ.
此即显示了“不侵害”等诸对中余下的提示之义;
当知这些方位等,即是其余诸对。
显示巴利原文 Abyapetādiyamaka-sseso leso nidassito; Ñeyyāni’māyeva disā-ya’ññāni yamakānipi.
31 如此,对于由“不侵害”等所构成的不侵害对句,仅略示其大概方向,并以“不侵害”等语加以总结。在不侵害中,就其四足之根本及其对立,已如上述,并无任何解释上的偏差或虚设。对于其余种类,难道就没有分别吗?答曰:‘应当了知。’依此方向,相应而次第称为不侵害、第三第四等不侵害行。例如第一与第二、第一与第三不侵害行,以及第一与第四、第二与第三不侵害行等相展转。同时,与中间分位相应的诸对立种类亦当了知。凡此种种,智者皆可由此方向明了。而且——显示巴利原文
31. Iccevamabhimatayamake abyapetapādādiyamakassa disāmattaṃ dassetvā upasaṃharati ‘‘abyapete’’ccādinā. Abyapetassa abyavahitassa catunnaṃ pādānaṃ ādo, ādibhūtassa vā yamakassa eso yathāvutto leso kocideva bhedo nidassito vikappito. Aparānipi kiṃ na vikappiyantīticeti āha ‘‘ñeyyāni’’ccādi. Imāya disāya iminā upāyena maggeneva aññāni vuttato aparāni dutiyapādādiyamakatatiyapādādiyamakacatutthapādādiyamakādīni abyapetānipi paṭhamadutiyapādādiyamakapaṭhamatatiyapādādiyamakānipi byapetāni, paṭhamacatutthadutiyatatiyapādādiyamakādīnipi abyapetabyapetāni, tathā majjhantapādayamakāni ñeyyāni jānitabbāni, viññūnaṃ tādisāya disāya dassitattāti. Tattha ca –
功德与过患同在,善者与不善者共处;
他们彼此争执不休,心对心,主啊,这究竟如何?”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Guṇāguṇena saha te, sādhavo’sādhavo janā; Vigāhante samaṃ nātha, cittaṃ citte kathaṃ nu te’’.
所谓“以欲等”,是指第二根等尚未生起之法。显示巴利原文
Iccādinā dutiyapādādiyamakādīni abyapetāni,
“以可爱之语,一切……”
“以可爱之语,于说不可爱语者;”
于诸执取处,你已制胜。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Piyena vacasā sabbe, Piyena’ppiyabhāṇino; Pādānate jinokāsi, So dhammo hantu vo’ppiyaṃ’’.
如这些,第一、第二句等双句,未加区分。显示巴利原文
Iccādinā paṭhamadutiyapādādiyamakādīni abyapetāni,
将有垢作为有垢,令清净者长久欢喜;
彼长久、长肢者,称有垢为有垢。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sa’malaṃ samalaṃ kattuṃ, suciraṃsuci raṃjaye; Suciraṃ suciraṃgaṃ taṃ, sa’malaṃ samalaṃbhi yo’’.
即以这些,第一、第四、第二、第三句等双句,以及未区分与已区分者。显示巴利原文
Iccādinā paṭhamacatutthadutiyatatiyapādādiyamakādīni abyapetabyapetāni,
悦意者啊,请除去烦恼,折伏我心中所生;
你不正是以波罗蜜精髓所修习的良药吗?
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Manohara hara klesaṃ, jina cetobhavaṃ mama; Nanu tvaṃ pāramīsārā-matabhāvitamosadhaṃ’’.
以上等语,是‘中间半偈双’。显示巴利原文
Iccādinā majjhapādayamakāni,
以善者令欢喜,以胜利之财充满大地;
若你是渴慕最胜者(佛)的坚定者,你便希求于此。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sādhunā raṃjaya jaya-ddhaninā’pūrayi mahiṃ; Yo taṃ jinavaraṃ dhīra-matthakāmosi ce tuvaṃ’’.
当知这些为末句双句。显示巴利原文
Iccādinā antapādayamakāni jānitabbāni.
31 如此,以“所喜对仗句”(abhimatayamaka)为例,作结说明“不间隔对仗句”(abyapetayamaka)等的方便,即言“不间隔”(abyapeti)等。对于“不间隔等对仗句”,借由不相似的字音(visadisavaṇṇa),展示了“不间隔对仗句”(abyavahitādiyamaka)或“不间隔句等对仗句”(abyapetapādādiyamaka)的略例,即“善人(sujani)”等,此为少分举例之法,已被显示、被阐明。其余各类对仗句,亦应依此方向、循此方法,为智者所了知、所通达。“ādiyamaka”即最初的对仗句,或作为最初的对仗句;而“不间隔且为最初的对仗句”(abyapetañca taṃ ādiyamakañcāti)乃一句之表述。依此所示次第,当知“不间隔第二句等最初对仗句”(abyapetadutiyapādādiyamaka)等,此为其意趣所在。显示巴利原文
31. Evaṃ abhimatayamakena abyapetayamakānamupāyādīni nigamento āha ‘‘abyapeti’’ccādi. Abyapetādiyamakassa visadisavaṇṇehi abyavahitādiyamakassa, abyapetapādādiyamakassa vā eso leso ‘‘sujani’’ccādiko appakodāharaṇanayo nidassito niddiṭṭho. Aññāni yamakānipi imāyeva disāya iminā nayeneva ñeyyāni viññūhi ñātabbāni. Ādo yamakaṃ, ādibhūtaṃ vā yamakaṃ, abyapetañca taṃ ādiyamakañcāti vākyaṃ. Evaṃ dassitena iminā kamena abyapetadutiyapādādiyamakādayo ñātabbāti adhippāyo.
其中,“不间隔第二句等最初对仗句”当如下了知:显示巴利原文
Tattha abyapetadutiyapādādiyamakamevaṃ veditabbaṃ –
善士与不善士,皆以其功德与过失,与你俱在;
他们平等深入,主人啊,于你而言,心与心是如何的?
显示巴利原文 Guṇāguṇena saha te, sādhavo’sādhavo janā; Vigāhante samaṃ nātha, cittaṃ citte kathaṃ nu te.
尊者啊!于你的心中,那些善人与不善人,各各带着其功德与过失,如何能平等、一同地深入呢?心真是奇妙!于善人与不善人中安住于平等慈,真是殊胜啊!这是意趣所在。显示巴利原文
Bho nātha te tuyhaṃ citte sādhavo asādhavo te janā guṇāguṇena sakasakaguṇena aguṇena ca saha samaṃ ekajjhaṃ kathaṃ nu vigāhante, cittaṃ acchariyaṃ sujanadujjanesu samamettā acchariyāti adhippāyo.
“不间隔第一句第二句等最初对仗句”,应作如是观——显示巴利原文
Abyapetapaṭhamadutiyapādādiyamakamevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ –
他以可爱之言,待一切众生,纵使对方出语不悦,亦报以可爱之辞;
胜利者以此令他们归伏,此法能除你们的不悦。
显示巴利原文 Piyena vacasā sabbe, piyena’ppiyabhāṇino; Pādānate jinokāsi, so dhammo hantu vo’ppīyaṃ.
胜利者以可爱之言,令一切人——即便是出语不悦者——亦皆归伏。此法令你们的不悦消亡。此处,因取‘pi’字作为‘api’字的同义词,故韵律并无中断。显示巴利原文
Jino appiyabhāṇinopi sabbe jane piyena yena vacasā pādānate akāsi, so dhammo vo appiyaṃ hantu. Ettha apisaddapariyāyassa pisaddassa gahitattā yatibhaṅgo natthi.
“第一第四第二第三句等无间隔对仗句”(paṭhamacatutthadutiyatatiyapādādiabyapetabyapetayamaka)应如此看待——显示巴利原文
Paṭhamacatutthadutiyatatiyapādādiabyapetabyapetayamakamevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ –
令有垢者转为无垢,令长久洁净者生欢喜;
彼长久洁净、具足妙肢者,有垢与无垢交相辉映。
显示巴利原文 Sa’malaṃ samalaṃ kattuṃ, suciraṃsuci raṃjaye; Suciraṃ suciraṃgaṃ taṃ, sa’malaṃ samalaṃbhi yoti.
“samalaṃ samalaṃ”与“suciraṃ suciraṃ”这两组词,因被音韵不同的词语隔开,而成“间隔语”(byapeta)。其中,“samalaṃ samalaṃ”这一前后组合,被音韵不同的“kattu”一词隔开;“suciraṃ suciraṃ”这一前后组合,被音韵不同的“jaye”一词隔开,故为“间隔语”。未受不同音韵词语隔开者,则为“无间隔语”(abyapeta)。那位胜者(jina),即“suciraṃsuci”——以美妙光芒著称、与“uci”(称誉)相应者,他证得了“saṃ”(寂静,即涅槃),证得了“samalaṃ”(无垢);“alaṃ”(极其殊胜)、“suciraṃgaṃ”(恒久清净之身)——这位胜者,以“samalaṃ”(有垢秽,指尘垢或贪等可厌垢秽)的“saṃ”(自身),为作“alaṃkattuṃ”(庄严、令无垢),愿他“suciraṃ”(恒久地)“raṃjaye”(令欣悦、安住于自身)。显示巴利原文
Ettha ‘‘samalaṃ samalaṃ, suciraṃ sucira’’nti visadisavaṇṇehi abyavahitattā abyapetaṃ, ‘‘samalaṃ samala’’nti pubbaparayugaḷaṃ ‘‘kattu’’miti bhinnavaṇṇehi, ‘‘suciraṃ sucira’’nti pubbaparayugaḷaṃ ‘‘jaye’’ti bhinnavaṇṇehi ca byavahitattā byapetañca hoti. Suciraṃsuci sobhanaraṃsinā uci yutto yo jino saṃ santiṃ nibbānaṃ samalaṃbhi alabhi, alaṃ accantaṃ atisayena suciraṃgaṃ visuddhadehaṃ taṃ jinaṃ samalaṃ jallikāsaṅkhātena, rāgādikucchitasaṅkhātena vā malena sahitaṃ saṃ attānaṃ alaṃkattuṃ nimmalaṃ katvā sajjetuṃ suciraṃ sucirakālaṃ raṃjaye attani abhiramāpeyya.
颂中双关,应如是观:显示巴利原文
Pādamajjhayamakamevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ –
夺心者啊,请除却我心中烦恼;胜者啊,……
难道你不就是以波罗蜜之精髓为乐、修习而成的药吗?
显示巴利原文 Manohara hara klesaṃ, jina cetobhavaṃ mama; Nanu tvaṃ pāramīsārā-matabhāvitamosadhanti.
摄心者、胜者啊,请除去、带走我心中的烦恼与热恼;难道你不就是以波罗蜜之精髓为乐而修习而成的药、天药吗?显示巴利原文
Manohara jina mama cetobhavaṃ klesaṃ santāpaṃ hara apanaya, tvaṃ pāramīsārāmatabhāvitaṃ osadhaṃ dibbosadhaṃ nanu.
应当这样来理解颂末的双关语:显示巴利原文
Pādantayamakamevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ –
Sādhunā raṃjaya jaya-ddhaninā’pūrayi mahiṃ; Yo taṃ jinavaraṃ dhīra-matthakāmosi ce tuvanti.
那位胜者之最,以善妙、具足胜利之财、能度化众生的胜利之音,遍满大地。坚智者啊,那位胜者之最,若你是欲求义利的善士,便请令他欢喜、令他安住。以此所开示的双关语,即可了知其余第三颂等双关语。显示巴利原文
Yo jinavaro sādhunā jayaddhaninā veneyyajayaghosena mahiṃ āpūrayi, dhīraṃ taṃ jinavaraṃ tuvaṃ sappurisa ce atthakāmo asi, raṃjaya abhiramāpehi. Iminā niddiṭṭhayamakeheva avasesā tatiyapādādiyamakādayo viññeyyā.
其种类极其繁多
是种种差别与混杂的来源
虽有一些容易
有些极为难行。
显示巴利原文 Accantabahavo tesaṃ, Bhedā sambhedayoniyo; Tatthāpi keci sukarā, Keci accantadukkarā.
32 第三十二章 问:“为何说未全部变格,故称‘极’等?”答:那些变格的混合、混淆、杂糅的读法,其生起之处称为“混合来源”。如上所述,这些变格的种类极其繁多,以众多方式出现。在它们之中,有些变格容易运用,称为“易行”;与之相反的某些变格则极为难行。如此分为两类之后,易行者仅示某些合意双关的梗概。今当了知某些难行的梗概,并非全部。显示巴利原文
32. Kiṃ pana sākallena na vikappitānīti āha ‘‘accanti’’ccādi. Tesaṃ vikappānaṃ sambhedo saṅkaro missattamuccāraṇappakāro yoni pabhavo yesaṃ te sambhedayoniyo, bhedā pakārā accantabahavo atisayena bahulā yathāvuttanayena sambhavanti, tatthāpi tesu vikappesupi keci vikappā sukhena karīyanti payujjantīti sukarā, tabbiparīto ca keci vikappā accantadukkarā. Iti dvidhā saṅgayhanti, tesu sukarānaṃ kesañci abhimatayamakānaṃ mukhamattaṃ dassitaṃ. Idāni dukkarānaṃ kesañci mukhamattaṃ na sabbamevaṃ veditabbaṃ.
因为纵然你们不在此处,
也不存在如你们这般吉祥的人。
显示巴利原文 Samunnatena te satā, Kathaṃ na te na te siyuṃ; Yato natenatepi’to, Siyuṃ na te nate subhā.
这是四句中间的双关,以“离”与“不离”为同一形式,极为难行。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pādacatukkamajjhayamakamabyapetabyapetamekarūpaṃ dukkaraṃ.
那些光耀者并非天神,虽被庄严,
恰如被众多天神所败的恶魔一般;
于众会之中,国王亦如天王之被天众围绕,
如同诸天王战胜天众而耀然显现。
显示巴利原文 Na bhāsurā tepi surā vibhūsitā, Tathāsurā bhūri surāparājitā; Sabhāsu rājāpi tathā surājito, Yathā surājanti surāvinissaṭā.
此偈为四句,中间二句用同一形式作双关分列。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ catukkapādamajjhayamakamekarūpabyapetaṃ.
32 在通过特征指示而归结这一切之后,为了说明目的——因有人疑惑“有何目的”——便说了“极尽”等语。那些双关的差别,是混合的根源,也是种种分类生起的因;其差别种类高低繁多,极其众多。其中,有些双关容易做到、容易成就,有些则极其难做、极难成就。“混合是根源”是对词的分析。显示巴利原文
32. Sabbamidamanuddisitvā lakkhaṇātidesena nigamanaṃ kimatthamiccāsaṅkāyamāha ‘‘accante’’ccādi. Tesaṃ yamakānaṃ sambhedayoniyo pabheduppattikāraṇabhūtā bhedā uccāvacapakārā accantabahavo, tatthāpi tesupi keci yamakā sukarā susādhiyā, keci accantadukkarā atisayena dussādhiyā. Sambhedo yoni yesanti viggaho.
在此,由于已说明了容易的双关,所以只教导趣入困难双关的方法。显示巴利原文
Iha sukarassa upadisitattā dukkarayamakapavesopāyamattamupadisīyate –
若有人能以心、以意,奉献给导师,
他的心与意,便能令导师欢喜;
若有人不将心与意以此奉献给导师,
他的心与意,便不成为善士所应敬奉者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Manaṃ manaṃ satthu dadeyya ce yo, Manaṃ manaṃ pīṇayata’ssa satthu; Manaṃ manaṃ tena dadeyya ce na, Manaṃ manaṃpa’ssa na sādhupujja’’nti.
这是四句等双关的一种形式,兼具无间隔与有间隔。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pādacatukkādiyamakamekarūpaṃ abyapetabyapetaṃ.
如果有人能将自己的心——也就是自己的识,哪怕只是片刻,奉献给导师——胜利者的心,那么导师——牟尼王的心,就会令此人的心——也就是识,喜悦与满足。因此,若有人不将心、识如此奉献给导师,这个人的心、识,哪怕片刻,也不能成为善士们所应敬奉的对象。显示巴利原文
Yo puggalo manaṃ attano cittaṃ satthu jinassa manaṃ khaṇamattampi dadeyya ce, satthu munindassa manaṃ cittaṃ assa puggalassa manaṃ cittaṃ pīṇayati sampīṇeti, tena tasmā manaṃ manaṃ cittaṃ cittaṃ dadeyya ce na yadi no dadeyya, assa puggalassa manaṃ cittaṃ manaṃpi muhuttampi sādhupujjaṃ sādhūhi pūjitabbaṃ na bhavati.
“以高昂之姿,他们成为具念者,”
怎样才能使他们不至于那样?
因为从此处,无论是弯曲还是不弯曲,
他们便不会成为扭曲与不美。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Samunnatena te satā, Kathaṃ na te na te siyuṃ; Yato nate’natepi’to, Siyuṃ na te nate subhā’’ti.
此为四句一组、中间双对、单一行式、纯一无杂之论。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pādacatukkamajjhayamakamekarūpamabyapetabyapetaṃ.
由何种原因、以何种理由,对于具足善妙、崇高、正等崇高之因的你们,即使处于弯曲、不弯曲、非弯曲、非不弯曲之中,那些善妙、那些光明也并非不存在,而是确实存在。因此,以此理由,在弯曲、不弯曲时,那些善妙、那些光明如何会不存在?它们确实存在。显示巴利原文
Yato yena kāraṇena te tuyhaṃ satā sobhanena samunnatena sammā unnatena hetunā natepi avanatepi anatepi anavanatepi te te subhā te te sobhanā na na siyuṃ, bhavanteva, ato tena kāraṇena te subhā te sobhanā nate avanate kathaṃ na siyuṃ, bhavanteva.
令不善之人安住功德;
对于应调伏者,他是功德的容器,
我确实礼敬那属于我、善人中的善人。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Jinaṃ paṇāmonatasajjanaṃ janaṃ, Guṇe nivesentamasajjanaṃ’janaṃ; Veneyyanette guṇabhājanaṃ janaṃ, Name mamentaṃ khalu sajjanaṃjana’’nti.
这是四句一组、末尾双对、单一形式、无混杂的双对,极为困难。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pādacatukkantayamakamekarūpamabyapetabyapetayamakaṃ dukkaraṃ.
礼敬善逝者,即欲礼敬善逝之善人;他于应调伏者,不执著、不放逸,引导其安住并全身心投入于戒等诸功德。对应调伏者而言,他如眼药,即是眼药,是功德的容器与承载者,是善人中的善人。以此因缘,成为善人们之眼药者——此善人,确确实实属于我、为我所有。我礼敬、我顶礼那位胜者。显示巴利原文
Paṇāmonatasajjanaṃ paṇāmitukāmonatasādhujanavantaṃ janaṃ veneyyajanaṃ asajja pamādamakatvā guṇe sīlādiguṇe nivesentaṃ niyojentaṃ veneyyanette añjanaṃ añjanabhūtaṃ guṇabhājanaṃ guṇānamādhārabhūtaṃ sajjanaṃjanaṃ iminā kāraṇena sādhujanānaṃ añjanabhūtaṃ janaṃ sādhujanaṃ khalu ekantena mamentaṃ mamāyantaṃ naṃ jinaṃ name namāmi.
那光辉,确实以其光辉而照耀;
那光辉以其光辉而显现,它若不照耀,又如何能称作光辉?
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sābhāsu sābhā bhuvane jinassa, Sābhāya sā bhāsatiyeva jātu; Sābhāya sā bhāti na ce kathaṃ na, Sābhā sasābhānamaticca bhātī’’ti.
此词不摄入“足四分”等双合论之形态。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pādacatukkādiyamakekarūpabyapetaṃ.
于世间、有情界,胜者之光——即存在于光辉中的妙光,或存在于妙光中的光辉——必然照耀、必然发光。若此胜者之光,超越其他光辉而不照耀、不发光,岂非超越具足光辉与妙光之梵天等众的光辉?必然照耀。显示巴利原文
Bhuvane sattaloke sābhāsu vijjamānābhāsu jinassa sābhā sobhanā ābhā sābhāya vijjamānāya, sobhanāya vā ābhāya ābhāto jātu ekantena bhāsatiyeva dippateva, sā jinābhā sābhāya vijjamānābhāto adhikā hutvā ce na bhāti yadi na bhāsati, sasābhānaṃ vijjamānasobhanābhānaṃ brahmādīnaṃ sābhā sobhanābhāyo aticca atikkamma kathaṃ na bhāti, bhāsatiyeva.
纵彼天神,盛装严饰,亦无光辉,
如是诸阿修罗,众多阿修罗被击败;
在众会中,国王亦如此被击败;
正如离酒之人被击败。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na bhāsurā tepi surā vibhūsitā, Tathāsurā bhūri surāparājitā; Sabhāsu rājāpi tathā surājito, Yathā surājanti surāvinissaṭā’’ti.
此为脱离“足”等四分的双数形态之词。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pādacatukkamajjhayamakekarūpabyapetaṃ.
“酒众”:即那些因饮酒而远离清醒、如同醉了一般的人,他们虽盛装打扮、特加庄严,却不得光彩;同样,这些天人虽名为“酒众”,亦非光辉灿烂。而“未被酒战胜”者,指那些众多未因饮酒而陷入败亡的魔众,如韦波质底等,他们亦非无光彩、不得显耀;“被酒胜”者,则指那善加装饰的醉王,他在众人之中庄严华丽,却为酒所制而不得光辉。显示巴利原文
Surāvinissaṭā surāpānato apagatā janā yathā surājanti, tathā vibhūsitā visesena alaṅkatā tepi surā te devā api na bhāsurā sobhamānā na honti, tathā evaṃ surāparājitā surāpānahetu parājitabhāvaṃ pattā bhūri asurā bahavo vepacittiādayo asurāpi na bhāsurā na sobhanti, tathā evaṃ surājito suṭṭhu alaṅkato rājāpi sabhāsu na bhāsuro.
“于胜者教令中,其希望已止息者”,
他们的希望必定已断除、已灭尽;
因此,一切恶中,希望与风之希望,
当他们正在造作时,希望即得平息。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Jināṇattiyaṃ yo’hitāsā sitāsā, Avassaṃva te hontya’tāsā hatāsā; Ato sabbapāpe satāsā vatāsā, Karonteva santissitā sāmitāsā’’ti.
此为以单字隔开之双对句,即四句一组的对仗。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pādacatukkantayamakamekarūpabyapetaṃ.
那些善人,于胜者的教令——即名为“律制”的教令中安立希望,以不违越而住立希望,成为有净信、极清净者;这些善士,希望已尽,次第断除渴爱,必定、全然无有恐惧,远离怖畏。因此,对于一切罪恶、一切不善,有希望者仍与恐惧相随,唯无过失者……显示巴利原文
Ye sappurisā jināṇattiyaṃ buddhassa vinayapaññattisaṅkhātāṇattiyaṃ ohitāsā avītikkamavasena patiṭṭhitaāsā honti sitāsā parisuddhāsā, te sādhavo hatāsā anukkamena hatataṇhā avassaṃva ekanteneva atāsā bhayarahitā yato honti, ato tasmā sabbapāpe sabbākusale satāsā bhayasahitā vatāsāva niravajjavatābhilāsavanto sādhujanā santissitā santinissitāyo sāmitāsā sāmibhāvāsāyo karonteva.
Yamakaṃ taṃ paheḷī ca, nekantamadhurāni’ti; Upekkhiyanti sabbāni, sissakhedabhayā mayā.
33 第33节:所谓“双对句”,难道不就是诗人们展现特殊才能的标志吗?于此,双对句有其应用,而谜语也有其应用:在游戏娱乐时、在拥挤处交谈时、在迷惑他人时。既然如此,此处怎会有“舍置”呢?因此说“双对句”等。那便是如前所述的双对句,分为易作与难作等类别。至于谜语,古师们列举了十六种,如“集合”、“欺骗”等。在此,其相状如下:显示巴利原文
33. Nanu yamakaṃ nāma kavīnaṃ sāmatthiyavisesasūcakanti tattha taṃ sopayogaṃ, paheḷikā ca sopayogā kīḷāvinodane sambādhaṭṭhānamantane parabyāmohane ca, tasmā tattha kathamupekkhā bhavatoti āha ‘‘yamaka’’ntiādi. Taṃ yathāvuttaṃ yamakañca sukaradukkarappabhedaṃ. Paheḷikā pana pubbācariyehi soḷasa niddiṭṭhā samāgatāvañcitādikā. Tatthidaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ –
Samāgatā nāma siyā, guḷhatthā padasandhinā;
所谓“欺骗”,即于他处依惯用义,以言辞行欺诳。显示巴利原文
Vañcitāññattha ruḷhena, yattha saddena vañcanā.
所谓“超越”,乃以相隔极远的用法,令人迷惑;显示巴利原文
Ukkantātibyavahita-ppayogā mohakārinī;
所谓“忘失”,是其词句之义难以通达。显示巴利原文
Siyā pamussitā yassā, dubbodhatthā padāvali.
所谓“同形”,是指通过赋予非主要意义而安立的词语。显示巴利原文
Samānarūpā’mukhyatthā-ropāhitapadā siyā;
所谓“粗涩”,是指在某种情形下,由诸缘等所生的音声。显示巴利原文
Pharusā paccayādīhi, jātasaddā kathañcipi.
所谓“计数”,是指数字在其中成为迷惑之因。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhyātā nāma saṅkhyānaṃ, yattha byāmohakāraṇaṃ;
Aññathā’bhāsate yattha, vākyattho sā pakappitā. Sā nāmantarikā yassā, nāme nānatthakappanā; Nibhūtā’vaṭṭhitaññatthā, tulyatthasutihetuto.
所谓同音词,是借所望之词的同义语而成立。显示巴利原文
Samānasaddā sā iṭṭha-saddapariyāyasādhitā;
Sammuḷhā mūḷhatāyeva, niddiṭṭhatthāpi sādhukaṃ. Yassā sambandhabāhulyā, nāmaṃ sā pārihārikī; Ekacchannā bhave byañjā-dheyyaṃ nissayagopanā. Sā bhave ubhayacchannā, yassā ubhayagopanā; Saṃkiṇṇā nāma sā yassā, nānālakkhaṇasaṅkaroti.
即便这一切在超越等方面存有过失,也不应归咎。因为这不是以‘多功德而礼敬’等混杂语句而说,而是为消除疑惑之过,依‘你的第二住处已去’等所示而作的假立。显示巴利原文
Dosattepi cesaṃ sabbesaṃ ukkantādīsu dosabhāve nāropitabbā. Esā hi ‘‘bahuguṇe paṇamati’’ccādinā vākyasaṃkiṇṇanāmena na vuttā, pakappitā ca saṃsayadosaparihārena ‘‘yāte dutiyaṃ nilaya’’nti ādinā niddiṭṭhā.
强盛者虽遭逆境而不屈,君之大觉照坚固;
护佑之主,愿您长久得胜,此法成就丰饶之果。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pabhavā’natavittiṇṇā, tavā’ṇā mahatī sati; Cirāya jayataṃ nātha, pahutaphalasādhanī’’ti.
意为“聚集”。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ samāgatā.
应亲近贤善者,他已离憍慢与垢秽;
应使到达安稳之城,他已调伏,依止自身。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhaddamevo’paseveyya, vidhūtamadakibbisaṃ; Sampāpaye puraṃ khemaṃ, sa danto’ttanisevina’’nti.
这是“欺骗”的意思。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ vañcitā.
而 pamussitā 等,应依其特征及该处的例证来理解。显示巴利原文
Pamussitādayo tu lakkhaṇānusārena, tatthodāharaṇānusārena ca veditabbā.
如此,这些由前辈师长所制定的谜语等,并非全然皆是甜美,因为无论义味还是声味,都决定没有任何可令人喜爱之处;由此,弟子们所生的厌离即是怖畏,因此,我对于他们因厌离或由此所生的怖畏而保持舍心——应如此连结理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pubbācariyehi parikappitā paheḷikā ceti etāni sabbāni ekantena niyamena na madhurāni attharasassa vā saddarasassa vā kassaci abhāvena assāditabbāni na hontīti iminā kāraṇena sissānamuppanno khedoyeva bhayaṃ tato tesaṃ khedato vā uppannabhayato mayā upekkhiyantīti sambandhanīyaṃ.
33 33. 如此,以易作与难作说明两种之后,为显示诗人的能力,并说明有利益的 yamaka,以及用于游戏消遣、排遣障碍、迷惑他人等有利益的谜语,在不说这些谜语时,指出其理由,即“yamaka”等。那个 yamaka,即如前所述的易作、难作等分类的 yamaka 类,以及谜语,即由前辈师长所指出的 samāgata 等谜语——这一切并非绝对甜美,因为可喜爱的义味或声味决然不存在,故绝对不甜美;以此理由,由于弟子厌离之怖畏,即对弟子们不能忍受的、由不能忍受所生的怖畏,我保持舍心。弟子们的厌离即是怖畏,或由弟子厌离所生的怖畏,由此作离合释。显示巴利原文
33. Evaṃ sukaradukkaravasena duvidhattaṃ vatvā kavīnaṃ sāmatthiyappakāsane sappayojanayamakānañca, kīḷāvinodane sambādhaṭṭhānasammantane parabyāmohane cāti imesu sappayojanānañca paheḷikānamavacane kāraṇaṃ niddisati ‘‘yamaka’’miccādinā. Taṃ yamakaṃ yathāvuttaṃ sukaradukkarādibhedaṃ yamakajātañca paheḷi ca pubbācariyehi niddiṭṭhā samāgabhādikā paheḷikā ca iti imāni sabbāni ekantamadhurāni na iti assādetabbassa attharasassa, saddarasassa vā niyamato abhāvā ekantena amadhurāni, iti iminā kāraṇena ca sissakhedabhayā sissānaṃ asahanasaṅkhātāya asahanena jātāya vā bhītiyā ca mayā upekkhīyanti. Sissānaṃ khedoyeva bhayaṃ, sissakhedato uppannaṃ vā bhayaṃ, tatoti viggaho.
此处的谜语应作如下理解——显示巴利原文
Ettha paheḷikā evaṃ daṭṭhabbā –
samāgatā(聚集)、vañcitā(欺骗)、ukkantā(超越)、pamussitā(忘失);
samānarūpā(同形)、pharusā(粗恶)、saṅkhyātā(计数)、pakappitā(施设);
还有 nāmantarikā(中间名)、nibbhūtā(寂灭)、paheḷikā(谜语);
以及 samānasaddā(同声)、sammuḷhā(混乱)、pārihārikī(携带)。
显示巴利原文 Samāgatā ca vañcitu-kkantā pamussitāpi ca; Samānarūpā pharusā, saṅkhyātā ca pakappitā. Athopi nāmantarikā, nibhūtā ca paheḷikā; Atho samānasaddā ca, sammuḷhā pārihārikī; Ekacchannobhayacchannā, saṃkiṇṇāti ca soḷasāti.
此中,其相如次:显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ –
若以隐密义与词之连缀,可名为‘同合’;
若借他处惯常用法而行欺瞒,此即是以言语欺瞒。
由过度夸张与间隔甚远的运用而令人迷惑者;
若某组文句其义难解,便称为“令忘失者”。
若于某处,语句的意义以另一种方式而说,此即‘假立’。
它由同义词所成,即藉由所欲表达之词的同义词而成就,名为“同音谜”。
显示巴利原文 Samāgatā nāma siyā, guḷhatthā padasandhinā; Vañcitāññattha ruḷhena, yattha saddena vañcanā. Ukkantātibyavahita-ppayogā mohakārinī; Siyā pamussitā yassā, dubbodhatthā padāvali. Samānarūpā’mukhyatthā-ropāhitapadā siyā; Pharusā paccayādīhi, jātasaddā kathañcipi. Saṅkhyātā nāma saṅkhyānaṃ, yattha byāmohakāraṇaṃ; Aññathā’bhāsate yattha, vākyattho sā pakappitā. Sā nāmantarikā yassā, nāme nānatthakappanā; Nibhūtā’vaṭṭhitaññatthā, tulyatthasutihetuto. Samānasaddā sā iṭṭha-saddapariyāyasādhitā; Sammuḷhā mūḷhatāyeva, niddiṭṭhatthāpi sādhukaṃ. Yassā sambandhabāhulyā, nāmaṃ sā pārihārikī; Ekacchannā bhave byañjā-dheyyaṃ nissayagopanā. Sā bhave ubhayacchannā, yassā ubhayagopanā; Saṃkiṇṇā nāma sā yassā, nānālakkhaṇasaṅkaroti.
此处其义为:词与词之间依连音相接,其义隐密不明,故可称为“会合”。所谓“义隐密”,即通过宣说已知者,使未知者得以会合。由此之后,能述与所述的关系亦应如此了知。若于谜语中,以他处惯用之词,依其惯用法而于他义中行欺瞒,即可称为欺瞒。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha attho – padasandhinā padānaṃ sandhānato guḷhatthā apākaṭatthā samāgatā nāma siyā. Guḷhatthāti pasiddhānuvādena apasiddhā samāgatā vidhīyate. Ito parampi anuvādānuvādyabhāvo evaṃ veditabbo. Yattha paheḷikāyaṃ aññattha ruḷhena saddena aññasmiṃ atthe pasiddhena ruḷhisaddena vañcanā vañcitā nāma siyā.
因词语运用极度间隔,从而令人迷惑,此谜语名为“超越”。若某谜语的词句序列难以解了其义、难以领悟其所指,则名为“忘失”。显示巴利原文
Atibyavahitappayogā atisayena antaritapayujjamānapadayuttā tatoyeva mohakārinī sammohakārikā paheḷikā ukkantā nāma. Yassā paheḷikāya padāvali padapanti dubbodhatthā duranubodhābhidheyyā, sā pamussitā nāma.
依某种共法,将表达主要义之词加于非主要义上而现起之词,可名为“同形”。由缘等、缘所生等,以任何方式生起的所成之词,名为“粗涩”。显示巴利原文
Amukhyatthāropāhitapadā appadhānatthe mukhyatthapakāsakasaddānaṃ kiñci sadhammaṃ nissāya āropanato upaṭṭhitapadayuttā samānarūpā nāma siyā. Paccayādīhi paccayādesādīhi kathañcipi yena kenaci pakārena jātasaddā nipphannasaddā pharusā nāma.
如果某个谜语中,虽已说出数目与计法,反而成为迷惑之因,此谜语即名为“计数谜”。如果某个谜语的整体语义以另一种方式呈现而为所解,则名为“构想谜”。显示巴利原文
Yattha yassaṃ paheḷikāyaṃ saṅkhyānaṃ gaṇanaṃ vuttamapi byāmohakāraṇaṃ hoti, sā paheḷikā saṅkhyātā nāma siyā. Yattha yassaṃ paheḷikāyaṃ vākyattho samudāyattho aññathā aññena pakārena ābhāsate viññāyate, sā pakappitā nāma.
如果某个谜语在所用名称中,能构思出多种意义、种种所指,此谜语名为“近名谜”。因使用同义词而令意义住立于他义者,名为“寂灭谜”。显示巴利原文
Yassā paheḷikāya nāme payuttābhidhāne nānatthakappanā vividhābhidheyyakappanā sambhavati, sā paheḷikā nāmantarikā nāma. Tulyatthasutihetuto samānatthasaddānaṃ payogahetuyā avaṭṭhitaññatthā patiṭṭhitaaññatthā hoti, sā nibhūtā nāma.
如果某个谜语是由所欲表达之词的同义词所构成,则名为“同音谜”。虽已善加指示其义、虽已显示其义,它却恰恰是愚痴、令人迷惑的状态,则名为“迷惑谜”。显示巴利原文
Yā paheḷikā iṭṭhasaddapariyāyasādhitā icchitatthasaddassa vevacanehi nipphāditā hoti, sā samānasaddā nāma. Sādhukaṃ niddiṭṭhatthāpi dassitaatthayuttāpiyā mūḷhatāyeva sammohabhāvatthaṃ eva bhavati, sā sammuḷhā nāma.
若某谜语的构造,在揭示名称时,因关联繁多而致名与关联的关系纷繁,则称为“周旋谜”。若某谜语通过暗示之词显明所依之义,并隐藏所依,形成对依托的守护,则称为“一隐谜”。显示巴利原文
Yassā paheḷikāya viracane nāmaṃ dassiyamānaṃ nāmaṃ sambandhabāhulyā sambandhassa bahulabhāvato bhavati, sā pārihārikī nāma. Yassā ādheyyaṃ byañja abhibyañjiya pakāsetvā nissayagopanā ādhāragutti bhavati, sā ekacchannā nāma.
若某谜语在运用中,对二者——即所依与所依之物——都加以隐藏,则称为“双隐谜”。若某谜语具有种种特征的混杂,即聚集等多种不同特征的混杂,则可称为“杂谜”。显示巴利原文
Yassā payoge ubhayagopanā ubhinnamādhārādheyyānaṃ gopanā bhavati, sā ubhayacchannā nāma. Yassā nānālakkhaṇasaṅkaro samāgatādinānāvidhalakkhaṇānaṃ saṅkaro hoti, sā saṃkiṇṇā nāma siyā.
对于聚集等谜语的特征,今应次第了知如下——显示巴利原文
Idāni samāgatādīnaṃ lakkhiyaṃ kamena evaṃ ñātabbaṃ –
从根源而现者,已降伏、已遍布者,您那伟大的教令,具念者;
愿长久胜利,主人啊,成就广大果报者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pabhavā’natavittiṇṇā, tavā’ṇā mahatī satī; Cirāya jayataṃ nātha, pahutaphalasādhinī’’ti.
此为聚集。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ samāgatā.
世尊啊,从您的根源起,已令屈伏、已遍满,以屈伏而扩展,如此显现时,犹如河流一般。‘根源’是指显著而光辉者。世尊啊,您那具念而伟大的教令,已令屈伏、已遍满,在自身已屈伏的众生中扩展,成就广大果报,出生众多利益,愿它长久以殊胜之姿胜利而住。在此,‘根源’、‘命令’、‘屈伏’等词连缀,义趣深隐。显示巴利原文
Nātha tava pabhavato paṭṭhāya natavittiṇṇā oṇatavasena patthaṭā, evaṃ sati nadī viya dissati. Pabhava pakaṭṭhatta sobhāvanta. Bho nātha tava tuyhaṃ mahatī satī mahantī samānā āṇā ānatavittiṇṇā attani natesu janesu patthaṭā pahutaphalasādhinī bahulatthanipphādanī cirāya cirakālaṃ jayataṃ ukkaṃsabhāvena pavattatu. Ettha pabhavaānataitisandhinā attho guḷho.
应亲近贤善者,已除骄慢与垢秽者;
能令到达安稳之城,那已调伏者,即是自己的依止处。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhaddamevo’paseveyya, vidhūtamadakibbisaṃ; Sampāpaye puraṃ khemaṃ, sa danto’ttanisevita’’nti.
“已除骄慢与烦恼者”,即已灭除骄慢与过恶者;“应唯亲近贤善”——于贤善种类诸象中,应唯亲近贤善种类之象,似作如是言。其义为:应唯亲近贤善者,即最上之人。若问“亲近有何义利?”于象之品中,彼已调御、已受训练之象,能令依止自我、亲近自我之人安稳无畏,达至城邑;于人之品中,已调御、已制御之圣者,则令依止自我、亲近自我之人安稳无苦,达至涅槃之城。此处,诗人以另一约定俗成之象喻之词,巧示其所欲表达之最上义,而成诳惑。显示巴利原文
Vidhūtamadakibbisaṃ vināsitamadadosaṃ bhaddameva mandapiya – bhaddajātikesu hatthīsu bhaddajātikahatthimeva upaseveyyāti vuttaṃ viya dissati. Bhaddameva uttamapurisameva seveyyāti attho. Sevanaṃ kimatthanti ce? Hatthipakkhe danto sikkhito so hatthi attanisevitaṃ attānaṃ bhajitaṃ janaṃ khemaṃ nibbhayaṃ puraṃ nagaraṃ sampāpeti. Purisapakkhe pana danto damito so ariyapuggalo attanisevitaṃ attānamupasevitaṃ janaṃ khemaṃ niddukkhaṃ puraṃ nibbānapuraṃ pāpeti. Ettha kavicchitauttamatthato aññena hatthiatthe ruḷhena saddena vañcanā nāma.
此人礼敬多功德者,纵对恶人亦复如是;
常怀欢喜,恒时随念善逝之利益。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bahuguṇe paṇamati, dujjanānaṃpyayaṃ jano; Hitaṃ pamudito niccaṃ, sugataṃ samanussara’’nti.
此段未释,其义将于下文说明。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ ukkantā. Imassattho upari āgamissati.
虽有过失混杂之嫌,但因嵌入谜语,此释亦为允当。如偈云:“此中嵌入谜语,非因嗔恚与秽。”此处关联词语因未置其位而彼此相隔。显示巴利原文
Byākiṇṇadosatte satipi paheḷikāruḷhattā esā iṭṭhā. Vuttañhi ‘‘paheḷikāyamāruḷhā, na hi duṭṭhā kiliṭṭhatā’’ti. Iha sambandhīpadānaṃ aṭṭhānaṭṭhāpanena byavahitattaṃ hoti.
口衔鲜花,藤蔓为饰,胸乳高耸;
身着破旧之衣的男子最为殊胜,那羞怯的女子佩戴着此口花。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mukhaphullaṃ giṅgamakaṃ, niyuruggatthanunnataṃ; Paṭaccarī varaṃ poso, bhīruyā dhārayantiyā’’ti.
这是‘遗忘’一词的释义。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pamussitā.
所谓“口花”,即名为藤蔓等印记的装饰物;“niyura”指环,“uggatthana”指乳房部位,“unnata”指额头部位等。这句偈颂在说:佩戴口部上方饰物的羞怯女子,以及身着旧衣的男子,才是最为殊胜。此处因用了大量不必要的词语进行修饰,使得义理难以理解。显示巴利原文
Mukhaphullaṃ tilakādiṃ giṅgamakaṃ evaṃnāmakaṃ pasādhanaṃ niyuruggatthanunnataṃ niyuraṃ valayaṃ, uggatthanaṃ payodharapaṭaṃ, unnataṃ nalāṭapaṭādikaṃ, mukhato unnatābharaṇañca dhārayantiyā bhīruyā itthiyā paṭaccarī jiṇṇavatthanivāsī poso puriso varaṃ uttamo. Ettha bahupayogarahitehi saddehi racitattā atthassa duravabodhatā.
于九种殊胜宝中,显现宝之形相;
此处人有八种,第八为不共,其余为共。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nava’ggaratanāna’smiṃ, dissanti ratanākare; Purisānettha aṭṭhannaṃ, aṭṭhā’sādhāraṇā’para’’nti.
此即同义之释。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ samānarūpā.
在此宝藏中显现九种最上之宝。其中,八种宝为八种人所不共,另一种宝则为共。这九种出世间法,依‘受尊重’等义而称为‘宝’;它们的生源——正自觉者,则称为‘宝藏’。如是,于非主要义中安立‘宝’等词。显示巴利原文
Asmiṃ ratanākare aggaratanāni nava dissanti, ettha imesu ratanesu aṭṭha ratanāni aṭṭhannaṃ purisānaṃ asādhāraṇāni, aparaṃ ratanaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ. Imāni nava lokuttarāni cittīkatādiatthena ‘‘ratanānī’’ti ca tappabhavo sammāsambuddho ‘‘ākaro’’ti ca kappitoti amukhyatthesu ratanādisaddānamāropanaṃ hoti.
天与乾闼婆,于雪山大地获得;
七处甘味之湖,持布萨的龙亦不得享用。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vindanti devagandhabbā, himavantamahātale; Rasavante sare satta, na nāgāpi uposathā’’ti.
在喜马拉雅大地、喜马拉雅山顶,天人与乾闼婆得以享用、受用阿耨达池等七处甘美澄净之湖,而持布萨的龙亦不得享用。此为另一层含义。在喜马拉雅大地上,月光照耀的大宫殿平台处,嬉戏的乾闼婆们得以享用维那琴六声等七种甘美悦耳之音,而龙、圣者、持布萨者、安住布萨者,皆不得享用、不得体验。此处‘天’指能嬉戏者。他们具足‘布萨’,故称‘持布萨者’,此为词释。随顺特征次第与公认惯用,缘等所生之词,以某种方式而有存在义。显示巴利原文
Himavantamahātale himālayassa matthake rasavante sodake satta sare anotattādike devagandhabbā vindanti sevanti, uposathā nāgāpi na vindanti. Ayamaparattho. Himavantamahātale candaraṃsiyutte mahāpāsādatale devagandhabbā kīḷamānā gandhabbā rasavante madhuraguṇayutte satta sare vīṇāya chajjādike satta sare vindanti, nāgāpi ariyāpi uposathāpi upavutthāpi na vindanti nānubhavanti. Ettha dibbantīti devā. Uposatho etesamatthīti uposathāti viggaho. Lakkhaṇakkamato pasiddhapacurapayogato aññadatthā yena kenaci lesena paccayādīnaṃ jātasaddassa atthitā.
歌声中的音,两两成对;于六音阶中,除六音外尚有二音;
犹如眼具有五色,鼻亦然,具有六色。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Gītasadde sarā dve dve, dve chajjaññatra chassarā; Pañcavaṇṇaṃ yathā cakkhu, chabbaṇṇā nāsikā tathā’’ti.
这是依数目而言的。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ saṅkhyātā.
歌声中的音有二种,在六声音阶中除去六音之后,有:牛音、犍陀罗音、中音、第五音、天音、尼沙陀音。此处成对各有二音,合为六音具足。如同眼有五色,鼻有六色;因歌声中有‘ī’音与‘a’音二音存在,且除去六音后,牛音等具有三种性质,故依音与辅音而有五色,称为“眼”;因有六种,称为“鼻”,如此而说。此处所说数字、歌声等词的确义,是令人迷惑的。显示巴利原文
Gītasadde sarā dve honti, chajja’ññatra chajjato aññatra chajjaṃ vajjetvā usabho gandhāro majjhimo pañcamo dhevato nisādoti. Ettha yugaḷato dve dve chassarā chasaravanto. Yathā cakkhu pañcavaṇṇaṃ hoti, tathā evaṃ nāsikā chabbaṇṇā hoti, gītasadde īkāraakārasaradvayasabbhāvato ca chajjaṃ ṭhapetvā usabhādīsu sarānaṃ tividhattā ca ‘‘cakkhū’’ti sarabyañjanavasena pañcavaṇṇānaṃ sabbhāvato ca ‘‘nāsikā’’ti channaṃ sabbhāvato ca evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha vuttasaṅkhyāgītādisaddasanniṭṭhānato sammohakārinī hoti.
愿那升起的具祥瑞之王,红色圆轮,保护你们;
他与自己的星宿、行星、刹帝利众相联结,具足妙相。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pātu vo udito rājā, sirimā rattamaṇḍalo; Sakantigahanakkhatta-saṅghayutto sulakkhaṇo’’ti.
此是施设所立。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pakappitā.
“具祥瑞”:具足祥瑞;“有红色圆轮”:拥有随顺的国土轮,或拥有随顺的大臣轮;“与自己的星宿、行星、刹帝利众相联结”:与自己附近密集而不疏远的刹帝利众、刹帝利集团相联结、相结合;“具足妙相”:具备卓越的人相;“已升起”:著名;王即人主,愿他保护你们——此非其本意。或者,“具祥瑞”因说为“吉祥的住处”故具祥瑞;“有红色圆轮”:升起时出现红色圆轮;“与自己的星宿、行星、刹帝利众相联结”:与具光耀的星宿、行星群相联结;“具足妙相”:具有善妙的兔相;“已升起”:已上升;王即月亮,愿他保护你们——以此语将双方共通的功德与功德主一并涵摄,于此句义显现为别。显示巴利原文
Sirimā sirimanto rattamaṇḍalo anurattajanapadamaṇḍalo, anurattaamaccamaṇḍalo vā sakantigahanakkhattasaṅghayutto sakassa attano ante samīpe gahanehi aviraḷehi khattasaṅghehi khattiyasamūhehi yutto saṃyutto sulakkhaṇo pasatthapurisalakkhaṇo udito pasiddho rājā narindo vo tumhe pātu rakkhatūti ayaṃ anadhippetattho. Sirimā ‘‘lakkhiyā vāsaṭṭhānattā’’ti vuttattā sirimanto rattamaṇḍalo uggamane rattamaṇḍalo sakantigahanakkhattasaṅghayutto kantisahitehi gahanakkhattatāragaṇehi yutto sulakkhaṇo suṭṭhu sasalakkhaṇo udito uggato rājā cando vo tumhe pātūti ubhayapakkhassa sādhāraṇaguṇaguṇīpadapariggahena idha vākyatthassa aññathā dissamānatā hoti.
所谓“阿多”等,是指仙人,唯一无二,具有大恩惠。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vuccatā’do isitye’ko, sumahantopakāravā;
Sanātano ca na isi, na sakhā na sanātano’’ti.
这是无间隔的。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ nāmantarikā.
有一位“最初者”,先前被称为“仙人”,他具有极大的帮助、具备极大的助益,且是恒常、永恒的。然而他却既不是仙人,也不是朋友,亦非恒常者——这是所要表达的意义。那极大、极宏大的“最初者”,在名称最初被称为“仙人”,在中间具有帮助,以某种方式具备,且是恒常、永恒的,但他却非仙人,非朋友,亦非“永恒者”,因为缺少那两个音节。由于说到了初与中,故可知为“终”,应取“仙人堕处精舍”之义。在那里,以“仙人堕处”之名,因仙人等所要表达的意义,而有多种意义的施设。显示巴利原文
Eko ādo pubbe ‘‘isī’’ti vuccati, sumahantopakāravā atimahantopakārasamannāgato sanātano ca sassato ca hoti, tathāpi na isi isi nāma na hoti, na sakhā mittopi na hoti, na sanātano sassatopi na hoti, ayaṃ gamyamānattho. Sumahā atimahanto eko ādo nāmādimhi isīti vuccati, anto majjhe pakāravā pa-kārena samannāgato, sanātano ca sassato ca hoti, isipi nāma na hoti, mittopi na hoti, so nātano tanaiti akkharadvayarahito na hoti. Ādimajjhānaṃ vuttattā anteti ñāyati, ‘‘isipatanavihāro’’ti gahetabbaṃ. Tattha isipatananāmena isiādīnaṃ gamyamānatthattā nānatthakappanā hoti.
从升起便奔向沉落,片刻也不回转;
这不是月轮,也不是日轮。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dhāvantaṃ udayā atthaṃ, muhuttaṃ na nivattati; Na candamaṇḍalaṃ etaṃ, nāpi ādiccamaṇḍala’’nti.
从升起──即从结生开始,奔向沉落,直至沉落──即直至死亡,疾速奔驰,刹那片刻,亦不回旋,亦不复返。此处所指,并非月轮,亦非日轮。所谓“奔驰”,因寿命作用的义涵,与寿命、月亮等及其能显了他们的音声有共通性,故此处有住立于月亮等及其他意义的可能。显示巴利原文
Udayā udayato pabhuti atthaṃ yāva atthaṃ dhāvantaṃ javantaṃ muhuttaṃ muhuttakālaṃ na nivattati na punāvattati. Etaṃ candamaṇḍalampi na hoti, ādiccamaṇḍalampi na hoti. Udayā paṭisandhito atthaṃ yāvacuti. Dhāvantanti āyukiccato āyucandādīnamatthānaṃ, tappakāsakasaddānañca tulyattā ettha patiṭṭhitacandādiatthantarānaṃ sambhavo.
舍弃了名为“吉蒂摩希”的王后,以及名为“迦罗罗他”的都城;
那位坚毅者虽正在建造名为“优耶摩”的园林,却已不再忆念。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Deviṃ kittimahīnāmaṃ, kaḷāratthavhayaṃ puriṃ; Hitvā na sari so dhīro, karontopyu’yyamavhaya’’nti .
这是同音词。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ samānasaddā.
名为“吉蒂摩希”的王后,即具足“吉蒂”与“摩希”二名的第一王后,以及名为“迦罗罗他”的城市,即具足“迦罗罗”与“阿他”二名的城市,那位坚毅者悉皆舍弃、断除之后,虽营建名为“优耶摩”的园林,却不再忆念荣华,不再追念。大士舍弃了耶输陀罗王后与迦毗罗卫城,从事名为精进的努力,不再忆念荣华。此处,所意指的耶输陀罗等名称,是以“吉蒂摩希”等同义词而施设的。显示巴利原文
Kittimahīnāmaṃ kittimahīnaṃ dvinnaṃ nāmena samannāgataṃ deviṃ aggamahesiṃ kaḷāratthavhayaṃ puriṃ kaḷāraatthānaṃ dvinnaṃ nāmena samannāgataṃ puriṃ nagarañca so dhīro hitvā pariccajitvā uyyamavhayaṃ uyyamanāmena samannāgataṃ karonto api na sari sampattiṃ nānusari, yasodharādeviñca kapilavatthupuriñca hitvā vīriyasaṅkhātapadhānaṃ karonto mahāsatto sampattiṃ na sari, etthābhimatayasodharādisaddānaṃ pariyāyehi kittimahīsaddādīhi racitatā.
四面束以系缚,四匹信度马自然安立;
它们自在食用放在中间的草。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Catuddisāmukhā bandhā, cattāro sindhavā sayaṃ; Paribhuñjanti nikkhittaṃ, tiṇaṃ majjhe yathāsukha’’nti.
这是一种混淆。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ sammuḷhā.
四匹信度马被拴成面朝四方的姿态。它们自在食用放在中间的草,看起来像是彼此背对背被拴着,但实际上却是面朝面被拴的。这里,由于被表述为“面朝四方被拴”,却说是背对背被拴,因此产生了混淆。显示巴利原文
Sindhavā cattāro assā catuddisāmukhā yathā catuddisāsammukhā honti, tathā bandhā majjhe nikkhittaṃ tiṇaṃ sayaṃ yathāsukhaṃ paribhuñjanti, aññamaññaṃ piṭṭhiṃ katvā bandhā viya khāyati, te pana sammukhaṃ katvā bandhā honti. Ettha ‘‘catuddisāmukhābandhā’’ti niddiṭṭhattā piṭṭhiṃ katvā bandhāti sammuḷhatā hoti.
众人恭敬于令水中莲花喜悦的太阳之亲族——正自觉者之所说,
即证得不善法灭尽为行境的道果。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Jano jīvanajānanda-karabandhussa bhāsitaṃ; Sakkarontova pappoti, puññārikkhayagocare’’ti.
此为摄益(pārihārikī)的解释。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pārihārikī.
对于“令水中所生莲花喜悦者、太阳的亲族”——即正自觉者——的所说,众人恭敬供养,以此证得道果;此道果以不善法之灭尽为行境。所谓不善法,即善法的敌对者,故称为“善敌”;那是以善敌的灭尽为相、以涅槃为所缘而生起的道果。这里,以“令水中所生者喜悦者、太阳的亲族”以及“以善敌灭尽为相、为所缘而转起”的方式,佛陀与道果因传承上的关联而被述说,所以有广泛的关联。显示巴利原文
Jīvanajānandakarabandhussa jīvanato udakato jātānaṃ padumānaṃ ānandakarassa sūriyassa bandhussa sammāsambuddhassa bhāsitaṃ vacanaṃ sakkaronto pūjento jano puññārikkhayagocare puññānaṃ paṭipakkhattā puññārisaṅkhātānaṃ akusalānaṃ khayassa nimittabhūtaṃ nibbānamārammaṇaṃ katvā uppanne maggaphale pappoti pāpuṇāti. Ettha jīvanajānaṃ ānandakarassa bandhusseti ca, puññārīnaṃ khayanimittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavatteti ca iminā buddho maggaphalā ca pārampariyena sambandhena vuttāti sambandhānaṃ bāhullabhāvo.
既不执取宏大之声,亦不执取装饰;
任何四足有情的这只耳朵,据说并非无果。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na gaṇhāti mahantampi, saddaṃ na ca vibhūsanaṃ; Catuppadassa kassāpi, kaṇṇoyaṃ na kilāphalo’’ti.
这说明的是“单一覆盖”(ekacchannā)。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ ekacchannā.
任何四足动物的耳朵,既不能执取巨大的声音,不以之为所缘,也不能执取装饰。然而,这耳朵据说并非无果,亦即并非不起作用。Assakaṇṇo 是一种树。在此,以“耳”为所安立,而由于未提及其所依处,故为“依止摄”(nissayagutti)。显示巴利原文
Kassāpi catuppadassa kaṇṇo mahantampi saddaṃ na gaṇhāti, ārammaṇaṃ na karoti, vibhūsanampi na gaṇhāti. Tathāpi ayaṃ kaṇṇo aphalo na kila, saphalato nipphalo na hoti kira. Assakaṇṇo rukkho. Ettha kaṇṇoti ādheyyaṃ katvā tadādhārassa avacanato nissayagutti.
庄严世间者,具足光辉,连同天界;
于何水中生、长,谁不被水所染污?
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Alaṅkaronto bhuvanaṃ, sassiriko sadevakaṃ; Kasmiṃ sañjātasaṃvaddho, ko kena nupalimpatī’’ti.
此名为双盖。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ ubhayacchannā.
具祥瑞者,庄严含天众之世间,看似如佛。世间即名为世间之水,常庄严彼水者,即具祥瑞、具吉祥者。于何水中生、长,谁、哪一个,不被水所染污、不沾染?答曰:莲花。莲花实为阳性和中性词。此处因水与莲花二者皆被覆盖,故称双盖。显示巴利原文
Sassiriko sadevakaṃ bhuvanaṃ alaṅkarontoti buddho viya khāyati. Bhuvanaṃ bhuvanasaṅkhātaṃ kaṃ jalaṃ sadā eva alaṅkaronto sassiriko lakkhiyasamannāgato kasmiṃ jale sañjātasaṃvaddho ko kataro kena jalena na upalimpati na limpati. Padumoti visajjanaṃ. Padumo hi puṃnapuṃsakaliṅgo. Iha jalapadumānaṃ dvinnampi chāditattā ubhayacchannā nāma.
最初者即是最终者,中间者即是中间之始;
于结论等中现行者,说为‘非造作句’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ādo soyeva yo ante, majjhimassādi majjhimo; Siddhantādīsu vattantaṃ, asaṅkhatapadaṃ vadā’’ti.
此为混杂式。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ saṃkiṇṇā.
处于末尾者,即是起始者;作为中间之起始的中间者,即是中间本身。已成就、已圆满者,于诸圣者中运行的非造作之句,请说、请讲述——这是另一层含义。在初始处,彼‘so’字即是末尾之‘yo’字;中间者、中间音,即是中间词首的‘m’字;在结论等、宗义时间等中运行,以能诠的方式转起,是非造作之句,因与造作不同,故为非造作之施设,请说、请讲述。盖‘时’一词只是名称施设。这里以‘结论’一词含摄‘起始’等词,故得‘他们’之义;因含义隐秘,且具‘会合相’,故被‘so’、‘yo’、‘非造作之句’等他处通用之词所惑,是为‘欺诳相’;又因于‘时’一词中施设多种义,故为‘非名之近时相’——如此具足三相。其余诸处亦应知为混杂。于各各处,依所说之相,应知‘会合’等之随义命名。显示巴利原文
Ante avasāne yo hoti, ādopi soyeva hoti, majjhimassa ādibhūto majjhimo eva hoti, siddhaṃ nipphannaṃ tādīsu ariyesu vattantaṃ asaṅkhatapadaṃ vada kathehīti ayamaparattho. Ādo ādimhi soyeva sakāro eva ante pariyosāne yo yakāroyeva, majjhimo majjhimavaṇṇo majjhimassa saddassa ādi makāro, siddhantādīsu matasamayakālādīsu vattantaṃ vācakabhāvena pavattantaṃ asaṅkhatapadaṃ saṅkhatato aññattā asaṅkhatabhūtaṃ paññattiṃ vada kathehīti. Samayasaddo hi nāmapaññatti. Ettha siddhantasaddena ādisaddassa saṅgahitattā tādiattho labbhatīti atthassa guḷhatāya samāgatālakkhaṇena ca ‘‘so’’ti ‘‘yo’’ti ‘‘asaṅkhatapada’’nti aññattharuḷhasaddena vañcitattā vañcitālakkhaṇena ca samayasadde nānatthakappanato nāmantarikālakkhaṇena cāti tīhipi lakkhaṇehi missitoti. Sesesupi saṃkiṇṇattaṃ evameva veditabbaṃ. Tattha tattha vuttalakkhaṇānusāreneva samāgatādīnaṃ anvatthasaññatā veditabbā.
凡与处所、时、技艺、世间、理则、圣教相违者,
彼即是相违之句,由例证即可明了。
显示巴利原文 Desakālakalāloka-ñāyāgamavirodhi yaṃ; Taṃ virodhipadaṃ ce’ta-mudāharaṇato phuṭaṃ.
34 三十四、“处”等。处指陆地、水域等处所。时即昼夜。艺指舞蹈、歌唱等。世指情与无情之世间流转。理即正理。教于此指佛语,于他处则为闻持与法之摄集。若与这些有违,则称为处……乃至……相违。Yaṃ 指随说之后。彼相违句即为如此确立。而此句由譬例与所诠而显明:何以故?水生之物现于陆地等处,应在夜间而有之花等现于白昼等;又“舞蹈歌唱等六十四艺中,名为断六者即七音”等,与艺论所说之间有逾越界限之相违;又“火是冷,旃檀无坚实”等,逾越世间之界限;又对不应有、不可能有之事起执,成立睡眠有色身性等,即与理则相违;又各各与自教相违——凡此种种皆显而易见,故一切此类皆不复举例,此为意趣所在。显示巴利原文
34.‘‘Desi’’ccādi. Deso thalajaladesādi. Kālo rattindivo. Kalā naccagītādayo. Loko carācarabhūtappavatti. Ñāyo yutti. Āgamo idha buddhavacanaṃ. Aññattha tu sutidhammasaṃhitā, te ca. Tehi virodho assa atthīti desa…pe… virodhi. Yanti anuvaditvā. Taṃ virodhipadanti vidhīyate. Etañca padaṃ udāharaṇato lakkhiyato phuṭaṃ pākaṭaṃ. Yato jalajādīnaṃ thalādīsu pātubhāvādi, ratyādīsu sambhavantānaṃ kusumādīnaṃ divādīsu sambhavo ca, ‘‘naccagītādicatusaṭṭhiyā kalāsu bhinnachajjo nāma sattasaro’’tiādinā kalāsatthābhihitalakkhaṇātikkamavirodho ca, ‘‘aggisītalo, nissāro khadiro’’tiādinā lokasīmātikkamo ca, vuttāyapā’naruppattasamuppattiyā middhassa rūpabhāvāpādanādiñāyavirodho ca, yathāsakamāgamena virodho ca sukhena ca sakkā pākaṭattā viññātuṃ, tato sabbametaṃ nodāhaṭanti adhippāyo.
34 三十四、如是说明了不见双关、谜语等之原因后,今依开示次第,以“处时”等说随至之相违过:若句,处即陆地、水域、山岳等。时即昼夜,依冬季等为三种,依春季等为六种。艺即舞蹈、歌唱等六十四种。世即所谓静止与移动之有情流转。理即正理。教于此指佛语,于他处则为闻持与法之摄集。若与这些有违,则为处……乃至……相违。彼即名为相违句。此相违句由譬例与所诠而显明照然:雨期开放之素馨等本具水生性,莲花、睡莲等本具陆生性,却互现非处;应于夜间得见的睡莲等现于昼间等;又于舞蹈歌唱等六十四艺中,所示七音之一分“断六、牛、香、中、五、天、尼”中,断六者名为断七音——以总聚而施设等,为论典所摄,是逾越界限之相;又“火是冷,旃檀是热,槭树无坚实,蓖麻有坚实”等,是逾越世间界限之说;又对睡眠之无色性生起,却说成立色身性,类似与理则相违之说;又逾越各各自教而说——因一切相违之自性皆显明易了,故不再举例,此为意趣所在。然而,这些处等相违者之非相违性,即于对治此相违句过中,以“由菩萨威力”等而可得见。若处于处……等……教有违,则彼有此过,故为处……乃至……相违。于贬斥中,彼有此过,此是所欲说之义。显示巴利原文
34. Evaṃ yamakapaheḷikānamadassane kāraṇaṃ vatvā idāni uddesakkamena sampattavirodhidosaṃ ‘‘desakāli’’ccādinā vadati. Yaṃ padaṃ deso thalajalapabbatādi. Kālo rattindivo hemantādivasena tividho, vasantādivasena chabbidho. Kalā naccagītādicatusaṭṭhi. Loko thāvarajaṅgamabhūtapavattisaṅkhāto. Ñāyo yutti. Āgamo iha buddhavacanaṃ, aññattha pana sutidhammasaṃhito ca. Tehi virodho assa atthīti desa…pe… virodhi. Taṃ virodhipadaṃ nāma. Etaṃ virodhipadaṃ udāharaṇato lakkhiyato phuṭaṃ paribyattaṃ. Vassikajātisumanādīnaṃ jalajādibhāvo ca, padumakumudādīnaṃ thalajādibhāvo ca, rattiādīsu labbhamānānaṃ kumudādīnaṃ divādīsu sambhavo ca, naccagītādicatusaṭṭhiyā kalāsu ‘‘chajjo usabho gandhāro majjhimo pañcamo dhevato nisādo’’ti dassitasattasarānamekadesassa chajjassa bhinnasattasaro chajjo nāmāti samudāyavasena vohārakaraṇādīhi satthāgatataṃ, lakkhaṇātikkamañca, ‘‘aggi sītalo, candanaṃ uṇhaṃ, khadirarukkho nissāro, eraṇḍo sasāro’’ iccādinā lokamariyādātikkamo ca, middhassa arūpabhāvupapattiyā vuttāyapi rūpabhāvasādhanasadisayuttivirodhikathanañca, yathāsakamāgamamatikkamma kathanañcāti sabbesaṃ viruddhasabhāvassa pākaṭattā udāharaṇaṃ na dassayissāmāti adhippāyo. Imesameva desādivirodhīnamaviruddhattaṃ ettheva virodhipadadosaparihāre ‘‘bodhisattappabhāvenā’’ticcādinā dissati. Desa…pe… gamehi virodho, so assa atthīti desa…pe… virodhi. Nindāyaṃ ayamassatthīti vivacchitā.
凡未达、未了而应说之义,智者称彼为“应引导者”;
譬如在夜间,一切方所光明照耀。
显示巴利原文 Ya’dappatīta’mānīya, vattabbaṃ neyyamāhu taṃ; Yathā sabbāpi dhavalā, disā rocanti rattiyaṃ.
35 “Ya”m 等。Appatīta 是指从音声或意义上未被了知、未被通达;由于不存在其他经典,故不会以他途理解。因为后文将说:“超越音声与词力之通达,实为难得。”凡是必须引来加以说明的词语,即称为 neyya。举例而言:“一切方所,即所有十方,在夜间明亮照耀。”在此所述之中,月光等即属于 neyya。显示巴利原文
35.‘‘Ya’’miccādi. Appatītaṃ saddato, atthato vā anadhigataṃ nahyaññathāvagamo ganthantarābhāvato. Vakkhati hi ‘‘dullabhāvagatī sadda-sāmatthiyavilaṅghinī’’ti. Yaṃ kiñci padaṃ samānīya ānetvā vattabbaṃ, taṃ neyyamāhu. Yathetyudāharati. Sabbāpi sakalāpi disā pubbadisādayo dasa disā rattiyaṃ rajanyaṃ dhavalā ujjalā rocanti dippantīti ettake niddiṭṭhe candamarīcino ettha neyyattaṃ.
35 三十五。现在以“Ya”m 等语举示 neyya 的过失之例。凡一词语,若未通过另一词语或其所述之义被明了——即不知“这是何义”——而须引来另一词语加以说明,正因如此须引来另一词语,古德便称此为 neyya,即“neyya 过失”。例如:“一切方所皆明亮,于夜间照耀。”一切方所即东方等十方;明亮即白色,于夜间照耀。在此,作为方所简别语的“明亮”这一性质,究竟从何而来?譬如从雪山之巅、白壁、月光等而来。由于未加说明,为排除其他可能,须引来表示月光等的词语,说明“由此而有明亮”。因此,“明亮”一词便为 neyya 过失所染。Patīta 意为明了,na patīta 即不明了。此中的“a”是否定语素。显示巴利原文
35. Idāni neyyadosamudāharati ‘‘ya’’miccādinā. Yaṃ padaṃ appatītaṃ padantarena, tenābhihitatthena vā ‘‘imassatthoya’’miti aviññātaṃ ānīya vattabbaṃ, tatoyeva padantaramānīya vattabbaṃ hoti, taṃ neyyamāhu ‘‘neyyadoso’’ti porāṇā āhu. Yathā tatthodāharaṇamīdisaṃ ‘‘sabbāpi dhavalā disā rocanti rattiya’’nti. Sabbāpi disā pubbadakkhiṇādayo dasa disā dhavalā setā rattiyaṃ rajanyaṃ rocanti dippanti. Ettha disāya visesanaṃ dhavalaguṇaṃ kelāsakūṭasudhābhitticandaraṃsiādīsu kuto sañjātamiti anicchitattā aññanivattanatthaṃ candakiraṇādivācakapadaṃ ānetvā dhavalatā imineti vattabbattā dhavala padaṃ neyyadosena duṭṭhaṃ hoti. Patītaṃ viññātaṃ, na patītaṃ appatītaṃ. Ettha akāro pasajjapaṭisedhe.
Nedisaṃ bahu maññanti, sabbe sabbattha viññuno; Dullabhā’vagatī sadda-sāmatthiyavilaṅghinī.
36 三十六。为表明“智者不认可不明了之词”,而说“ne”等语。对于前文所述那类可引导的言辞,一切知义之智者,于一切如偈颂等文体中,皆不以为然、不尊重、不采用。若问为何不以为然?则答“dullabhā”等语。的确,所谓通达,即是领悟其义;若超越了能诠之声与理则,便会舍弃、不显现,所以说“超越声音与能力之通达”实为难得,不可得。无论是依理则所得之义,还是依声音所得之义,若不是真实之义,仅凭住于作者心中,并不能使其成为明了之义。因此,应知可从声音或理则上明了者,方为可明了之义;反之,则为需引导之义。显示巴利原文
36. Appatītaṃ nicchanti viññūti dassetumāha ‘‘ne’’tiādi. Īdisaṃ anantare vuttappakāraṃ neyyaṃ sabbepi viññuno ñeyyavidū sabbattha gajjādike na bahu maññanti na sambhāventi nappayujjanti. Kiṃ na bahumaññantīti ce āha ‘‘dullabhā’’tiādi. Tathā hi avagatī atthāvagamo saddaṃ vācakaṃ, sāmatthiyañca ñāyaṃ vilaṅghayati cajati anupadassanatoti saddasāmatthiyavilaṅghinī dullabhā na labhyate. Ñāyopattho vā saddopattho vā yottho na hoti. So nappatīyate yathā manasi avaṭṭhitamattenāti attho. Tasmā saddato, atthato vā patītabbamaneyyaṃ, tabbiparītaṃ neyyanti viññeyyaṃ.
36 为表明此难以通达的词句不为智者所认可,而宣说“nedisaṃ”等语。如此前所述之neyya,一切智者于一切处所,如偈颂等中,皆不多加推崇、不予以重视、不加以运用。通达,即是对义理彻悟,它超越音声与功用,即超越名为音声的能诠与名为功用的理则而转起,因无此类用法的先例,故而难得。凡非由音声所得、亦非由理则所得之义,仅依作者心意而住,不能成为明了。故此词即是neyya之过失,一切诗人皆应避免,此为意旨所在。“多以为”即多作尊重,句中“bahumaññanti”是名词性的动词。因它超越了音声与功用,故为“超越音声与功用”。显示巴利原文
36. Imaṃ appatītapadaṃ viññūhi nābhimatanti dassento āha ‘‘nedisa’’miccādi. Īdisaṃ yathāvuttappakāraṃ neyyaṃ sabbe viññuno sabbattha gajjapajjādike na bahu maññanti na sambhāventi nappayojenti. Avagatī atthāvabodho saddasāmatthiyavilaṅghinī saddasaṅkhātavācakañca sāmatthiyasaṅkhātañāyañca atikkamma pavattinī dullabhā tādisapayogābhāvato dullabhā hoti. Yo attho saddāgato, ñāyāgato vā na hoti, so kattuno manasi patiṭṭhitamattena patīto na hotīti taṃ padaṃ neyyadosamiti sabbe kavino pariharantīti adhippāyo. Bahumānaṃ karontīti vākye bahumaññantīti nāmadhātu. Saddasāmatthiyaṃ vilaṅghayati sīlenāti saddasāmatthiyavilaṅghinī.
或有所待,需要简别语加以限定;
凡是获得那简别语的,
它便是有意义的,正如那样。
显示巴利原文 Siyā visesanāpekkhaṃ, Yaṃ taṃ patvā visesanaṃ; Sātthakaṃ taṃ yathā taṃ so, Bhiyyo passati cakkhunā.
37 三十七。“Siyā”等。任何词句,一旦带上修饰语而与意义共同转起,便是具有意义的;若无修饰语,则仅仅表达所说的意义。它或许仍需要修饰语。以“taṃ yathā”等举例。当说出“看见”时,自然可得“以眼”。显示巴利原文
37.‘‘Siyā’’iccādi. Yaṃ padaṃ visesanaṃ patvā atthena saha vattatīti sātthakaṃ. Nibbisesanantu vuttatthameva hoti. Taṃ visesanāpekkhaṃ siyā. ‘‘Taṃ yathe’’tyādinā udāharati. ‘‘Passatī’’ti vutte ‘‘cakkhunā’’ti labbhateva.
37 【若为】等语。若一词,得限定语时具义、与义理相应,无彼时则无义,此可名为“观待限定语”者。此如其所举例:“彼人以眼更见彼人。”彼人以眼更多、更频见彼人。此处,但说“见”时,即知是“以眼”。“眼”此所限之词,正因得限定语而具义。因其“观待于限定语”,且“与义俱存时方具义”,故如是复合。显示巴利原文
37.‘‘Siyā’’miccādi. Yaṃ padaṃ visesanaṃ patvā sātthakaṃ atthasahitaṃ, tadabhāve niratthakaṃ hoti, taṃ visesanāpekkhaṃ nāma siyā. Taṃ yathā tassodāharaṇamevaṃ ‘‘taṃ so bhiyyo passati cakkhunā’’ti. So puriso taṃ purisaṃ bhiyyo yebhuyyasā cakkhunā passati. Ettha ‘‘passatī’’ti vutteyeva ‘‘cakkhunā’’ti ñāyati. Cakkhunāti visesyapadaṃ visesanaṃ laddhāva sātthakaṃ hoti. Visesane apekkhā assāti ca, saha atthena vattamānaṃ sātthakamiti ca samāso.
若一词令所限者转劣,彼即为“劣义”,如下例:
萤火之光隐没,日轮升于空中。
显示巴利原文 Hīnaṃ kare visesyaṃ yaṃ, taṃ hīnatthaṃ bhave yathā; Nippabhīkatakhajjoto, samudeti divākaro.
38 “劣”等:若某个限定词使被限定者,即应被限定的事物变得低劣、下劣,则该限定词可称为“劣义”,即其意义为低劣者。举例如下:“萤火虫被夺去光芒,太阳升起”,意思是:萤火虫的光芒被夺去,由此太阳——光芒之作者——升起。此处所说萤火虫光芒被夺去,并非对太阳的赞美。显示巴利原文
38.‘‘Hīna’’miccādi . Yaṃ visesanapadaṃ visesyaṃ visesitabbaṃ hīnaṃ lāmakaṃ kare kareyya, taṃ visesanapadaṃ hīnatthaṃ hīno attho yassa taṃ hīnatthaṃ nāma bhaveyya. ‘‘Yathā’’ityādinā udāharati. Nippabhīkato khajjoto yena so divākaro pabhākaro samudeti upagacchatīti. Ettha khajjotappabhāpaharaṇe na thuti divākarassāti.
38 “使低劣”等:若某个词使被限定者变得低劣,它便成为“劣义”。例如其用例:“萤火虫被夺去光芒,太阳升起”。萤火虫被剥夺了光芒,由此太阳——即日轮——升起、上升。以“萤火虫被夺去光芒”这一限定语,显示对那仅有微弱光芒的萤火虫的压制,实则是对具有千道光芒的太阳的贬斥,而非赞美;因此,被限定者成为劣义。其复合词解析为:“义为低劣者”、“无光芒者”、“被夺光芒”、“萤火虫被夺光芒,由此……”。显示巴利原文
38.‘‘Hīnaṃ kare’’ccādi. Yaṃ padaṃ visesyaṃ hīnaṃ karoti, taṃ hīnatthaṃ bhave. Yathā tatthodāharaṇamevaṃ ‘‘nippabhīkatakhajjoto, samudeti divākaro’’ti. Pabhārahitakatā khajjotā yena so divākaro sūriyo samudeti uggacchati. ‘‘Nippabhīkatakhajjoto’’ti iminā visesanena lāmakālokaladdhayuttassa khajjopanakassa abhibhavanappakāsanaṃ sahassaraṃsino nindāyeva, na thutīti visesyaṃ hīnatthaṃ hoti. Hīno attho yasseti ca, natthi pabhā etesanti ca, nippabhā katāti ca, nippabhīkatā khajjotā yenāti ca viggaho.
Pādapūraṇamattaṃ yaṃ, anatthamiti taṃ mataṃ; Yathā hi vande buddhassa, pādapaṅkeruhampica.
39 39. hi、api、ca等词仅为填充诗行,故无实义。此即限定词与被限定词的过失。显示巴利原文
39.Hi api casaddānaṃ pādapūraṇamattattā anatthakattaṃ. Visesanavisesyapadadoso.
39 ‘填充诗行’等:若某词仅为填充诗行——即仅为填足第四音步,则被视作‘无义’。‘如’字表示前文所述之义。‘礼敬佛陀的足莲’即礼敬佛陀的莲花足。此处,hi、api、ca等词因不适用于‘平等’等义,仅作填充诗行,故为无义。‘matta’一词表限制之义。此为限定词与被限定词之过失。显示巴利原文
39.‘‘Pādapūraṇi’’ccādi. Yaṃ padaṃ pādapūraṇamattaṃ catutthaṃsasaṅkhātassa pādassa pūraṇamattameva hoti, taṃ anatthamiti mataṃ ñātaṃ. Yathāsaddo vuttattho. Buddhassa pādapaṅkeruhaṃ pādambujaṃ vandeti. Ettha hi apicāti imesaṃ samattanādiatthesu appavattito kevalaṃ pādapūraṇamattato anatthakattaṃ. Mattasaddo avadhāraṇe. Visesanavisesyapadadoso.
句过失指示之阐释显示巴利原文
Vākyadosaniddesavaṇṇanā
若某处所说之文句,于音声或义理上尚可更添余说,
其义如光闪耀,此云即为赐水者。
显示巴利原文 Saddato atthato vuttaṃ, yattha bhiyyopi vuccati; Tamekatthaṃ yathā’bhāti, vāridovārido ayaṃ.
40 “从词”等:就音声而言,因于同一义中该词复被使用;就义而言,即依先后次第事物无差别地再次表述,故说为“所说”。即某一词义之形于某句中多次被说、反复使用,断定其为“义同一”后,以“如”等加以规定。“赐水者”即云,此赐水之云“照耀”即是发光。唯因期盼降雨,故此乃依词而成立的义同一。显示巴利原文
40.‘‘Saddato’’iccādi. Saddato vācakena tasmiṃyevatthe tasseva saddassa puna payogato atthato abhidheyyena pubbapaṭipādikasseva vatthussāvisesena puna paṭipādanato vuttaṃ payuttaṃ yaṃ padattharūpaṃ yattha yasmiṃ vākye bhiyyopi vuccati punapi payujjate, tamekatthanti anuvaditvā ‘‘yathe’’ccādinā vidhīyate. Vāriṃ dadātīti vārido. Ayaṃ vārido megho ābhāti dippatīti. Jaladānamattāpekkhāya idaṃ saddato ekatthaṃ.
40 现在,他依所列的次第,以“从词”等指出句子的过失。所谓“从词”,从义上说,即某个词所表之义形在某个句子中被一再地说、一再地使用,该句就名为有“义同一”之过。举例如“如”等:“赐水者即降雨者,此赐水之云照耀”——“照耀”即发光。由于只说到了降雨本身,而没有“降雨者”等限定语来成就[云之]义,因此从词上便成了“义同一”之过。显示巴利原文
40. Idāni uddiṭṭhakkamena vākyadosaṃ niddisati ‘‘saddato’’ccādinā. Saddato vācakena atthato abhidheyyena vuttaṃ payuttaṃ yaṃ padattharūpaṃ yattha yasmiṃ vākye bhiyyopi punapi vuccati yujjate, taṃ vākyaṃ ekatthaṃ nāma doso. Udāharaṇaṃ ‘‘yathi’’ccādi. Vārido jaladāyako ayaṃ vārido megho ābhāti dippati. Sampattisādhakaṃ ‘‘jaladāyako’’ccādivisesanaṃ vinā jaladānamattassa vuttattā saddato ekatthaṃ nāma hoti.
外道萌芽之种子,种种恶见,我今舍断;
大牟尼令已生净信的大众更加净信。
显示巴利原文 Titthiyaṅkurabījāni, jahaṃ diṭṭhigatāni’ha; Pasādeti pasanne so, mahāmuni mahājane.
41 第四十一条。舍断、远离那些称作外道萌芽之种子、作为生起之因的六十二种恶见——这位大牟尼、正自觉者,于此世间令已对自己生起净信且净信充盛的大众更增净信,这是另一个例子。由于对名为“信”的义理,说了“已信者”与“令生信”,因此从义上说,两者同一。显示巴利原文
41. Titthiyasaṅkhātānaṃ aṅkurānaṃ bījāni uppattihetubhūtāni diṭṭhigatāni dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo jahaṃ jahanto dūrīkaronto so mahāmuni sammāsambuddho iha loke attani pasanne pasādabahule mahājane pasādetīti aparamudāharaṇaṃ. Pasādasaṅkhātassa atthassa ‘‘pasanne pasādetī’’ti vuttattā idamatthato ekatthaṃ.
41 第四十一条。“外道”等。这位大牟尼舍断、驱除了外道萌芽之种子——即称为外道之萌芽的生起之因、分为常见等类别的六十二种恶见,于此世间令已对自己生起净信的大众更增净信。以“已信”一词表达了名为“信”的义,又以“令生信”这一动词表达了同一义,故用词虽异,义则为一,这便是义同一的例证。“外道即是萌芽,其种子,趣入诸见,诸见即是趣入”,或者应作如此解析。显示巴利原文
41.‘‘Titthiyi’’ccādi. So mahāmuni titthiyaṅkurabījāni titthiyasaṅkhātānaṃ aṅkurānaṃ uppattikāraṇabhūtāni diṭṭhigatāni sassatādibhedabhinnā dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyo jahaṃ jahanto apanento iha loke pasanne attani pasanne mahājane pasādeti. Pasannasaddena vuttappasādasaṅkhātassa atthassa pasādetīti kriyāpadenapi vuttattā sadde bhinnepi atthato ekanti atthato ekatthassudāharaṇaṃ. Titthiyā eva aṅkurāni, tesaṃ bījāni, diṭṭhīsu gatāni, diṭṭhiyo eva gatānīti vā viggaho.
已起的次第若中断,便成“残缺”,犹如……
某种慧,某种德,啊,你的本性亦是某种。
显示巴利原文 Āraddhakkamavicchedā, bhaggarīti bhave yathā; Kāpi paññā, kopi guṇo, pakatīpi aho tava.
42 42. “Āraddha”即开始言说、加行,“kama”为词语的次第。其中断(viccheda)即是破断(bhaṅga),由此而成残缺。以“如”(yathā)等举例。即使并未明说,也依信心之力而补入。大牟尼,你的慧极为超胜,其自性的殊胜不可限定,故称为“某种”;啊,即便正在现行时,其自性仍然无法限定,这便是稀有之义。其中,从“某种”(kāpi)至“某种”(kopi)是名词的次第,由于在“本性”(pakati)处中断,故成残缺。显示巴利原文
42.Āraddho vattumupakkamanto, kamo vacanapaṭipāṭi. Tassa vicchedo bhaṅgo, tato. ‘‘Yathe’’tiādinā udāharati. Avuttassapi pasādavasā ajjhāhāroti. Mahāmuni tava te paññā kāpi sātisayattā aniddhāritaṃ sabhāvavisesā kāciyeva, aho pavattamānāyapi vasabhāvassāniddhāritattā acchariyanti attho. Ettha kāpi kopīti sabbanāmapadakkamassa pakatīti ettha vicchinnattā bhaggarīti.
42 42. “已起之序”等。由于已起的词语次第中断,而成为残缺,因此“残缺”是一种句过。以“如”等举例。大牟尼,你的慧极为殊胜,因超越了言说之境,故唯是“某种”。德是戒、定等不共的功德聚,因无法以任何方式衡量,故唯是“某种”。本性亦复如是,不可思议;啊,对于现前正在转起的慧等,了知其本性既困难又稀有。在从“某种”到“某种”的词序中,于“本性”处出现空缺而造成破断。“已起”即次第,其中断即是残缺的状态,或应如此解析。显示巴利原文
42.‘‘Āraddhakkami’’ccādi. Āraddhakkamavicchedā vatthumāraddhapadakkamassa vicchedahetu bhaggarīti bhave bhaggarītivākyadoso bhavati. Udāharati ‘‘yathi’’ccādi. Mahāmuni tava tuyhaṃ paññā sātisayabhūtā paññā kāpi vacanavisayātikkantattā kāpiyeva. Guṇo sīlasamādhiādianaññasādhāraṇaguṇasamūho kopi pamāṇapariggahassa kenaci lesenapi kattumasakkuṇeyyattā kopiyeva. Pakatīpi acinteyyabhūtā pakatīpi evameva aho vijjamānānaṃyeva paññādīnaṃ sabhāvāvabodhassa dukkaratā acchariyā. Kāpi kopīti padakkamassa ‘‘pakatī’’ti ettha suññattā rītibhaṅgo. Āraddhoyeva kamo, tassa vicchedo, bhaggā rīti assa, ettha vāti viggaho.
诸词若难妥善安立,于彼句中便生迷乱;
此应知为‘杂乱’,其例如下所示。
显示巴利原文 Padānaṃ dubbinikkhepā, byāmoho yattha jāyati; Taṃ byākiṇṇanti viññeyyaṃ, tadudāharaṇaṃ yathā.
43 四十三、关于‘诸词’等。在某个句子中,由于诸词——即带有语尾变化的动词等——难以妥善安立、安放不当,因而生起迷乱与困惑,该句应知为‘杂乱’。其杂乱之例,即以‘如’字标示如下。意为:如此例所示,其余亦同。显示巴利原文
43.‘‘Padāna’’miccādi. Yattha yasmiṃ vākye padānaṃ syādyantākhyātikānaṃ dubbinikkhepā duṭṭhapanato byāmoho saṃmuḷhatā jāyati uppajjati, taṃ vākyaṃ byākiṇṇanti viññeyyaṃ ñātabbaṃ. Tassa byākiṇṇassa udāharaṇaṃ lakkhiyaṃ ‘‘yathe’’ti dasseti. Yathā idaṃ, tathā aññampīti attho.
43 四十三、“诸词”等。由于诸词——即带有语尾变化的各类词——难以妥善安立,或安放不当,于语句中便会产生迷乱、困惑,这应知为“杂乱”之过。其示例,即该杂乱过的具体例证,如下文所述方式所示。显示巴利原文
43.‘‘Padāni’’ccādi. Padānaṃ syādyantatyādyantapadānaṃ dubbinikkhepā duṭṭhapanato yattha vākye byāmoho saṃmoho jāyati, taṃ byākiṇṇadosoti viññeyyaṃ. Tadudāharaṇaṃ tassa byākiṇṇadosassa lakkhiyaṃ yathā iminā vakkhamānanayena.
众人敬礼具多德者,恶人却亲近不善之人;
常怀喜悦、恒持利益,忆念善逝。
显示巴利原文 Bahuguṇe paṇamati, dujjanānaṃ pyayaṃ jano; Hitaṃ pamudito niccaṃ, sugataṃ samanussaraṃ.
44 “众多功德”:因功德无量且品类众多,即戒等功德,如理作意、反复起身忆念,令心住于功德境,以此因缘欢喜踊跃、满怀欣悦。此人——即一切世间众生——恒时恭敬礼拜善逝、正自觉者,即便是对提婆达多等非善人,他亦是恒常的利益者。此义为诗人所略。其中,“于众多功德恭敬”等,因词语交叉安放而产生混乱,故为杂乱。显示巴利原文
44. Bahuanantattā bahubhūte guṇe sīlādike samanussaraṃ sammadeva uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya anussaranto guṇavisayasatiṃ paccupaṭṭhāpento teneva kāraṇena pamudito haṭṭhapahaṭṭho ayaṃ jano sabbopi loko dujjanānaṃ sujanetarānampi devadattādīnaṃ niccaṃ kālaṃ hitaṃ sugataṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ paṇamati namassatīti ayaṃ attho kavivañcito. Tattha ‘‘bahuguṇe paṇamatī’’tyādi byavahitapadappayogā moho jāyatīti byākiṇṇaṃ.
44 “众多功德”等:因功德无量且品类众多,即戒、定等功德,作意忆念,尤其加以随念,以此而欢喜踊跃、满怀欣悦。此人——即众生界——恒时、持续地恭敬礼拜善逝、一切知者,他对恶人、非善士亦是恒常的利益者和友人。此处,因词语安放不当,其杂乱仅依词义次第即可了知。显示巴利原文
44.‘‘Bahuguṇe’’ccādi. Bahuguṇe anantattā bahubhūte sīlasamādhiādiguṇe samanussaraṃ visesato anussaranto pamudito tatoyeva pahaṭṭho ayaṃ jano sattanikāyo dujjanānampi asappurisānampi niccaṃ satataṃ hitaṃ mittabhūtaṃ sugataṃ sabbaññuṃ paṇamati vandati. Ettha padānaṃ aṭṭhānapayogato byākiṇṇattaṃ padatthānusāreneva gamyate.
若远离殊胜言语,则被诗人们视为“村俗”之过,例如:
少女啊,我欲求于你,你却不欲求我,这是什么缘故?
显示巴利原文 Visiṭṭhavacanā’petaṃ, gāmmaṃ’tya’bhimataṃ yathā; Kaññe kāmayamānaṃ maṃ, na kāmayasi kiṃ nvi’daṃ.
45 45. 由于远离了某种殊胜义理的言说与表述,故名为‘远离殊胜语’。‘Kaññe’是呼唤语。‘我欲求于你,你为何不欲求如此的我?这是什么缘故?’——因为这是村民的言语,所以‘少女’等语为村俗。显示巴利原文
45. Visiṭṭhassa kassaci atthassa vacanato kathanato apetaṃ pariccattaṃ. Kaññeityāmantanaṃ. Ahaṃ taṃ icchāmi, tādisaṃ maṃ tvaṃ kasmā nicchasi, idaṃ kiṃ nu iti gāmikajanavacanattā ‘‘kaññi’’ccādikaṃ gāmmaṃ.
45 45. ‘殊胜’等。所谓远离殊胜语,是指由于以可爱的语调与殊胜的修饰来表述应被修饰的内容,却有所欠缺的语句,被诗人们视为‘村俗’之过失。例如‘如’等。‘Kaññe’——少女啊!‘我欲求于你,你却不欲求我,这是什么缘故?’——如此说时,是在表达欲望受挫,即:显示巴利原文
45.‘‘Visiṭṭhe’’ccādi. Visiṭṭhavacanāpetaṃ piyabhūtena uttivisesena visesitabbassa kathanato parihīnaṃ vākyaṃ ‘‘gāmmadosa’’nti kavīhi abhimataṃ. Udāharati ‘‘yathi’’ccādi. Kaññe he kaññe kāmayamānaṃ maṃ tuvaṃ icchayamānaṃ maṃ na kāmayasi tvaṃ na icchasi, idaṃ kiṃ nu. Īdise icchāvighāte vuccamāne evaṃ–
‘‘Yācanā madīyā tava kāraṇāyaṃ, Dine dine nipphalataṃ upeti; Dakkho sadā māninimānabhaṅge, Sa manmathonyatra gato mato nu’’iti viya.
由于没有对所爱之人说话,‘女子’等语属于粗俗之语,因为那是野蛮人的言辞。这里‘女子’一词并不专指十岁女子。因其表达殊胜之义,故为离过之语。显示巴利原文
Piyatthassa kathanābhāvato ‘‘kaññe’’tyādikaṃ vacanaṃ milakkhukānaṃ vacanattā gāmmaṃ. Ettha kaññāsaddo dasavassikāya vattatīti niyamo natthi. Visiṭṭhassa atthassa vacanato apetanti vākyaṃ.
Padasandhānato kiñci, duppatītikaraṃ bhave; Tampi gāmmaṃtya’bhimataṃ, yathā yābhavato piyā.
46 第四十六条“字词相接”等:因字词相接——即前后词语以连音方式结合——任何语句若造成弊恶、不悦耳、令人难以理解的认识,便称为“字词相接”;那也被前述“粗鄙”所认可。举例说明:“你心爱的任一女人成为你的妻子”,这是一种含义。“yabha”指淫欲,“yābha”指淫欲行为,具此者名为“yābhavā”,其妻名为“yābhavato piyā”,即有淫欲者之妻。显示巴利原文
46.‘‘Pade’’ccādi. Padasandhānato pubbāparānaṃ padānaṃ sandhivasena yaṃ kiñci vākyaṃ duṭṭhu asutisubhagaṃ patītimavabodhaṃ karotīti karaṃ bhave, tampi yathāvuttaṃ gāmmantyabhimataṃ. Yathātyudāharati. Bhavato yā kāci vanitā piyā hotīti ekottho. Yabha methune. Yabhanaṃ yābho. So vijjate yassa so yābhavā. Tassa yābhavato piyāityapi bhavati.
46 第四十六条“字词相接”等:任何语句因字词相接——即前后词语的连接——而变得难以理解,成为不可接受、显示恶劣含义者,那也被称为“粗鄙”,即被前述粗鄙的过失所染污,为一切诗人所共知。举例说明:“你心爱的任一女人成为你的妻子”,这是诗人所表达的含义。“yābhavato piyā”也指有淫欲者之妻。“yabha”字根意为淫欲,“yābha”指淫欲行为,具此者称为“yābhavā”,其妻称为“yābhavato piyā”;因其不堪入耳,令人难以理解,产生恶劣的认知,故成误解与错谬。显示巴利原文
46.‘‘Padasandhāni’’ccādi. Kiñci vākyaṃ padasandhānato pubbāparapadānaṃ ghaṭanato duppatītikaraṃ bhave asabbhabhūtaduṭṭhatthassa pakāsako hoti, tampi gāmmanti yathāvuttagāmmadosena dūsitanti sabbehi kavīhi abhimataṃ ñātaṃ. Yathāti udāharati. Bhavato bhavantassa yā kāci itthī piyā bhavatīti ayaṃ kavinā icchitattho. Yābhavato methunavantassa piyātipi attho. ‘‘Yabha methune’’ti hi dhātu. Yabhanaṃ yābho, so assa atthīti yābhavā, tassa yābhavatoti gahite asotabbattā duppatītikaratā. Duṭṭhāyeva patīti avabodho, taṃ karotīti viggaho.
于已说明、已指示之处,应作词语的划分,这就是停顿。
凡与此停顿相违、有所欠缺者,便称为“停顿欠缺”;而此处所说的停顿,则表区别。
显示巴利原文 Vuttesu sūcite ṭhāne, padacchedo bhave yati; Yaṃ tāya hīnaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, yatihīnanti sā pana.
47 第四十七条“于已说明之处”等起首:在诗律论所明示的、如anuṭṭhubha等韵律中,于已说明、已指示之处——即诗律考察所显示的“此处有停顿”之处——词语的划分、分隔、区分、随说,便是所谓的“停顿”,被如此确立。凡语句与此停顿相违、缺失、不足者,即称为“停顿欠缺”,因“停顿即止息,此处欠缺停顿”之义而作此说。“pana”表示区别,意为“然而这停顿”。显示巴利原文
47.‘‘Vuttesvi’’ccādi. Vuttesu chandosatthapariniddiṭṭhesu anuṭṭhubhādīsu sūcite ṭhāne ‘‘etthayatī’’ti chandovicitiyā pakāsitaṭṭhāne padānaṃ syādyantānaṃ chedo vicchiti vibhāgo anuvādo yaṃ yati bhaveti vidhīyati. Tāya yatiyā hīnaṃ parihīnaṃ viruddhaṃ yaṃ vākyaṃ, taṃ yatihīnanti vuttaṃ, ‘‘yamanaṃ virāmo yati, sā hīnā etthā’’ti katvā. Panāti visese, sā yati panāti sambandho.
47 “已说”等:在已说的韵律学中,于随颂等所指之处,即“此处有停顿”所标明的处所,对词尾、语基尾等词语加以分隔,便名为停顿。若某语句因该停顿而在期望之处音节截断、有所缺失,该语句即称为停顿欠缺,智者说它因停顿欠缺的过失而有瑕疵。显示巴利原文
47.‘‘Vuttesva’’ccādi. Vuttesu chandosatthe niddiṭṭhaanuṭṭhubhādīsu sūcite ṭhāne ‘‘ayamettha yatī’’ti pakāsite ṭhāne padacchedo syādyantatyādyantādīnaṃ padānaṃ vicchedo yati nāma bhave, tāya yatiyā yaṃ vākyaṃ hīnaṃ abhimataṭṭhāne vaṇṇavicchedena parihīnaṃ, taṃ vākyaṃ yatihīnanti yatihīnadosena duṭṭhanti viññūhi vuttaṃ.
停顿遍在一切句末,于所说半颂中尤为如此;
有时也在前后多音节词的中间。
显示巴利原文 Yati sabbattha pādante, vuttaḍḍhe ca visesato; Pubbāparānekavaṇṇa-padamajjhepi katthaci.
48 “停顿”等的解说如下:在一切句末——也就是在被称为第四分句的所有偈颂句的末尾与终结处,以及特别地、决定性地在已说的半颂中,即由已说的两句所构成的半颂及其终结处,这便是意旨所在。补充而言,应有“可能会”一词。若问:“因为已经说了‘词语分割’,停顿应该不会出现在词语中间吧?”为了消除此疑而说“前后”等。此处并非指一切处所都如此,在某些地方,停顿也可出现在具有前后多个音节的词语中间,这便是关联。所谓前后,即之前与之后。多音节,就是许多音节。具有前后许多音节的,即如是。而那个词,也在它的中间。显示巴利原文
48.‘‘Yati’’ccādi. Sabbattha pādante sabbasmiṃ catutthaṃsasaṅkhātānaṃ gāthāpādānaṃ ante avasāne ca visesato visesena ekantena vuttaḍḍhe ca vuttānaṃ pādadvayasaṅkhāte aḍḍhe ca, tadavasāne cāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Siyā’’ti seso. Nanu ‘‘padacchedo’’ti vuttattā padamajjhe yati na hotevāti ceti āha ‘‘pubba’’iccādi. Katthaci kismiñci ṭhāne, na sabbattha. Pubbāparānekavaṇṇapadamajjhepi yatīti sambandho. Pubbe ca apare ca pubbāpare. Aneke vaṇṇā anekavaṇṇā. Pubbāpare anekavaṇṇā yassa taṃ tathā. Tañca taṃ padañca, tassa majjhepi.
48 现在以“停顿”等语,显示停顿可能存在的所有范围。所谓停顿,在一切句末——也就是在称为第四分句的偈颂句末尾,以及特别地、决定性地在已说的半颂之中,即由已说的两句所构成的半颂及其终结处,这是意旨所在。在某些地方,它也可以出现在具有前后多个音节的词语中间——即应有停顿存在于兼具前后多个音节的词语中间。因为“词语分割”被称为停顿,为了消除“停顿不会发生在词语中间”的疑惑,才说“在具有前后多个音节的词语中间”。就此而言,句末、已说的半颂以及词语中间,都是停顿的处所。仅仅在词语中间才有的停顿,有时会存在,但在二音节或三音节的词语中间则不存在。显示巴利原文
48. Idāni yatimhi labbhamānaṃ sabbavisayaṃ dasseti ‘‘yati’’ccādinā. Sā pana yati sabbattha pādante catutthaṃsasaṅkhātagāthāpādānaṃ ante ca visesato niyamato vuttaḍḍhe ca vuttānaṃ pādadvayasaṅkhāte aḍḍhe ca, tadavasāne cāti adhippāyo. Katthaci kismiñci ṭhāne pubbāparānekavaṇṇapadamajjhepi pubbāparabhūtaanekavaṇṇasamannāgatapadānaṃ majjhe ca siyā. Padacchedassa ‘‘yatī’’ti vuttattā padamajjhe na hotīti saṅkāpariharaṇatthaṃ ‘‘pubbāparānekavaṇṇapadamajjhe’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha pādanto, vuttaḍḍho, padamajjhañca yatiṭṭhānanti. Padamajjheyeva labbhamānā yati katthaci hoti, dvakkharatyakkharapadamajjhe pana na hoti.
我以头顶礼敬那位具金色身相的如来;
他犹如以金汁遍洒一切方所。
显示巴利原文 Taṃ name sirasā cāmī-karavaṇṇaṃ tathāgataṃ; Sakalāpi disā siñca-tīva soṇṇarasehiyo.
49 49. 所谓“举例”,即被举出之例;对立面的举例,则为“反例”。那位如来,其色泽如同金色——即如同黄金的色泽——我以头顶礼敬他。是怎样的呢?那位如来,他仿佛以金汁——即因其色泽如金而说为金汁——遍洒一切方所,即所有十方;我如此思量:“他仿佛在遍洒。” 此与“那位如来”相关联。在此,前句末及已说的半颂中,停顿是明确的。而“cāmīkara”一词有四音节,其中“cāmī”为前部分,“kara”为后部分;此处停顿位于具有前后多个音节的词语中间。然而在“siñcatī”一词中,所见的停顿虽在“siñca”两音节后,但后部分“ti”仅有一个音节,故不具有前后多个音节性,因此该停顿是瑕疵的。此即反例。显示巴利原文
49. Udāharīyatīti udāharaṇaṃ. Paṭipakkhamudāharaṇaṃ paccudāharaṇaṃ. Cāmīkarasseva suvaṇṇassa viya vaṇṇo yassa taṃ tathāgataṃ sirasā namāmi. Kīdisaṃ? Yo tathāgato sakalāpi disā sabbāyeva dasa disā soṇṇarasehi cāmīkaravaṇṇattā rasehi suvaṇṇarasehi siñcatīva siñcatīti maññe, taṃ tathāgatanti apekkhate. Ettha pubbapādante vuttaḍḍhe ca niyatā yati. Cāmīkarasaddo cettha caturakkharo. Tattha cāmīiti pubbabhāgo, karaiti paro. Ettha pubbāparānekavaṇṇapadamajjhe yati. Siñcatīti ettha pana pubbāparānekavaṇṇapadamajjhattābhāvā siñcaityatra yati duṭṭhāti. Idaṃ paccudāharaṇaṃ.
49 49. 于此,由于句末及已说半颂处的停顿明显,故就词语中间的停顿,举出合意之例与对立面之例,如下:“我礼敬”等。那位如来,他仿佛以金汁——即黄金汁液的流注——遍洒一切方所;我作如是想:“他仿佛在遍洒。”“iva”一词表示思量。我以头顶礼那位具有金色色泽——即类似黄金色泽的肤色——的如来。在此,“cāmīkaravaṇṇa”一词中,停顿越过“cāmī”两个音节而住立,且末尾有“kara”两个音节而无缺,因词语分割的前后音节具有多个性,此为合意之例。在“siñcatī”一词中,虽见停顿越过“siñca”两个音节,但后部分“ti”唯有一个音节,故不具有前后多个音节性,此为反例。在此,多音节性应仅依词语自身而了知。其色泽如同金色的色泽,即具有那样色泽的,此为词解。显示巴利原文
49.Tattha pādantavuttaḍḍhesu yatiyā pākaṭattā tasmiṃ padamajjhe yatiyā udāharaṇapaccudāharaṇāni iṭṭhodāharaṇapaṭipakkhodāharaṇāni yathā. ‘‘Taṃ name’’ccādi. Yo tathāgato sakalāpi disā soṇṇarasehi suvaṇṇarasadhārāhi siñcatīva siñcati maññe, ivasaddo vitakke. Cāmīkaravaṇṇaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇasadisachavivaṇṇaṃ taṃ tathāgataṃ sirasā name. Ettha ‘‘cāmīkaravaṇṇa’’nti yatiyā cāmīti akkharadvayamatikkamma ṭhitattā antepi karaiti akkharadvayenānūnattā padacchedassa pubbāparavaṇṇānamanekattamitiṭṭhodāharaṇaṃ. Siñcatīti pade siñcāti vaṇṇadvayamatikkamma yatiyā dissamānattepi tiiti parabhāge ekavaṇṇattā anekavaṇṇābhāvoti paccudāharaṇaṃ. Ettha anekavaṇṇattaṃ padavaseneva ñātabbaṃ. Cāmīkarassa vaṇṇo viya vaṇṇo yassa soti viggaho.
否则,于彼处,‘tva’变为另形,如同‘yā’等的替代规则,后词之首等的处理亦是如此。
显示巴利原文 Saro sandhimhi pubbanto, viya lope vibhattiyā; Aññathā tva’ññathā tattha, yādesādi parādi’va.
50 第五十颂:‘Saro’等。当格位词尾省略而作连声时,于语词组合中,那个成为后词之首的元音,便如同前词之末的元音那样存在。纵然没有多种音色的情形,依此而作的停顿亦无破坏——此是意趣。反之,若格位词尾未被省略而作组合时,前词之末的元音则以另一种方式存在,即如同后词之首的元音那样存在——此是义趣。舍弃那个连同格位词尾而作的停顿,则无破坏——此是意趣。其中,于那样的停顿中,对i音等应作的y音替代等,如同后词之首一样存在。舍弃已作替代等连同辅音而行的停顿,则无破坏——此是意趣。显示巴利原文
50.‘‘Saro’’ccādi. Vibhattiyā lope sati sandhimhi saṃhitāyaṃ katāyaṃ saro parapadādibhūto pubbanto viya pubbapadassa antabhūto yo saro, so viya hoti, anekavaṇṇattābhāvepi tato vihitayatiyā nevatthi bhaṅgoti adhippāyo. Aññathā tu vibhattiyā alope tu sati saṃhitāyaṃ katāyaṃ pubbapadantabhūto saro ce, aññathā aññena pakārena hoti, parapadassādisaro viya hotīti attho. Taṃ vibhattiyā saddhiṃ vihāya katayatiyā natthi bhaṅgoti adhippāyo. Tattha tassaṃ yatiyaṃ yādesādi ivaṇṇādīnaṃ kātabbo yakārādesādi parādiva parapadassa ādisaro viya hoti. Katayādesādisahitaṃ byañjanaṃ vihāya katāya yatiyā natthi bhaṅgoti adhippāyo.
50 第五十颂:现在,为说明即使与前文相违亦不构成停顿的破坏,而说“saro”等。当格尾省略而有连音时,连音中的元音——即连音元音——便如同前词之末,如同前词之末一般存在;反之,当格尾不省略而组合时,则呈现为另一种方式:前词之末的元音如同后词之首的元音一样存在。其中,在该停顿处,对i-音等所应作的y-音替代等,正如后词之首一般存在;即使在越过了与前词之末相似的元音而遇到与后词之首相似的音,或者不越过它而遇到与后词之首相似的替代等情况下,当运用停顿时,纵然没有种种音色,也不会有停顿的破坏,这便是意旨所在。“前词之末”等、“那个替代”等、“以m-音等为始”等、“后词之首”等,皆为词句。显示巴利原文
50. Idāni heṭṭhā vuttassa viruddhattepi yatibhaṅgābhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saro’’ccādi. Vibhattiyā lope sandhimhi sati saro sandhisaro pubbanto viya pubbapadassa anto viya hoti, aññathā tu vibhattiyā alope saṃhitāyaṃ katāyaṃ aññathā hoti, pubbapadantabhūto saro parapadassa ādisaro viya hoti. Tattha yatiyaṃ yādesādi ivaṇṇādīnaṃ kattabbayakārādesādi parādiva parapadassa ādisaro viya hoti, pubbantasadisasaramatikkamitvāpi parapadādisarasadisavaṇṇamāgamma taṃ anatikkamitvāpi parapadādisarasadisayādesādimatikkamitvāpi yatiyā payuttāya sati anekavaṇṇattābhāvepi yatibhaṅgo na hotīti adhippāyo. Pubbassa antoti ca, yo ca so ādeso ca, so ādi yassa makārādinoti ca, parassa ādīti ca vākyaṃ.
“cādi”等唯是前词之末,恒常依止于前词;
“pādayo”等则恒常与后词相连,如同后词之首一样。
显示巴利原文 Cādī pubbapadantāva, niccaṃ pubbapadassitā; Pādayo niccasambandhā, parādīva parena tu.
51 第五十一颂:恒常、无间地依止于前词的ca等不变词(cādi),犹如前词末尾的组成部分;应将它们视作末尾而作停顿,这是意旨所在。与后词恒常相连、持续结合,tu字无意义地使用;而pa等前缀(pādayo)则犹如后词开头的组成部分;舍弃该部分后,应在前词之末作停顿,这是意旨所在。显示巴利原文
51.Niccaṃ anavarataṃ pubbapadaṃ sitā nissitā cādī cakārādayo nipātā pubbassa padassa antā avayavā viya honti, te anto katvā yati kātabbāti adhippāyo. Parena parapadena niccasambandhā satatayogino, tusaddo aṭṭhānappayutto, pādayo tu parādīva parapadassa ādī avayavā viya honti, taṃ vihāya pubbapadante yati kātabbāti adhippāyo.
51 第五十一颂:“Cādi”等。恒常、持续地依止于前词而起的ca等不变词(cādi),仅是前词之末,犹如前词末尾的组成部分;而与后词恒常相连、无间结合的pa等前缀(pādayo),则犹如后词开头的组成部分。遇到cādi等时,将其放在外部而作停顿;遇到pādayo等时,将其收在内部而作停顿,由此产生的休止即为停顿的破坏,这是意旨所在。“以ca等为始”“依止于前词”“以pa等为始”“恒常相连”,是逐词解释。此中,由于是以该类总称,故ca音、pa音等亦皆包含在内。显示巴利原文
51.‘‘Cādi’’ccādi. Niccaṃ satataṃ pubbapadassitā pubbapadaṃ nissāya pavattā cādī cakārādinipātā pubbapadantāva pubbapadassa antā avayavā viya honti, parena parapadena niccasambandhā nirantarayogino pādayo tu pādiupasaggā pana parādīva parapadassa ādī avayavāviya honti. Cādayo āgamma te bahi katvāpi pādayo āgamma te anto katvāpi pavatto virāmo yatibhaṅgoti adhippāyo. Coādi yesanti ca, pubbapadaṃ sitāti ca, po ādi yesanti ca, niccaṃ sambandhāti ca viggaho. Ettha ca tagguṇasaṃviññāṇattā cakārapakārādīnampi pariggaho.
我以头面顶礼那位超越一切譬喻的如来,
他已证达世间之最,对他而言,譬喻实不适用。
显示巴利原文 Name taṃ sirasā sabbo-pamātītaṃ tathāgataṃ; Yassa lokaggataṃ patta-sso’pamā na hi yujjati.
我恒常敬礼那位牟尼王,他有无量之智、无上之慧;
他的智慧与慈爱,广展而无有边际。
显示巴利原文 Munindaṃ taṃ sadā vandā-mya’nantamati’muttamaṃ; Yassa paññā ca mettā ca, nissīmāti vijambhati.
52-53 第五十二至五十三颂:‘一切处’指如前所述之前分末尾相似等五种情况。‘Nametaṃ’等两首偈颂词义明了,而其意旨为:因已证得世间之最,故超越一切譬喻;因智慧与慈爱在世间无间运为,故有无量智,且为无上。此处,先将‘sabbā upamā’合为复合词,在省略格尾并连声时,后分开头的u音即如同位于前分末尾b音之位的a音一般存在,故于‘sabbo’处有颂末停顿。在‘pattassopamā’处,y音替代如同后分开头一般存在;若格尾未省而连声时,带格尾的a音便如同后分开头的u音一般存在,彼与格尾共成之停顿遂被舍去,转而于‘patta’处有颂末停顿。同理,在‘vandāmyananta’处,y音替代如同后分开头一般存在,故舍去‘mya’字后,于‘vandā’处有颂末停顿。既已明说依于前分之cādi等与前分末尾相似,故于‘mettā ca’的‘ca’字后有停顿;而与后分相连之pādayo等与后分开头相似,故于‘nissīmā’处,舍去‘ni’字后,于其后有停顿。显示巴利原文
52-53.Sabbatthāti pubbantasadisādīsu. ‘‘Nameta’’ntiādigāthādvaye padattho pākaṭo, adhippāyo tu yato lokaggataṃ patto, tato sabbopamātīto, yato paññāmettā loke nirantaramiva vattanti, tato anantamati, uttamo cāti. Ettha ‘‘sabbā upamā’’ti samāsaṃ katvā vibhattilope saṃhitāyañca katāyaṃ parapadādiukāro pubbapadantabbakāraṭṭhaakāro viya hotīti sabbo iccatra pādantayati. Pattassopamā iccatra yakārādesassa parādisadisabhāvo viya hoti, vibhattiyā alope saṃhitāyaṃ katāyaṃ savibhattiyā akāro parapadādi ukāro viya hotīti taṃvibhattiyā pasiddhaṃ vihāya pattaiccatra pādantayati. Tathā vandāmyanantaiccatra yakārādesassa parādisadisabhāvo vihitoti myasaddaṃ vajjetvā vandāiccatra pādantayati. Pubbapadassitānaṃ cādīnaṃ pubbapadantasadisatā vuttāti mettā cāti casaddato yati, aparapadasambandhā pādayo parapadādisadisā hontīti nissīmāti ettha nisaddaṃ vihāya tato ādimhi yati.
52-53 五十二至五十三颂:一切处,即如前所说之前分末尾相似等五种情况。如‘Name taṃ’等句所示:那位已证得世间最上的佛陀,因超越一切词义而住立,故譬喻实不适用,实不适用。我以头面礼敬彼超越一切譬喻的如来。在此,‘Sabbo’一词中,因o音与前分末尾相似,其后的颂末停顿亦是如此,故‘ssopamā’一词成为后分开头相似的例证,亦即不超越音声而住立的颂末停顿之例。显示巴利原文
52-53. Sabbattha yathāvuttapubbantasadisasarādīsu pañcasu udāharaṇāniyathā. ‘‘Name ta’’miccādi, lokaggataṃ pattassa yassa buddhassa upamā na hi yujjati sakalapadatthānaṃ atikkamma ṭhitattā na hi yujjati. Sabbopamātītaṃ taṃ tathāgataṃ sirasā name namāmi. Sabboti ettha okārassa pubbapadantasarasadisattā tato parāya yatiyā ca ssopamāti parapadādisadisaṃ vaṇṇamanatikkamma ṭhitāya yatiyā ca udāharaṇaṃ.
如‘Muninde’等句所示:那位正自觉者的智慧与慈爱无有边际,因其以无量众生及无量所知为境而起作用,故无有界限,极为广展。我恒常礼敬彼拥有无量智的牟尼主:虽在生灭之中,亦因所知无有边际,故对能知者以所知之名假立,而称具足无量慧;彼因此为最上、最殊胜者。此处,因‘yā’等音与后分开头相似,若不依彼,则成颂末停顿。在‘Mettācanissīmā’中,‘cā’等与前分末尾相似,而‘pā’等与后分开头相似,故‘cā’与‘nī’等音亦构成颂末停顿。显示巴利原文
‘‘Muninde’’ccādi. Yassa sambuddhassa paññā ca mettā canissīmā anantasattaanantañeyyavisayakaraṇato sīmārahitā ativijambhati. Anantamatiṃ udayabbayasambhavepi ñeyyassānantattā visayimhi visayavohārena anantapaññāya samannāgataṃ uttamaṃ tato eva pavaraṃ taṃ munindaṃ sadā vandāmi, yādesassa parādisadisattā tamanāgamma yati bhavati. Mettācanissīmāti ettha cādīnaṃ pubbapadantasadisattāca pādīnaṃ parapadādisadisattā ca ‘‘cā’’ti ‘‘nī’’ti imesampi yati bhavati.
大慈与大慧,于彼胜者中殊胜增长;
我礼敬彼最尊胜者,殊胜功德藏。
显示巴利原文 Mahāmettā mahāpaññā, ca yattha paramodayā; Paṇamāmi jinaṃ taṃ pa-varaṃ varaguṇālayaṃ.
54 “Mahā”等句如下:“Yattha”意为在彼胜者中。“Paramodayā”指大慈等殊胜之增长。正因为如此,彼为殊胜功德藏;也正因为如此,彼为最上、殊胜之胜者——这是意义上的连接。此处,若将依附于前分的“ca”音当作后分开头,并于其前设立休止(yati);或将后分开头的连接方式当作前分末尾,并于其后设立休止——这两者皆与规则相违,故均为反例。显示巴利原文
54.‘‘Mahā’’iccādi. Yatthāti yasmiṃ jine. Paramodayāti mahāmettādayo ukkaṭṭhābhivuḍḍhiyo. Tatoyeva varaguṇālayaṃ, teneva pavaraṃ uttamaṃ taṃ jinanti sambandho. Ettha pubbapadanissitaṃ cakāraṃ parapadādibhūtaṃ katvā tato pubbe katā yati ca, parapadādisambandhapakāraṃ pubbapadantabhūtaṃ katvā pakārato paraṃ katā yati ca viruddhāti ubhayattha paccudāharaṇaṃ.
54 54. 在以“ca”等音为开头或结尾的音步境中,反例如下:如“Mahāmetti”等颂所示。“Yattha”意为:在哪一位胜者中,大慈与大慧这些殊胜的增长存在。我礼敬那位殊胜功德之聚、最上功德之藏、由此而为最上的胜者。在此,将“ca”音作为后词之首,将“pa”音作为前词之末,依韵律转起,故“ca yattha”与“taṃ pā”二者皆为反例。显示巴利原文
54.Cādipādīsu visayabhūtesu paccudāharaṇaṃ yathā. ‘‘Mahāmetti’’ccādi. Yattha yasmiṃ jine mahāmettā ca mahāpaññā ca imā paramodayā ukkaṭṭhābhivuḍḍhiyo honti. Varaguṇālayaṃ uttamaguṇākaraṃ pavaraṃ tatoyeva uttamaṃ taṃ jinaṃ paṇamāmi. Ettha cakāraṃ parapadādiṃ katvā pakāraṃ pubbapadantaṃ katvā yatiyā pavattattā ‘‘ca yattha, taṃ pā’’tidvayamapi paccudāharaṇaṃ.
就词义次第而言,此处次第脱落,如下所示:
请赐我田地、村庄,或美好之处。
显示巴利原文 Padatthakkamato muttaṃ, kamaccutamidaṃ yathā; Khettaṃ vā dehi gāmaṃ vā, desaṃ vā mama sobhanaṃ.
55 如“Pada”等所示。“Padānaṃ atthakkamato muttaṃ gaḷitaṃ kamaccutamidaṃ”——这是指词语从意义次第中脱落、漏失,即次第错误。以“Khettaṃ vā”等为例,这种不恰当的乞求次第,显示了说话者的无知。因为,若连田地都愿意给予,又怎会再示现村落等呢?显示巴利原文
55.‘‘Pada’’iccādi. Padānaṃ atthakkamato muttaṃ gaḷitaṃ kamaccutamidanti vidhīyate. Khettaṃ vā iccādinā arucitoyaṃ yācanakkamo vattuno aviññutaṃ gameti. Yo hi khettampi dātuṃ nicchati, kathaṃ so gāmādikaṃ dassatīti.
55 如“Padatthi”等所示。“Padatthakkamato padānaṃ atthakkamato muttaṃ gaḷitaṃ idaṃ vākyaṃ kamaccutaṃ nāma”——此句名为“次第脱落”。举例:“yathi”等,意思是:“请给我那美好的田地,或村落,或地区,或国土。”其中,“khettaṃ”等的乞求次第,若无说话者的无知,便不能显示适当的词义次第。同样地,若连田地都不愿给予,又如何示现村落、市镇、国土等呢?这便是次第的缺失。显示巴利原文
55.‘‘Padatthi’’ccādi. Padatthakkamato padānaṃ atthakkamato muttaṃ gaḷitaṃ idaṃ vākyaṃ kamaccutaṃ nāma. Udāharati ‘‘yathi’’ccādi. Mama sobhanaṃ khettaṃ vā gāmaṃ vā desaṃ vā janapadaṃ vā dehi. Ettha khettamiccādi yācanakkamo vattuno aviññubhāvaṃ vinā ucitapadatthakkamaṃ nappakāseti, tathā hi khettamapi dātumanicchanto gāmanigamajanapadādiṃ kathaṃ dassatīti kamahāni.
超越世间义理、言辞过度者,如下所示:
她的双乳舒展之际,天空显得极为壅塞。
显示巴利原文 Lokiyattha’matikkantaṃ, ativuttaṃ mataṃ yathā; Atisambādha’mākāsa-metissā thanajambhane.
56 “Loki”等。世间共许者称为世俗(lokiya),超越或不依循世俗所指之义,便被认为是“过度之言”(ativutta)。以“yathā”等举例说明。当这位女子的乳房——那对胸脯舒展扩张时,天空、虚空便显得极为壅塞、极其促狭。显示巴利原文
56.‘‘Loki’’ccādi. Loke vidito lokiyo, taṃ lokiyatthamabhidheyyaṃ atikkantaṃ ananuvuttaṃ yaṃ taṃ ativuttaṃ matanti vidhīyate. Yathetyādinā udāharati. Etissā vanitāya thanānaṃ payodharānaṃ jambhane byāpane ākāsaṃ gaganaṃ atisambādhaṃ accantappakaṃ.
56 “Lokiyatthi”等。超越世间共许的通俗所指之义,或以表述方式有所僭越的语句,便被视为“过度之言”(ativutta)。以“yathā”等举例。她的双乳舒展、诸乳扩展时,天空变得极为壅塞、全无空隙。此处,我们说胸脯之广大,因它甚至超越了世间共许为“大”的虚空,故而此语句为“过度之言”的过失所染污。显示巴利原文
56.‘‘Lokiyatthi’’ccādi. Lokiyatthaṃ loke pasiddhamabhidheyyaṃ atikkantaṃ kathanākārena atikkamitaṃ vākyaṃ ativuttamiti mataṃ. Udāharati ‘‘yathi’’ccādi. Etissā thanajambhane thanānaṃ vijambhane ākāsaṃ atisambādhaṃ anokāsaṃ. Ettha payodharānaṃ mahantattaṃ vadāmāti loke mahantanti pasiddhaṃ gaganamapi atikkantattā vākyamativuttadosena dūsitaṃ.
Samudāyatthato’petaṃ, taṃ apetatthakaṃ yathā;
所谓牛之子即公牛,食草,饮水。显示巴利原文
Gāviputto balībaddho, tiṇaṃ khādī pivī jalaṃ.
57 “Samudāyi”等。从整体、上下文或句子的连接而得的义,即作为支分与有支、行为与作者关系等特殊特征的约定俗成所指,脱离、离开此义而空无,仅凭单词义而无任何偏离者,这样的语句称为“脱离整体义”(apetatthaka)。因为如“牛之子”等语句中,整体义并不存在。显示巴利原文
57.‘‘Samudāyi’’ccādi. Samudāyassa pakaraṇato padasandhino vākyassa attho abhidheyyaṃ aṅgaṅgibhūtaṃ kriyākārakasambandhīvisesalakkhaṇaṃ saṃvohārikaṃ, tato apetaṃ apagataṃ suññaṃ, vinā padatthamattena tassa katthaci byabhicārābhāvato etādisaṃ yaṃ tamapetatthakanti vidhi. Na hi ‘‘gāviputto’’ccādīsu samudāyattho sambhavati.
57 “Samudāyi”等:所谓整体义,是指由限定与被限定、行为与作者等关系结合而成的词语集合——即句子的关联义。然而从符合语言习惯的义而言,它却是脱离、离开的;又因为只有部分义在任何情况下皆可得,故从整体义而言是空无的,这样的句子名为“脱离整体义”(apetatthaka)。譬如以“yathā”等所举:“牛之子是公牛,吃草,饮水。”此处,除了部分义之外,并无任何通过整体可解的特殊义,故从整体义而言是脱离的。显示巴利原文
57.‘‘Samudāyi’’ccādi. Samudāyatthato visesanavisesyabhūtakriyākārakasambandhehi yuttavākyasaṅkhātapadasamudāyassa sambandhapadattā vohārānurūpaatthato apetaṃ apagataṃ, avayavatthamattassa vā sabbattha labbhamānattā samudāyatthato suññaṃ, taṃ vākyaṃ apetatthakaṃ nāma. Yathiccādinā udāharati ‘‘gāviputto balībaddho usabho tiṇaṃ khādi, jalaṃ pivī’’ti. Ettha avayavatthamattena vinā samudāyena gamyamānassa kassaci visesatthassa abhāvā samudāyatthato apagataṃ nāma hoti.
若组合中存有粗涩,那便是组合粗涩,如:
粗涩荒地已消尽,种子播于田中,即得丰硕果实。
显示巴利原文 Bandhe pharusatā yattha, taṃ bandhapharusaṃ yathā; Kharā khilā parikkhīṇā, khette khittaṃ phalatya’laṃ.
58 “Bandhe”等。“粗糙”等,是指因组合粗糙而缺乏音声悦耳之性;粗糙、粗涩的荒地、树桩等既已耗尽、灭尽,因此在田地、稻田中所播的种子,便得以充分、圆满地结果成就。这是句子的过失。显示巴利原文
58.‘‘Bandhe’’ccādi. Kharāiccādikaṃ bandhapharusaṃ sutisubhagattābhāvato kharā kakkasā khilā khāṇukādayo parikkhīṇā khayaṃ pattā yato, tasmā khette kedāre khittaṃ vuttaṃ alamaccantaṃ phalati nipphajjati. vākyadoso.
58 “Bandhe”等。在组合,亦即组合体中,因缺乏音声悦耳之性而有粗糙性,具这种粗糙性的句子,即名为“组合粗糙”(bandhapharusa)。以“yathā”举例:粗糙、粗涩的荒地、树桩等既已耗尽、灭尽,因此在田中播下的种子,便充分、极至地结果成就。显示巴利原文
58.‘‘Bandhe’’ccādi. Bandhe bandhasarīre pharusatā sutisukhatābhāvato pharusabhāvo yattha vākye bhavati, taṃ vākyaṃ bandhapharusaṃ nāma hoti. Yathāti udāharati. Kharā kakkasā khilā khāṇukādayo parikkhīṇā yasmā khīṇā honti, tasmā khette khittaṃ vuttaṃ bījaṃ alaṃ atisayena phalati nipphajjati.
句义过失说明之注释。显示巴利原文
Vākyatthadosaniddesavaṇṇanā
应依其相与随顺之义,了知次序错乱等(apakkamādi)。
显示巴利原文 Ñeyyaṃ lakkhaṇamanvattha-vasenā’pakkamādinaṃ; Udāharaṇametesaṃ, dāni sandassayāmya’haṃ.
59 “Ñeyya”等。对于 apakkamā(失序)等,如已列举,由于“以例证令其相明了”这层意思,故依随义理,随顺“yattha taṃ apakkamanti”等句义之慧,应了知为“ñeyya”(应知)。于指出文句过失之后,正值此机,我将明示这些 apakkamā 等的例证。显示巴利原文
59.‘‘Ñeyya’’miccādi. Apakkamādīnaṃ yathāuddiṭṭhānaṃ lakkhīyati udāharaṇamanenāti atthena lakkhaṇaṃ anvatthavasena apagato kamo yattha taṃ apakkamantiādinā atthānugamanavasena ñeyyaṃ viññātabbaṃ. Idāni vākyadose niddisitvā avasarappatte imasmiṃ kāle etesaṃ apakkamādīnaṃ udāharaṇaṃ lakkhiyaṃ ahaṃ sandassayāmi pakāsessāmi.
59 59. 今依已宣说之次第,以“ñeyya”等阐明 apakkamā 等之义理过失。所谓 apakkamā 等,即 apakkamo、ocita(失宜)、hīna(下劣)等,其相乃是使以 apakkamā 等为境之智得以无倒转生起的因,依随义理,随顺“yatthi”等词义之慧,当以“ñeyya”(应知)了知,并非单独施设其相——此义已说。今我表明这些 apakkamā 等之例证。其词分解为:随顺义即是 anvattha;随顺义之慧之理,即 anvatthassa ñāṇassa vaso。显示巴利原文
59. Idāni uddiṭṭhānukkamena apakkamādiatthadosāni vibhāveti ‘‘ñeyya’’miccādinā. Apakkamādīnaṃ apakkamocityahīnādīnaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ apakkamādivisayabuddhiyā aviparītavuttiyā pavattikāraṇaṃ anvatthavasena apagato kamo yatthiccādivacanatthānugatañāṇavasena ñeyyaṃ ñātabbaṃ, visuṃ lakkhaṇaṃ na vadāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Idāni ahaṃ etesaṃ apakkamādīnaṃ udāharaṇaṃ lakkhiyaṃ sandassayāmi. Atthānugatamanvatthaṃ anvatthassa ñāṇassa vasoti viggaho.
修习、布施与持戒,我皆正善圆满;
无疑成就享乐、天趣与涅槃之因。
显示巴利原文 Bhāvanādānasīlāni, sammā sampāditāni’ha; Bhogasaggādinibbāna-sādhanāni na saṃsayo.
60 60.「修习」等。由无贪等因的成就,正善圆满而达成。此中,享乐、天趣与涅槃之因,依次为布施、持戒与修习,而非修习、布施与持戒。显示巴利原文
60.‘‘Bhāvanā’’iccādi. Sammā alobhādihetusampattiyā sakkaccaṃ sampāditāni nipphāditāni. Ettha bhogasaggādinibbānānaṃ hetavo yathākkamaṃ dānasīlabhāvanāyo, na tu bhāvanādānasīlāni.
60 60. 其中,关于他们之次序错乱等,如“次序错乱”之例证所示。于“ocita(失宜)”、“hīna(下劣)”等以“yathā”等引出之例中,其义亦应如是了知。“Bhāvanā(修习)”等。即于此生之中,依无贪等因缘之成就,已正善圆满、殷勤积集之修习、布施、戒,乃受用资具、生于善趣、获得长寿、无病等乃至涅槃之成就因。于同类与异类异熟之施设中,并无疑惑。在此,若布施、持戒、修习依次为受用资具、生善趣、证涅槃之因,则果之次第与因之次第相违,此便名为“次序错乱”。显示巴利原文
60.Tattha tesu apakkamādīsu apakkamaṃ yathā apakkamassodāharaṇamevaṃ. Ocityahīnaṃ yathātyādīsupi evamattho veditabbo. ‘‘Bhāvani’’ccādi. Iha imasmiṃ attabhāve sammā sampāditāni alobhādihetusampattiyā sakkaccaṃ sampāditāni rāsikatāni bhāvanādānasīlāni bhogasaggādinibbānasādhanāni upabhogaparibhogāni, sagguppattiāyuārogyādīni, nibbānañceti etesaṃ sādhakāni. Na saṃsayo sadisavisadisavipākadāne saṃsayo nāma natthi. Ettha bhogasagganibbānānaṃ hetubhūtā pana kamato dānasīlabhāvanāyo bhavantīti phalakkamassa hetukkamaṃ viruddhamiti kamāpetaṃ nāma hoti.
61.Pūjanīyataro loke, aha’meko nirantaraṃ. Mayekasmiṃ guṇā sabbe, yato samuditā ahuṃ.
61 “应受敬重”等句。由于什么缘故,一切戒等功德唯在我一人中集起、成为聚集,因此之故,在此众生世间中,唯我一人,恒常不断地更为应受敬重,是超胜的应受敬重者。如此自赞,非善士所乐。显示巴利原文
61.‘‘Pūjanīyi’’ccādi. Yato yasmā kāraṇā sabbe guṇā sīlādayo ekasmiṃ kevale mayi eva samuditā rāsibhūtā ahuṃ ahesuṃ, tasmā kāraṇā imasmiṃ sattaloke eko kevalo ahameva nirantaraṃ satataṃ pūjanīyataro atisayena pujjoti. Evamattapasaṃsanamarucitaṃ sappurisassa.
61 “更为应受敬重”等句。由于什么缘故,一切戒等功德唯在我这独一无二的我中集起、成为聚集,因此之故,在世间、众生世间中,唯我一人、独一无二,恒常不断地更为应受敬重,是超胜的应受敬重者。如此自赞,因不合宜而有退堕,故名为不合宜之劣。显示巴利原文
61.‘‘Pūjanīyatare’’ccādi. Yato yasmā sabbe guṇā sīlādayo ekasmiṃ mayi adutiye mayi eva samuditā rāsibhūtā ahuṃ ahesuṃ, tasmā loke sattaloke eko adutiyo ahameva nirantaraṃ satataṃ pūjanīyataro atisayena pūjanīyo. Evaṃ attappasaṃsanato ucitatāya parihānīti ocityahīnaṃ nāma.
Yācitohaṃ kathaṃ nāma, na dajjāmyapi jīvitaṃ; Tathāpi puttadānena, vedhate hadayaṃ mama.
62 62.“被乞求”等句。在此,虽已示现了“若他们来乞,我甚至将生命施与乞者”的广大心量,却还描述布施子女时心之震动,这即是须大拏所说之不合宜语。显示巴利原文
62.‘‘Yācito’’iccādi. Ettha ‘‘yadi yāciṃsu, jīvitampi yācakānaṃ dajjāmī’’ti dassitodāratāyānucitaṃ puttadāne hadayapavedhanakathanaṃ vessantarassa yajjevamavoca.
62 62.又如,如此亦应视为不合宜、低劣的示例,即“被乞求”等句。我被乞求——被乞者们所乞求,如何能不施舍,乃至生命呢?即便如此,虽有如此的布施意乐,因布施子女,我心震动、颤抖。此处,须大拏曾立下誓言:“若他们来乞,我甚至将生命施与乞者”,却述说因布施子女而心之颤抖,这与称为舍离超胜的广大功德不相称,故为不合宜的低劣之语。显示巴利原文
62.Yathā ca, evampi ocityahīnassa udāharaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘yācito’’ccādi. Yācito yācakehi yācito ahaṃ jīvitamapi kathaṃ nāma na dajjāmi, tathāpi evaṃ dānajjhāsaye satipi puttadānena mama hadayaṃ vedhate kampate. Ettha vessantarassa ‘‘yadi yāceyyuṃ, jīvitamapi yācakānaṃ dajjāmī’’ti katapaṭiññāya puttadānena hadayakampanassa kathanaṃ cāgātisayayogasaṅkhātaudāraguṇassa ananucchavikanti ocityahīnaṃ.
对于女人与恶人,不应生起信任;
对于毒、角兽、河流、疾病,以及王宫亦然。
显示巴利原文 Itthīnaṃ dujjanānañca, vissāso nopapajjate; Vise siṅgimhi nadiyaṃ, roge rājakulamhī ca.
63 63. “女人”等句:“不应产生”即不相应。此处,以“于毒”等依处而显示第七格,舍弃了关联的属格,这是对义理的破坏。由于开头与中间略去了“和”字,这是对音韵的破坏;音韵本无定则,破坏的方式亦无定则。然而,此例仅是略示其方向。显示巴利原文
63.‘‘Itthīna’’miccādi. Nopapajjate na yujjati. Ettha sambandhe chaṭṭhiyā pariccāgena viseiccādinā ādhāre sattamīniddeso attharītiyā bhaṅgo. Ādo majjhe ca cakārapariccāgā saddarītiyā bhaṅgo, rītīnaṃ anantattā bhaṅgāpyanantā. Udāharaṇaṃ tu disāmattaṃ.
63 63.“女性”等。对女性与恶人不应生起信任,因为基于共住等所产生的信任会招致无益与危险,并不合适。对于毒药、有角之兽、有毒的大地、河流,以及增长中的疾病、施行杀戮捆绑等的王族,也不应生起信任。此处,起初以属格表示关联,随后舍弃属格而用依格表述,故有“义理”之说;又因在开头与中间都舍去了“ca”字,故有“音声”之说。使用“ca”字时,应将其置于开头、末尾或各自连接。这样的用法称为“风格破坏”。由于风格众多,风格破坏的过失也有多种。此处仅为略示纲要。显示巴利原文
63.‘‘Itthīna’’miccādi. Itthīnañca dujjanānañca vissāso sahavāsādīhi vissāso nopapajjate anatthasaṃsayānivattikāraṇattā na yujjati. Vise garaḷe ca siṅgimhi siṅgavati mahiṃ sādo ca nadiyañca roge vaḍḍhamānake roge ca rājakulamhi ca vadhabandhanādikārake rājakule ca vissāso nopapajjate. Ettha ādo sambandhe chaṭṭhiyā ārabhitvā taṃ pahāya sattamiyā vuttattā attharīti ca, ādimajjhesu casaddapariccāgato saddarīti ca bhinnā. Casaddaṃ payuñjantena ādo eva vā ante eva vā paccekaṃ vā yojetabbaṃ hoti. Īdiso payogo rītibhaṅgo nāma hoti. Rītīnaṃ bahuttā rītibhaṅgadosāpi bahuvidhā. Idaṃ pana mukhamattanidassanaṃ.
眼目因贪著牟尼月轮的光明之味而摇摆不定者;
如同已踏上路途的人,因见到牛迹而心生欢喜。
显示巴利原文 Munindacandimāloka-rasalolavilocano; Jano’vakkantapantho’va, gopadassanapīṇito.
64 “Munindi”等:牟尼主犹如月亮,牟尼主即是月亮。其“见”为观看,“光明”即光辉。对此有爱味、贪著,因而眼目浮动不定的人,便是进入、踏上、步入道路者,也就是“已踏上道路者”。或因见到牛的光芒,或因见到被视为祥瑞的牛迹而满足、欢喜。此处也可能被理解为“因见到牛的形象”,故有疑惑。显示巴利原文
64.‘‘Munindi’’ccādi. Candimā viya candimā, munindoyeva candimā, tassa ālokanaṃ dassanaṃ, āloko pakāso vā, tasmiṃ raso anurāgo, tena lolāni capalāni locanāni akkhīni yassa so jano avakkanto okkanto paviṭṭho pantho maggo yena avakkantapantho eva gunnaṃ raṃsīnaṃ, iṭṭhatthanipphattisūcakabhāvena gopadatthassa vā padassanena pīṇito muditoti ettha gorūpassa padassanenātipi viññāyatīti sandeho.
64 “Munindi”等:所谓“牟尼主月光明味著浮动眼者”——眼目因对名为牟尼主的月亮的光明之见,或对其显现的爱味与执著而浮动不定的人,如同已踏上道路者、已进入道路者,意为为了见佛而进入道路。“因见到牛迹而满足”:因见到称为牛的光芒之迹而满足,或因见到被视为吉祥的牛迹而满足。此处,由于“因见到牛迹”这一意义可被推知,故生起疑惑,即称为“有疑”。而“已踏上道路者”的解析为:道路由彼所踏上;又,“牛的光芒”或“牛的足迹”;以及“因见到牛迹而满足”。显示巴利原文
64.‘‘Munindi’’ccādi. Munindacandimālokarasalolavilocano munindasaṅkhātassa candimassa āloke dassane pātubhāve vā rasena ālayena cañcalanetto jano avakkantapanthova otiṇṇamaggova buddhassa dassanatthāya maggamotiṇṇoti adhippāyo. Gopadassanapīṇito gosaṅkhātaraṃsipadassanena, abhimaṅgalasammatagopadassanena vā santuṭṭho hoti. Ettha gopadassanenāti ca atthassa gamyamānattā viññātuṃ saṃsayo uppajjatīti sasaṃsayaṃ nāma. Avakkanto pantho yenāti ca, gunnaṃ raṃsīnaṃ, gāvassa vā padassananti ca, gopadassanena pīṇitoti ca viggaho.
就语句的义理而言,难以了知,便被视为粗俗,例如:
这个具足精进的人,战胜敌人后,安然而息。
显示巴利原文 Vākyatthato duppatīti-karaṃ gāmmaṃ mataṃ yathā; Poso vīriyavāso’yaṃ, paraṃ hantvāna vissami.
65 65.“语词”等。战胜、击败敌人之后,这位具足精进、勇猛的人,是安歇的、放心的。这个意义尚不难理解。但如果理解为:将敌人彻底毁灭后,具足精进、出身正当的人安歇了,这个意义就难以理解了。显示巴利原文
65.‘‘Vākya’’iccādi. Paraṃ sattuṃ hantvāna paharitvā vīriyavā sūro soyaṃ poso puriso vissami vissattho. Ayamattho tāva na duppatīto. Paraṃ accantaṃ hantvāna vīriyavā ucitasambhavo soyaṃ poso vissamīti duppatītoyamattho.
65 65. 由于词义上的特征不明显,为阐明其自相,故举出“从语句义上”等作为例子。从语句义上难以理解且呈现相违的,便被认为是粗俗的。例如这样举例:战胜敌人、消灭敌人后,具足精进、勇猛的人安歇下来,即远离了疲劳——这个意义是可取的。而如果将敌人彻底地、以极端方式消灭后,一个具足精进、积累了出身、积累了精液的人,以努力而安歇,即远离了努力——由于此义不雅,故为粗俗。所谓“精进”,即是努力或出身;他具足此,应如此解析。显示巴利原文
65. Anvatthavasena lakkhaṇassa apākaṭattā salakkhaṇaṃ lakkhiyamudāharati ‘‘vākyatthato’’ccādinā. Vākyatthato duppatītikaraṃ viruddhappakāsakaṃ gāmmanti mataṃ. Yathāti udāharati. Paraṃ sattuṃ hantvāna māretvāna vīriyavā sūro so ayaṃ poso vissami vigataparissamo ahosi, ayamattho iṭṭho. Paraṃ atisayena hantvāna vītikkamaṃ katvā vīriyavā upacitasambhavo upacitasukko so ayaṃ puriso vāyāmena vissami vigatavāyāmo ahosīti. Imassatthassa asabbhārahattā gāmmattaṃ. Vīriyaṃ ussāho sambhavo vā assa atthīti viggaho.
那是被毁坏的庄严,即庄严被败坏之处;
在对其庄严的解说之中,其相貌将得以显现。
显示巴利原文 Duṭṭhālaṅkaraṇaṃ tetaṃ, yatthālaṅkāradūsanaṃ; Tassālaṅkāraniddese, rūpamāvībhavissati.
66 第六十六颂:“Duṭṭhā”等。在某个语句中,诸庄严被毁坏、变得丑陋,这便名为“坏庄严”。该坏庄严的行相、自性,将在名为“庄严解说”的篇章中显现、阐明,意即:我将在那里对其予以展示。显示巴利原文
66.‘‘Duṭṭhā’’iccādi. Yattha yasmiṃ vākye alaṅkārānaṃ dūsanaṃ vikaṭatā, etantu duṭṭhālaṅkaraṇaṃ duṭṭhālaṅkaraṇaṃ nāma, tassa duṭṭhālaṅkārassa rūpaṃ sarūpaṃ alaṅkāraniddese taṃnāmake paricchede āvībhavissati pakāsissati, tattheva taṃ dassayissāmīti adhippāyo.
66 第六十六:“坏庄严”等。若某一语句中,庄严被毁坏、诸庄严相违,则这一依托句义的语句即名为“坏庄严”(duṭṭhālaṅkaraṇa)。此以坏庄严过失为特征的语句之形态、自相与所诠,将在庄严解说中、作为诸庄严示例之处的章节里显现。此处虽已提及,但意谓:若在此处说明,别处也仍需说明,故此处不说。在总说中已提到“duṭṭhālaṅkatī”,现在说“duṭṭhālaṅkaraṇa”;由于“alaṅkati”“alaṅkaraṇa”“alaṅkāra”这些词意义相同,因此并不相违。显示巴利原文
66.‘‘Duṭṭhālaṅkari’’ccādi. Yattha vākye alaṅkāradūsanaṃ alaṅkārānaṃ virodho hoti, etaṃ vākyatthanissitaṃ etaṃ vākyaṃ duṭṭhālaṅkaraṇaṃ duṭṭhālaṅkāro nāma, tassa duṭṭhālaṅkaraṇadosopalakkhitavākyassa rūpaṃ sarūpaṃ lakkhiyaṃ alaṅkāraniddese alaṅkārānaṃ nidassanaṭṭhānabhūte paricchede āvībhavissati. Ettha vuttepi puna tatthāpi vattabbaṃ siyāti na vuttanti adhippāyo. Uddese ‘‘duṭṭhālaṅkatī’’ti vatvā idāni ‘‘duṭṭhālaṅkaraṇa’’nti vacanaṃ alaṅkati alaṅkaraṇaalaṅkārasaddānaṃ tulyatthattā na virujjhati.
Kato’tra saṅkhepanayā mayā’yaṃ, Dosānamesaṃ pavaro vibhāgo; Eso’va’laṃ bodhayituṃ kavīnaṃ, Tamatthi ce khedakaraṃ parampi.
67 67. 如此,依所立誓约“我将宣说其例证与特征”,现在便以“在此”等开头,以结摄的方式略作说明。所谓“在此”,即于此章或此品中,对于前述过失——如句过失等,我以简略方式,即略摄次第,而非广说,作了最胜的分别,因为过失无量,实无边际。难道因说“以简略方式”,古时所阐明的众多过失便被舍弃了吗?对此,回答说:并非全然舍弃,只因不欲广说次第,故说“以简略方式”。正如:显示巴利原文
67. Evaṃ ‘‘sodāharaṇametesaṃ, lakkhaṇaṃ kathayāmyaha’’nti katapaṭiññānurūpaṃ paṭipajja dāni ‘‘katotri’’ccādinā nikkhipananayaṃ saṅkhipati. Atra imasmiṃ adhikāre, paricchede vā esaṃ yathāvuttānaṃ dosānaṃ padadosādīnaṃ pavaro uttamo vibhāgo vibhajanaṃ saṅkhepanayā saṅkhepakkamena, na vitthārato, yato aparisaṅkhyeyyānaṃ natthi pariyanto mayā kato niṭṭhāpito. Nanu ‘‘saṅkhepanayā’’ti vuttattā purātanehi dīpitā santi bahū dosā, te pariccattā siyunti? Ettha vuccate, vitthārakkamassa anadhippetattā ‘‘saṅkhepanayā’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana sabbathā pariccāgena. Tathā hi–
“愿那飞蛾扑灭这燃着敌意的火焰”等语句。显示巴利原文
‘‘Nihantu soyaṃ jalitaṃ, pataṅgo aripāvaka’’ntiādīnaṃ
不能容忍其他含义等,以及追随相违的其他含义。在此,若以“飞蛾”一词欲表示萤火虫等其他意义,由于不相称,便成为不如意;如“他们说痈疮”等不吉祥、不适当的词,则归属于杂染之中。显示巴利原文
Akkhamatthantarādikaṃ viruddhatthantarānugatanti ca. Ettha hi pataṅgasaddena jotiriṅgaṇasaṅkhātamatthantaramasamatthamicchitatthe ‘‘vacanti gaṇḍā’’tyevamādikaṃ amaṅgalaapayuttapadādikaṃ kiliṭṭhe antogadhanti ca.
如“象”等之喻,因关联不当而有失,属于与世间相违;在声闻教法等中,于众所周知的色蕴等之外所说者,称为“不著名”。此为与教法相违。而关联不当及不著名等,则包含于“相违”之中。又,由于须引出其因,依于原因而应被推导了知,故并不相离。显示巴利原文
Gajahesādi sambandhadūsitaṃ lokavirodhi, sogatāgamādīsu pasiddhaṃ rūpakkhandhādikamaññatra vuttaṃ appatītaṃ nāma. Idaṃ āgamavirodhiiti, sambandhadūsitappatītādikaṃ virodhimhi paviṭṭhanti ca, ānetabbahetuttā hetvapekkhaṃ neyyato na byatiriccatīti ca.
愿天神除却烦恼,犹如被罗睺所逼的太阳(重放光明)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Devo voharatu klesaṃ, rāhukhinno divākaro’’
诸如「无力表达所指」等,即归入「缺乏适当性」;而令人厌恶、暗示一切不净的歧义词与粗俗词,则归入「令人不悦」;关联粗野者亦然。显示巴利原文
Iccādikaṃ asāmatthyābhidheyyādikaṃ ocityahīne saṅgahitanti ca. Jigucchaasabbhasaṃsūcakaatthantarakañca gāmmaṃ duppatītikare saṅgayhatīti ca. ( ) Sabandhapharusameveti ca.
然而在此,虽然「缺乏适当性」与「令人不悦」属于句义的过失,而「粗野」属于句子的过失,但依词与词义的过失,句子本身即有过失;且句子由词所成,若词有过失,句义亦有过失。为阐明词之过失与句子、句义并非截然不同,故将「无力表达所指」等词之过失,置于「缺乏适当性」等句义过失中加以论述。正如古师们所示:由具有相违义等过失之词所构成的句子,即是「相违」等,如此显示了众多有过失的句子。例如「harisamānayī」一词,本想表达「hari samānayī」(带来哈里),却因前置「ha」而成为「risa'mānayī」,所欲表达的意义便已失坏。以不著名之词表达多义者,则为隐晦,如「sakko sahassagū」(帝释千眼)。如是,失坏义、隐晦义等,即与明净庄严相违。显示巴利原文
Ettha pana ocityahīnaduppatītikarānaṃ vākyatthadosattepi phandhapharusassa ca vākyadosatte padapadatthānaṃ dosato vākyameva duṭṭhaṃ siyā, vākyañca padehi viriccate, pade duṭṭhe vākyattho ca duṭṭho siyā. Padadosato vākyavākyatthānaṃ nānābhāvābhāvañāpanatthaṃ asāmatthiyābhidheyyādikaṃ padaṃ ocityahīnādivākyatthadosādīsu anto kathitaṃ. Tathā hi purātanehi viruddhatthantarādīhi padehi viracitaṃ vākyaṃ viruddhantiādinā bahūni duṭṭhāni vākyāni dassitāni. ‘‘Harisamānayī’’ti ettha hapubbaṃ risa’mānayīti icchitatthā pari bhaṭṭhaṃ bhaṭṭhaṃ. Nānatthamappasiddhehi yuttaṃ guḷhaṃ, yathā ‘‘sakko sahassagū’’ti. Iti bhaṭṭhaguḷhatthādayo pasādālaṅkāraviruddhāti ca.
在句子方面,亦有“此处无连声、不适用”等情况;一句之中插入另一句,称为“句中嵌句”;词与另一句之词混杂交错,如“apāthyameso dissati, vejjaṃ khādatyanārata”等,称为“句混杂”,这些均归入“杂乱”之中。显示巴利原文
Vākyepi visandhikamihānupayogīti ca, vākyantaropagataṃ vākyaṃ vākyagabbhaṃ, vākyantarapadasammissaṃ ‘‘apāthyameso dissati, vejjaṃ khādatyanārata’’miccādikaṃ vākyasaṃkiṇṇañca byākiṇṇe samohitanti ca.
我曾于某园中,见一藤蔓,生五嫩叶;
其每一嫩叶之上,徒然有花簇。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kācuyyāne mayā diṭṭhā, vallarī pañcapallavā; Pallave pallave mudhā, yassā kusumamañcarī’’ti.
这就是“无意义语”,属于谜语、忘失、依附等。在此,诗人想用“园”字表示屋舍,用表示藤蔓的“vallarī”一词表示女子,用“嫩叶”表示手足和唇齿,用“花簇”表示指甲的光泽与牙齿的美丽。然而,在句义中,诸如“夜莲夜间绽放”等相违之事,则归入“相违”与“隐伏”之中,既非全然认可,亦非完全舍弃。这便是依前所述之理所作的总结,这一简要的道理正是令有识的诗人感到厌烦之处——“既然有这么多过失,为何还要这样造作呢?”——如此心念迅速生起(不满)。此外,在词的过失中,还有不善巧、可疑、同义难知、不著名义、无用、难解、方俗语等;在句的过失中,有增、减、破律等;在句义的过失中,有首尾不称等。若有其他诸如此类的过失,智者也可依照前述过失之理,类推而了知悟解,并非不能。显示巴利原文
Idamavācakaṃ paheḷikāya pamussitāsannissitanti ca, tattha ca kavinā uyyānasaddena gehaṃ, latāvācinā vallarīsaddena aṅganā, pallavasaddena karacaraṇadasanacchadā, mañcarīsaddena nakhasobhā dantakantiyo ca vattumicchitā, vākyatthepi paduminīnaṃ rattiyamunniddatādikaṃ viruddhaṃ virodhinilīnanti ca nātyanuññātā, na tu sabbathā pariccāgena. Esova evaṃ yathāvuttanayena niṭṭhāpito ayaṃ saṅkhepanayo eva kavīnaṃ paṇḍitajanānaṃ khedakaraṃ ‘‘kathaṃ nāma bandhepīdisaṃ sati santī’’ti evamāsuhanopajanaṃ paraṃ padadose asādhusandiddhapariyāya ñeyyaappatītatthaappayojaka dubbodhadesiyādikaṃ, vākyadose adhikaūnabhaggacchandādikaṃ, vākyatthadose upakkamopasaṃhāravisamañceti iccevamādikamaparampi dūsanaṃ atthi ce yadi bhaveyya, tampi bodhayitumavagametuṃ alaṃ samatthaṃ yathāvuttadosānusārena buddhimantehi sakkā ūhitunti.
作者这样说,他的用意是:凡未详细分别的过失,我因顾虑著作繁重而略加说明,但依据其相状,实则已完全摄尽。因为,实在没有人能将它们的边际舍弃。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vadato ca ganthakārassāyamadhippāyo – ye dosā vibhāgaso na vuttā, te mayā ganthagāravabhayā saṅkhepitā, lakkhaṇato tu saṅgahitā. Na hi tesamantaṃ ko jahāpeti.
其中,与声论相违者为“不善巧”。凡是依动作等因缘而用于他义,仅仅作为名称而使用的,为“可疑”,例如“ravimhihimahā”(于日、于雪、于大地),但此词在简别义中则是善巧的。以著名名称的同义词而施设的词,为“同义难知”,如“vaḷavāmukhena”(以牝马之口),此处即“assavanitānanena”(以牝马之面)。凡以绝对不离之性而说明所简别者的功德者,为“不著名义”,如“kaṇhamasī”(黑墨)。已获得的意义却不适用,为“无用”,如“atiphenilaṃ sāgaramalaṅghī”(越过极多泡沫之海)。“manuññaddhanayo pāde, khādayo kani bhanti te”等为“难解”:其中“kani”指少女,“khādayo”指脚镯。“ime lāvaṇyatallā te, gallā lolavilocane”等为“方俗语”:“tallo”指某种水池,“gallo”指脸颊。又如“saggasevīnaṃ ripūnamitthīnamakaṅkaṇo p”等。显示巴利原文
Tattha saddasatthaviruddhamasādhu. Yaṃ kriyādinimittamupādāya atthantarepi vattate, taṃ saññābhāveneva payuttaṃ sandiddhaṃ, yathā ‘‘ravimhihimahā’’ti, idaṃ pana visesanatthe sādhu hoti. Pasiddhasaññāsaddassa pariyāyantarena parikappitapadaṃ pariyāyañeyyaṃ, yathā ‘‘vaḷavāmukhene’’ti ettha ‘‘assavanitānanena’’ iti. Yaṃ accantābyabhicārībhāvena visesyassa guṇaṃ vadati, taṃ appatītatthaṃ, yathā ‘‘kaṇhamasī’’ti. Adhigatatthānupayogaṃ appayojakaṃ, yathā ‘‘atiphenilaṃ sāgaramalaṅghī’’ti. ‘‘Manuññaddhanayo pāde, khādayo kani bhanti te’’ iccādiko dubbodho, kani kaññe khādayo gaggharikā. ‘‘Ime lāvaṇyatallā te, gallā lolavilocane’’iccādiko desiyo, tallo jalāsayaviseso, gallo kapolo. ‘‘Saggasevīnaṃ ripūnamitthīnamakaṅkaṇo pāṇi. Nettamanañjana’’ntiādikaṃ adhikaṃ. ‘‘Akaṅkaṇo pāṇī’’tiādinā vedhabyassa gammamānattā ‘‘saggasevīna’’nti adhikanti. Yattha vattabbassa ūnatā, taṃ ūnaṃ, yathā ‘‘tilokatilakaṃ muni’’ntiādi. Ettha ‘‘vandāmī’’ti ūnaṃ, chandobhaṅgānvitaṃ vaco bhaggacchandaṃ pākaṭaṃ. Ārambhāvasānena visamaṃ upakkamopasaṃhāravisamaṃ, taṃ pana āraddhakkamapariccāgenāparena nikkhipanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
67 如此,前文“我将举例说明这些特征”的许诺便已成立。现在,以“由我所作”等结语来总结过失。于此,即在此章或此节中,对于这些如前所述的词句过失等过失,最殊胜的分类——不违特征且藉由特征所显明、无有混杂的分别——是由我以略说方式,也就是应加广说的略说法门,所讲述出来的。正是这如前所述的略说法门,能消除诗人们在创作时生起的种种疑虑,如“在这样的诗体中,我究竟该如何运用这样的表达”等烦恼;并且,如果还有其他如不净、含糊等过失,它也能完全使人明了。此外,未说之义也由此可知。所谓“略说”,即兼具“略要”与“方法”之义。显示巴利原文
67. Evaṃ ‘‘sodāharaṇametesaṃ, lakkhaṇaṃ kathayāmyaha’’nti katapaṭiññānurūpaṃ sampādetvā idāni ‘‘katotre’’ccādinā nigamento dose saṅkhipati. Atra imasmiṃ adhikāre, paricchede vā esaṃ dosānaṃ yathāvuttapadadosādīnaṃ pavaro lakkhaṇāvirodhalakkhiyato uttamo vibhāgo asaṅkarato vibhajanaṃ saṅkhepanayā vitthārāpaniyasaṅkhepakkamena mayā kato vutto esova yathāvutto eso saṅkhepakkamo eva kavīnaṃ viracayantānaṃ khedakaraṃ bandhasarīre īdisaṃ īdisappayogaṃ kathaṃ nāma karomīti evaṃ pavattakhedamuppādayantaṃ parampi asādhusandiddhādi aññampi dūsanamatthi ce, taṃ sabbaṃ bodhayituṃ bodhetuṃ alaṃ samattho hoti. Niyati avuttopi attho etenāti ca, saṅkhepo ca so nayo cāti viggaho.
“愿那飞蛾扑灭这炽燃的敌火”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Nihantu soyaṃ jalitaṃ, pataṅgo aripāvaka’’ntiādikaṃ
由于落入相反意义之中,诸如音节、词义差异等与相反意义相违的情况,在此便不予解说。此处,意为太阳的pataṅga一词,也可指萤火虫;因此,当想要表达“消灭敌人之火”时,它就成了不合目的的其他含义。显示巴利原文
Akkhamatthantarādikaṃ viruddhatthantare anupatattā na vuttaṃ, ettha sūriyavācako pataṅgasaddo jotiriṅgaṇavācakopi hotīti vattumicchitaamittaggivināse asamatthaññattho hoti.
“说恶声”等,在圣典中并不显著,唯依特征而成立。用词不当等过失已包含于污秽词过失之中,故不另述。显示巴利原文
‘‘Vacanti gaṇḍi’’ccādikaṃ āgame appasiddhaṃ lakkhaṇamattena sādhiyaṃ. Appayuttapadādidoso kiliṭṭhapadadose antogadho hotīti na vutto.
象、马、孔雀等关联词所染污的过失,以及在胜者教法等中著名的蕴等,若用于他处,则成令人不解之名——此二者依次成为世间相违与圣教相违,故包含于相违词中。因须引因、为所引因故,包含于可推导过失中,故未另述。显示巴利原文
Gajahesāturaṅgakoñcanādādisambandhadūsitañca. Jināgamādīsu pasiddharūpakkhandhādikamaññatra payuttamappatītannāmātīdaṃ dvayaṃ yathākkamaṃ lokavirodhamāgamavirodhañca hotīti virodhipade antogadhaṃ hoti. Hetvapekkhaṃ ānetabbahetuttā neyye antogadhanti na vuttaṃ.
愿天消除烦恼,日轮却为罗睺所恼。显示巴利原文
‘‘Devo voharatu klesaṃ, rāhukhinno divākaro’’
此类内容已包含于“无力表述”等及“缺乏适当性”之中,故未另作说明。此处,日轮自身为罗睺所执,无力去除他人烦恼;其无能为力之义,即由修饰语“为罗睺所恼”一词可得而了知。显示巴利原文
Iccādikaṃ asamatthābhidhāyiccādi ocityahīne antogadhanti na vuttaṃ. Ettha divākaro sayaṃ rāhugahito aññesaṃ kilesāpanayane asamatthoti tamasāmatthiyaṃ visesanabhūtena ‘‘rāhukhinno’’ti padena ñāyati.
于厌恶、不祥、不雅三者之中,任一者的能显、能说或其他含义,因令人不悦而成鄙俗,故已摄入句义鄙俗之过失中,不再另述。难发音、粗硬、无区别等,因其为结缚粗硬之相,故亦不另述。当说“harisamānayī”而说成“hapubbaṃ risa'mānayi”等,便因偏离所欲表达之义而成为堕落;又如“sakko sahassagū”等在不易察觉处使用而成隐晦——这些义理隐晦等过失,因与明净庄严相违,故由明净功德所摄而舍弃,不再另述。此处,“sahassaṃ gāvo cakkhūni assāti sahassagū”为帝释的隐晦名称。显示巴利原文
Jigucchāvamaṅgalaasabbhānaṃ tiṇṇamaññatrassa jotakaṃ vācakaṃ vā atthantaraṃ vā gāmmaṃ duppatītikarattā vākyatthagāmmadoseyeva antogadhanti na vuttaṃ. Duruccāraṇabhūtalakkhaṇaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ bandhapharusato abyatirittanti na vuttanti. ‘‘Harisamānayī’’ti vattabbe hapubbaṃ risa’mānayiiccādikaṃ icchitatthato paribhaṭṭhattā bhaṭṭhañca ‘‘sakko sahassagū’’iccādikaṃ apasiddhavisaye pariyuttaguḷhañceti ime atthaguḷhādayo pasādālaṅkāraviruddhattā pasādaguṇādāneneva pariccattāti na vuttaṃ. Ettha hi sahassaṃ gāvo cakkhūni assāti sahassagūti sakkassa nāmaṃ guḷhaṃ nāma hoti.
在句子的过失中,无连缀句因不适用此处,故未述及;句中嵌句——即嵌入句中的句子——以及句间词混杂,也是如此。显示巴利原文
Vākyadosepi visandhivākyaṃ idha anupayogittā na vuttaṃ. Vākyamajjhapatitavākyayuttaṃ vākyagabbhañca, vākyantarapadasammissaṃ.
“这不适宜者现前,恒时吞噬医师。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Apāthyameso dissati, vejjaṃ khādatyanārataṃ’’
如是等句之混杂,因已含摄于混杂之中,故不再赘述。此处,这位医师恒常、不断地讲述不适宜、于病无益之言;这位病人恒常、不断地进食不适宜、无益之食,并对医师显出恼怒。如此,即便连缀句由多个句子组成,也名为混杂。显示巴利原文
Iccādikaṃ vākyasaṃkiṇṇañca byākiṇṇe antogadhanti na vuttaṃ. Ettha eso bhisakko anārataṃ niccaṃ apāthyaṃ rogassa ahitaṃ dissati vadati. Eso rogī anārataṃ satataṃ apāthyaṃ ahitaṃ khādati. Vejjaṃ bhisakkaṃ dissati kujjhati. Evaṃ anekavākyehipi sandhivākyaṃ saṃkiṇṇaṃ nāma.
“我于迦秋优园中,见一五叶藤蔓;”
“其叶叶之上,徒然有花簇。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kācuyyāne mayā diṭṭhā, vallarī pañcapallavā; Pallave pallave mudhā, yassā kusumamañcarī’’ti.
此言并非指在谜语中被遗忘、被依附者,故未宣说。难道在此,因自己未显示谜语,便将不表义之语归入被遗忘者之中,是以未成立来成立未成立吗?并非如此。因为通过“一切皆被舍弃,我因惧弟子疲劳”及之后为遮除烦恼词过患而说的“此谜语已确立,非恶非秽”等,也显示了古时所称的十六谜语,故是以已成立来成立未成立。其中,诗人想用“园”字表示家,用藤蔓的同义词“蔓”字表示女子,用“叶”字表示手、脚、唇等,用“花簇”一词表示指甲、牙齿的光彩。显示巴利原文
Idamavācakaṃ paheḷikāsu pamussitāsannissitamiti na vuttaṃ. Nanu cettha attanā paheḷikāya adassitattā avācakassa pamussitāya antogadhakaraṇaṃ asiddhena asiddhasādhananti? Nayidamevaṃ, ‘‘upekkhiyanti sabbāni, sissakhedabhayā mayā’’ti ca upari kiliṭṭhapadadosaparihāre ‘‘paheḷikāyamāruḷhā, na hi duṭṭhā kiliṭṭhatā’’ti ceti iminā purātanehi niddiṭṭhasoḷasapaheḷikāyopi dassitāti siddhena asiddhasādhanaṃ hoti. Tattha kavinā uyyānasaddena gehañca latāpariyāyavallarīsaddena aṅganā ca pallavasaddena karacaraṇādharā ca mañcarīsaddena nakhadantakantiyo ca vattumicchitā.
至于句义过失中,诸如“莲花在夜间开放”等相违者,因已含摄在相违词本身之中而未予说明;为显明此义,故说“在此以简略方式”,并非意味着它们被全然舍弃。此处,当存在两种不合时宜、令人不悦的句义过失,存在粗糙连结的句子过失,以及存在相违的词语过失时,“不能表达义”等词、“显示三种厌恶”等词、粗劣词,以及“莲花在夜间开放”等句义——这四种过失,是如何被含摄在不同种类的不合时宜等之中的呢?诚然,当词语有瑕疵时,句子与句义不可能无过;故应知:为令学人了知词语过失与连音、句子、句义过失的不异性,词语过失等被包含在句义过失等之中。正因如此,应见古代以“相违义”等词所分别的句子即是相违等,由此显示了诸多有瑕疵的句子。显示巴利原文
Vākyatthadosepi paduminīnaṃ rattiyaṃ pabujjhanādikaṃ viruddhaṃ virodhipadeyeva antogadhattā na vuttanti dassetuṃ ‘‘katotra saṅkhepanayā’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana tesaṃ sabbathā pariccattattāti. Ettha ocityahīnaduppatītikarānaṃ dvinnaṃ vākyatthadosatte sati bandhapharusassa vākyadosatte sati virodhino padadosatte sati ‘‘asamatthābhidhāyi’’ādipadaṃ, ‘‘jigucchādittayapakāsakā’’dipadaṃ, kaṭṭhapadaṃ, paduminīnaṃ rattiyaṃ phullatādi vākyatthañceti ime cattāro dosā bhinnajātikesu ocityādīsu kathaṃ saṅgahitāti? Saccaṃ, tathāpi padānaṃ duṭṭhatte sati vākyavākyatthānamaduṭṭhatā nāma natthīti padadosena sandhivākyavākyatthadosānamanaññattaṃ sissānaṃ ñāpanatthaṃ padadosādikaṃ vākyatthadosādīsu saṅgahitanti veditabbaṃ. Imināyeva purātanehi viruddhatthantarādipadehi vicaritaṃ vākyaṃ viruddhantiādinā duṭṭhāni bahūni vākyāni dassitānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
即以此偈:“若彼有令疲劳者,于他亦尔”,在此以“他”一词,含摄了不雅、疑义、同义难解、义不显、无用、难解、方俗等词语过失,以及增减、破律等句子过失,和起结不称的句义过失。其中,与声论相违者,名为不雅。依作用成就之因,用于他义而转起之名,无简别义而用于名称所依者,名为疑义,如“太阳中有雪”。在此若作简别,谓“雪之太阳”,则无过失。以同义词代替公认专名而施设的词,名为同义难解,如“牝马面之马耳面”。无甚深义,而以修饰之辞说所饰者功德之词,名为义不显,如“黑墨水”。已解义而不适用之词,名为无用,如“极多泡沫之海”。不通行之语,名为难解,如:显示巴利原文
Imāyeva gāthāya ‘‘tamatthi ce khedakaraṃ parampī’’ti ettha parasaddenaasādhusandiddhapariyāyañeyyāppatītatthaappayojaka- dubbodhadesiyādipadadose ca adhikaūnabhaggacchandādivākyadose ca upakkamopasaṃhāravisamasaṅkhāte vākyatthadose ca pariggaṇhāti. Ettha saddasatthaviruddhamasādhu nāma. Kriyānipphattikāraṇamupādāya atthantare pavattanāmaṃ visesanatthena vinā saññābhājane payuttaṃ sandiddhaṃ nāma, yathā ‘‘ravimhi himahā’’ti. Ettha himahā ravīti visesane kate doso natthi. Pasiddhasaññāsaddassa pariyāyanāmena kappitapadaṃ pariyāyañeyyaṃ nāma, yathā ‘‘vaḷavāmukhassa assavanitānana’’nti. Atisayā vinā bhāvitatthena visesyassa guṇavācakaṃ padaṃ appatītatthaṃ nāma, yathā ‘‘kaṇhamasī’’ti. Adhigatattānupayogipadaṃ appayojakaṃ nāma, yathā ‘‘atiphenilaṃ sāgaramalaṅghī’’ti. Appasiddhavacanaṃ dubbodhaṃ nāma, yathā–
“少女啊,你脚上那声可爱者,那些虫儿在闪耀。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Manuññaddhanayo pāde, khādayo kani bhanti te’’ti.
“Kani”意为“少女啊”,“te tava pāde”意为“你的脚上”,“manuññaddhanayo”意为“具可爱音声者”,“khādayo”意为“虫”,“gaggharikā”意为“蟋蟀”,“bhanti”意为“闪耀、嬉戏”。仅在某一地方成立的名词,称为方俗。例如:显示巴利原文
Kani he kaññe te tavapāde manuññaddhanayo manoharasaddasamannāgatā khādayo gaggharikā bhanti dibbantīti. Kismiñci deseyeva siddhanāmaṃ desiyaṃ nāma. Yathā–
“你们这些可爱的少女啊,脸颊红润,眼波迷人。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ime lāvaṇyatallā te, gallā lolavilocane’’ti.
“喂,眼波流转者!你的这些脸颊,是迷人的池沼,是殊胜的水域。”依某种方便而显示义,并因此使用的,名为多余。例如:显示巴利原文
He lolavilocane te tava ime gallā kapolā lāvaṇyatallā manuññatallā jalāsayavisesā bhavanti. Kenaci lesena pakāsitamatthamupādāya payuttamadhikaṃ nāma. Yathā–
‘‘Tvayi rājati rājinda, ripūnaṃ saggasevinaṃ; Thīnaṃ akaṅkaṇo pāṇi, siyā nettamanañjana’’nti.
此处,仅凭“无镯之手,眼之膏”便可知那些妇女已为寡妇;因此,为显示此义而使用的“归于天界”一词,即名多余。应说而未说之句,名为不足。例如“三界之额饰,牟尼”中,应说“我礼敬”却未说,故为不足。与韵律减损相关的,名为破律;这由各韵律的字母计数增减而可知。首尾不相称者,名为首尾不称。此应知为:舍弃已开始的次第,而用另一中间次第作结。显示巴利原文
Ettha ‘‘akaṅkaṇo pāṇi, nettamanañjana’’nti imināyevathīnaṃ vidhavattaṃ gamyamānaṃ hotīti tappakāsanatthaṃ payuttaṃ ‘‘saggasevina’’nti idaṃ adhikaṃ nāma. Vattabbayuttato ūnaṃ vākyaṃ ūnaṃ nāma. ‘‘Tilokatilakaṃ muni’’nti ettha ‘‘vandāmī’’ti vattabbassa avuttattā ūnaṃ. Chandohānisaṃyuttaṃ bhaggacchandaṃ nāma. Idaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ chandānaṃ akkharagaṇanato ūnādhikavasena pākaṭaṃ hoti. Ādyantato visamaṃ upakkamopasaṃhāravisamaṃ nāma. Idaṃ āraddhakkamaṃ pariccajitvā kamantarena niyamanti veditabbaṃ.